Category: Kidde

Notes Bulletin E C H N I C A L S U P P O R T / N 1 2 0 3 7 F SA-DACT and Digital Phone Lines technical field note describes communication issues that you may encounter using the SA-DACT on digital phone lines and solutions to help resolve the issues. using the SA-DACT on digital phone lines, the dialer may not be able to the supervising station receiver, or it may not reach the receiver If the dialer cannot successfully communicate with the Central receiver and verify the signals were received by the receiver with a the dialer will post Delivery Fail on the panel LCD. This occur even when a dial tone is present and a phone call can be made to the using a telephone handset. handset 12037F ISS 10DEC12 / 4 symptoms reported include: The dialer will not attempt to dial. The dialer will dial over the dial tone and the dial tone never breaks. The dialer will dial and break the dial tone, but the operator comes on the line report that the phone number dialed was incorrect. The dialer will dial and break the dial tone, the receiver answers the call and data is transferred, and then the receiver hangs up. The dialer will dial and break the dial tone, the receiver answers the call and is transferred, and then the receiver hangs up, but a Dialer Delivery Fail still posted on the panel. have identified four changes that can help resolve the communication issues above. Before making changes, confirm that there are no telephone devices of the fire alarm panel. If so, remove them. Verify the voltage polarity of the phone line on the RJ31X/CA31X jack. With positive meter lead on Ring (RJ31X/CA31X terminal 4) and negative lead on Tip (RJ31X/CA31X terminal 5) you should measure between VDC and -56.5 VDC. If polarity is reversed, swap tip and ring. 12037F ISS 10DEC12 / 4 Add two pauses before the phone number is dialed. Add a pause by using the (comma) key from the panel keypad or in the Configuration Utility From the panel keypad go to Menu > Program > Advanced > Panel Configuration > CMS Device > Dialer > Account 1(2), Pri # and Sec Receiver #. From the CU, choose Panel > CMS > Telco > Phone. If a dialing prefix (such as is necessary and approved by the AHJ, the comma(s) after the prefix. If communications have not restored after trying the solutions above, change Line 1 (2) Dialing option from tone to pulse. From the panel keypad go Menu > Program > Advanced Program > Panel Configuration > CMS > Dialer > Line 1 (2) > Dialing. From the CU, choose Panel > CMS > Dialer > Properties, and then change Line 1 (2) to pulse. 12037F ISS 10DEC12 / 4 If communications are still not restored and you have the Configuration utility adjust the Telco Dialer Advance Configuration settings. Choose > CMS > Telco Dialer > Properties. Set Advanced Configuration to Yes, High Tone Level to 10, and the DTMF Twist Ratio to 10. you have performed all the changes listed above and the SA-DACT is still communications issues, contact Technical Support at the numbers listed support +1 855 286 8889 +1 866 226 2126 12037F ISS 10DEC12 / 4

firealarmresources.com

Series Fire Alarm Power Technical Reference 3100485-EN REV 007 ISS 28JAN21 and patents 2021 Carrier. All rights reserved. BPS Series Fire Alarm Power Supply name and E-shield logo are trademarks of trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of manufacturers or vendors of the respective products. compliance Union directives A: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Fire Department Certificate of Approval: MEA 476-91-E XIII (R&TTE directive): Hereby, Carrier declares that this device is in compliance the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. (WEEE directive): Products marked with this symbol cannot be disposed of unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. For proper recycling, return this to your local supplier upon the purchase of equivalent new equipment, or dispose it at designated collection points. For more information see: www.recyclethis.info. (battery directive): This product contains a battery that cannot be disposed as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. See the product documentation specific battery information. The battery is marked with this symbol, which may include to indicate cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), or mercury (Hg). For proper recycling, the battery to your supplier or to a designated collection point. For more see: www.recyclethis.info. contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. information information iii information iii of liability iii messages iii compliance iv 1 covered 1 1 procedure checklist 2 started 3 3 descriptions 3 4 indicators 5 the enclosure 7 Signature modules in the enclosure 8 standard Signature modules 8 SIGA-SEC2 modules 8 the circuit board in the enclosure 10 the jumpers 12 wiring class jumpers (JP1 and JP2) 12 fault detection jumper (JP3) 12 charging circuit jumper (JP4) 13 864 programming requirements 15 the DIP switches 16 circuit type (SW1-5 to 8 and SW2-1 to 4) 16 modes (SW1-1 to SW1-3) 17 delay (SW1-4) 19 signal synchronization for Continuous NACs (SW2-5) 19 relay operation (SW2-6) 20 power standby operation (SW2-7) 20 wiring class (SW2-8) 21 routing 22 the field wiring 23 power wiring 23 wiring 24 Class B wiring 25 Class A wiring 25 200 mA AUX power wiring 27 3100485-EN REV 007 ISS 28JAN21 power circuit wiring 27 relay wiring 28 circuit wiring 29 for opens, shorts, and ground faults, 30 wiring using CC1(S) modules 31 the 3-TAMP tamper switch 34 calculation worksheet 35 appliance circuit calculations 37 37 you need 37 method 39 method 40 Genesis signal synchronization 42 of power supplies 42 of visible outputs 43 of visible and audible outputs 43 45 45 circuit notification 46

Installation this device in accordance with applicable requirements in the editions of the NFPA codes and standards, and in accordance the local authorities having jurisdiction. Electrocution hazard. To avoid personal injury or death electrocution, remove all sources of power and allow stored to discharge before installing or removing equipment. Electrical supervision requires the wire run to be broken at terminal. Do not loop the signaling circuit field wires around the install the chime-strobe: Remove the cover by depressing both tabs on the top of the unit a small screwdriver and twisting slightly. Set the chime signal, sound output level, and desired operation See Figure 1. change the chime signal from steady to temporal, cut from J1 to the edge of the circuit board. change the chime operation from noncoded to coded (single- cut from circle J2 to the edge of the circuit board. change the chime sound output level from high dB to low dB, the J3 trace between the holes. Slide the candela switch to the desired candela output by aligning with the indicator located beside the switch. See Figure 2. Connect the chime terminals to the signal circuit field wiring. For unit to function properly, observe polarity. See Figure 1. single-stroke coded voltage operation, see Figure 3. constant noncoded voltage operation, see Figure 4. Mount the unit onto a compatible electrical box, making sure not to the mounting screws. Replace the cover by aligning it at the bottom, and then snaping it at the top. Test the unit for proper operation. 1: Chime settings J3 J1: Chime signal jumper J2: Coded/non-coded jumper J3: Chime sound output Chime-Strobe Sheet Genesis Chime-Strobe is a fire alarm notification appliance for indoor walls. See Table 1 for a list of models. chime includes field-configurable options for selecting dB output, signal, and constant noncoded voltage or single-stroke coded operation. A Genesis Series Signal Master is required when are configured for coded operation. strobe includes a field-configurable switch for selecting the desired output. The candela output setting is locked in place and visible after final installation. This strobe features an synchronization circuit to comply with the latest of UL 1971 Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired. operation requires a separately installed synchronization module. Synchronization module requirements are determined by your See the control panel or power supply compatibility list for synchronization devices. 1: Models number 15 to multi-cd, white 15 to multi-cd, white, with marking 15 to multi-cd, red 15 to multi-cd, red, with marking plate, white plate, red 2018 United Technologies Corporation / 3 3100562-EN REV 003 ISS 13MAR18 2: Candela switch unit is not serviceable or repairable. Should the unit fail to contact the supplier for replacement. a visual inspection and an operational test twice a year or as by the local authority having jurisdiction. not change the factory-applied finish. 5: UL 1971 minimum light output (% of rating vs. angle) 10 15 20 Angle Minimum UL required candela light output % of rated candela vertical specification – – – % of rated candela horizontal specification level output operating

Booster Power Supply List Refer to the appliance circuit calculations section in the Remote Booster Power Supply Technical Manual (P/N 3100485-EN) to determine device quantities for your installation. 1: Compatible devices 2020 Carrier / 18 3100656-EN REV 017 ISS 19NOV20 / 18 3100656-EN REV 017 ISS 19NOV20

Installation Allow approximately 2 in. (50 cm) clearance on both sides of the to permit inserting and removing the key, and opening the through 90 degrees. install the enclosure: Secure the enclosure to the electrical box, as shown in Figure 2. Connect the RS-485 riser to the appropriate annunciator terminals. to the annunciator installation sheet for wiring details. Leave enough wire to easily remove and position the when setting the DIP switch. you installing a single-position RA-ENC1, skip to step 10. Complete and insert the expander labeling sheets. Attach the expander cable to the annunciator. Route the expander cable using one of the channels, so that the is not pinched. Connect the expander cable to the expander. Attach an expander for interconnection to a second expander, if applicable. Tilt the lowest expander up and slide the mounting slot onto the flange in the enclosure. Tilt the expander down and press the bottom of the expander over Secure the bottom of the expander to the adapter ring using the stud-nut. screw. Repeat steps 7 through 9 for the remaining expander, if applicable. Tilt the annunciator up and slide the mounting slot onto the top in the enclosure. Tilt the annunciator down and press the bottom of the annunciator Secure the bottom of the annunciator to the adapter ring using the the stud-nut. screw. Cover the screw hole with the product label plate. 1: Enclosure dimensions Series Remote Annunciator Installation Sheet R Series Remote Annunciator Enclosures provide surface protection for annunciators and expanders. Each consists of back plate, hinged cover, and key lock. models are available for housing various combinations of one R Remote Annunciator and one or two R Series Remote See Table 1 for a list of enclosure model numbers. enclosures are 16-gauge welded steel with a white, painted finish. enclosure includes a lock and two keys. The two- and three- enclosures have wiring channels for correct routing of cables, which are provided with the enclosures. enclosures attach to a standard electrical box, and provide a lip that takes the place of the integral mounting ring supplied the annunciators and expanders. 1: Family Remote Annunciator Enclosure models enclosure for R Series Remote enclosure for one R Series Annunciator and one Family Remote enclosure for one R Series Annunciator and two R Series Expander in cm in [2] cm Height of enclosures 6.3 in. (16.0 cm) 12.0 in. (30.5 cm) 17.7 in. (45.0 cm) enclosure. Leave a clearance of approximately 2 in. (50 cm) on both sides of 3100972-EN REV 03 ISS 28SEP15 / 2 in cm [1] in cm in cm information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. (H W D) environment humidity wiring within the enclosures must be American 4-inch square or 3-gang boxes 9.8 2.0 in. (16.0 24.9 5.1 cm) 9.8 2.0 in. (30.5 24.9 5.1 cm) 9.8 2.0 in. (45.0 24.9 5.1 cm) welded steel enamel to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing 2: Mounting the enclosure and installing annunciators and expanders RISER RISER / 2 3100972-EN REV 03 ISS 28SEP15

Fire Alarm Printer Sheet installation instructions are for the PT-1S printer models listed in 1. serial/USB, 120 V serial/USB, 220 V serial/USB, 120 V 1: Models printers use standard, continuous feed, fanfold paper, and serial and USB cable connections. The paper can be fed from rear or from the bottom of the printer. printer is shipped with the following: A power cord A ribbon cartridge A paper separator A platen knob A CD containing print drivers and user documentation A DB-25P connector and hardware for making field wiring to control unit serial ports A DTK-DL120/240 surge protective device (220V model only) Printer cables are not included with the printer and must be separately. the serial interface printer serial interface default settings are as follows: settings Data 7/8 bits 8 bits settings Even bits [1], [2] 4800, 2400, 1200 Test Line rate bps 2020 Carrier settings on Power Up ms settings on Power Up ms Signal Signal Time For supervised printers For unsupervised printers for configuring serial interface settings are provided below. more information, refer to the printer manufacturer and the control unit documentation. the printer and a CDR-3 module share the same serial port configure both to match the control unit serial baud rate and parity settings. For more information, refer the control unit documentation. paper into the printer before performing the instructions configure the serial interface: Press and hold the SELECT button at the same time you turn on printer. the SELECT button again to print the current settings. Press the LINE FEED button until the printer prints the following: I/F Parity None change the parity setting, press the TOF SET button until the prints the required parity. Press the FORM FEED button until the printer prints the following: I/F Protocol Ready/Busy an unsupervised printer connection, press the TOF SET button the printer prints the following: I/F Protocol X-ON/X-OFF Press the FORM FEED button until the printer prints the following: I/F Busy Line SSD- the TOF SET button until the printer prints the following: I/F Busy Line DTR Press the FORM FEED button until the printer prints the following: I/F Baud rate 9600 bps change the baud rate setting, press the TOF SET button until printer prints the required baud rate. Press the FORM FEED button until the printer prints the following: I/F DSR Signal Valid the TOF SET button until the printer prints the following: I/F DSR Signal Invalid Press the FORM FEED button until the printer prints the following: I/F DSR Signal Ready on Power up the TOF SET button until the printer prints the following: I/F DSR Signal Ready on Select Press the PITCH and the MODE buttons at the same time to save settings and exit Menu Mode. / 2 3100989-EN REV 012 ISS 10AUG20 models models size (W H D) models models cartridge environment humidity V, 50/60 Hz to 240 V, 50/60 Hz A 2.0 Serial AWG (0.50 mm 3.15 10.83 in. 8.0 27.5 cm) lb. (3.9 kg) lb. (4.5 kg) 52102001 to 12

Conventional FACU List compatibility lists 1: Compatible detectors [1] number smoke detector and base smoke detector smoke detector and base smoke-heat detector and base smoke detector photoelectric smoke-heat detector [2][3] smoke detector [2][3] smoke detector [3] temperature heat detector, 135 (58 [3] of rise heat detector, 135 (58 [3] smoke detector (12/24 VDC) smoke detector (12/24 VDC) smoke detector (12/24 VDC) and heat sensor (FT-RoR) smoke detector (8.5 to 33 VDC) with FT-RoR heat sensor, and auxiliary relay smoke detector (12/24 VDC) smoke detector (12/24 VDC) and heat sensor (FT-RoR) smoke detector (12/24 VDC) smoke detector (12/24 VDC) smoke detector (12/24 VDC) and heat sensor (FT-RoR) smoke detector with CleanMe to 33 VDC) base CSBU-3, CRB4U-1 CSBU-3, CRB4U-1 CSBU-3, CRB4U-1 CSBU-3, CRB4U-1 IDC 2020 Carrier / 18 3101019-EN REV 017 ISS 28AUG20 / 18 number base IDC smoke detector with CleanMe, fixed and rate of rise heat (8.5 to 33 VDC) smoke detector (12/24 VDC) response photoelectric smoke detector VDC) with heat sensors rate-of-rise and 57 (135 fixed heat detector response photoelectric smoke detector VDC) with remote alarm/trouble LED smoke detector (12/24 VDC) with relay smoke detector and base smoke detector smoke detector and base photoelectric smoke-heat detector base smoke detector smoke-heat detector smoke detector [2][3] [2][3] smoke detector [3] temperature heat detector, 135 (58 [3] of rise heat detector, 135 (58 [3] [2][3] smoke detector (12/24 VDC) smoke detector (12/24 VDC) smoke detector (12/24 VDC) and heat sensor (FT-RoR) smoke detector [2][3] smoke detector smoke detector smoke detector photoelectric smoke-heat detector [3] temperature heat detector, 135 (58 [3] of rise heat detector, 135 (58 smoke detector (12/24 VDC) [3] smoke detector (12/24 VDC) smoke detector (12/24 VDC) and heat sensor (FT-RoR)

Specifications fault impedance size current: box connection Wire resistance: environment humidity VDC nom. mA mA, max. to 18 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 sq mm) American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep box mA into a 14.5 coil to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. City Tie Module Sheet CTM City Tie Module provides a single municipal box connection activating a local energy type master box connected to a public fire reporting system. the CTM in accordance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. This device will not operate without electrical power. As frequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss safeguards with your fire protection specialist. CTM is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it contains user-serviceable parts and should not be disassembled. more information, refer to the technical reference manual listed the control panel door. install the module: Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground 1. Make all wiring connections as shown in the wiring diagram. See Using the 4-24 1/2 in (13 mm) self-tapping screw provided, the wall plate to the module. Using the two 6-32 1/2 in (13 mm) machine screws provided, the module to the electrical box. the CTM to a dedicated notification appliance circuit (NAC) as in 1 on page 2. Do not install other notification appliances on the circuit. 3101025-EN REV 03 ISS 16NOV15 / 2 1: CTM installation wiring diagram dedicated notification circuit [4] electrical box [3] energy type box coil fire alarm system plate Power-limited and supervised for opens, shorts, and ground faults Nonpower-limited and supervised for opens and ground faults only. Use end-of-line resistor value required by the notification appliance max. 4.4 A, max. NAC output signal must be compatible with the input rating of the energy type master box. / 2 3101025-EN REV 03 ISS 16NOV15

Legend for Figure 1 All wiring is supervised and power-limited unless noted otherwise. Only the trouble relay and power relay are energized when power applied. AUX power supplied by the control panel can exceed 0.5 A. If than 0.5 A is required, you must use a power-limited and 24 VDC auxiliary/booster power supply that is UL/ULC for fire protective signaling systems. powered from an external supply, the supply must be installed the same room as the control panel and their 24 VDC ( wired together. Relay outputs are not supervised and do not provide current Connect relays only to power-limited sources. Use momentary switches only. Mount LEDs and switches in separate cabinet located in the same as the FSUIM. capacitance resistance fault impedance 0 inputs Quantity Wiring Class outputs Quantity rating Wiring Class size environment humidity resistor to 27.3 VDC mA mA max. max. B k 1/2 W C Vdc at 1 A (resistive load) E to 18 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm cabinet to 49 (32 to 120 to 93% noncondensing information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. Universal Interface Installation Sheet FSUIM Universal Interface Module provides five common control inputs and nine common relay outputs. Typically, the FSUIM is in a graphic annunciator connected to an F-series fire alarm panel. provide visual indication when a relay is energized. FSUIM is shipped with a plastic snap track for mounting in an cabinet. the FSUIM according to the instructions provided below. The will not operate properly until detected by the control panel. can only install one FSUIM per system. more information, refer to the technical reference manual listed the control panel door. Make sure all power is disconnected from the panel before Observe static-sensitive handling practices. install the FSUIM: Mount the snap track in the MFC-A cabinet as shown in Figure 1. can also mount the snap track vertically, if required. the bottom edge of the FSUIM into the snap track then press top edge in until it snaps into place. Wire the FSUIM as shown in Figure 1. Verify that all wiring is free opens, shorts, and ground faults. 2016 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3101030-EN REV 04 ISS 21SEP16 1: Typical installation wiring Fault Silence Silence Test Silence Silence / 2 3101030-EN REV 04

Installation Make sure all power is disconnected from the panel before Observe static-sensitive handling practices. more information, refer to the technical reference manual listed the control panel door. install the remote zone indicator: Configure the jumpers as described in Table 1 and Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground 2. Wire the remote zone indicator as shown Figure 1. Mount the remote zone indicator in the electrical box using the two machine screws. See Figure 2. If you are surface mounting the remote zone indicator, you install washers (provided) between it and the surface mount Attach the faceplate to the remote zone indicator. Use the two machine screws provided with the faceplate. Remote zone indicators will not operate properly until detected the control panel. For more information, see the technical reference listed inside the control panel door. remote 1: Wiring diagram panel 24 VDC control panel or power supply [3] All wiring is supervised and power-limited. AUX power supplied by the control panel can exceed 0.5 A. If than 0.5 A is required, you must use a power-limited and 24 VDC auxiliary/booster power supply that is UL/ULC for fire protective signaling systems. If powered from an external supply, the supply must be installed in same room as the control panel and their 24 VDC commons wired together. Remote Zone Installation Sheet FSRZI-A and FSRZI-SA are remote zone indicators for F-Series alarm control panels. The FSRZI-A provides five red LEDs for alarm zones. The FSRZI-SA provides five bi-color LEDs (red alarm zones; yellow for supervisory and monitor zones). jumpers determine which zones are indicated. and FSRZI-SA remote zone indicators include a cover plate installation in a standard, single-gang electrical box. You can install or two FSRZI-A and FSRZI-SA remote zone indicators (with or an FSRSI remote system indicator) in an approved 2-, 3-, or 4- electrical box. Cover plates for 2-, 3-, and 4-gang electrical boxes numbers FSAT2, FSAT3, and FSAT4) are ordered separately. paper insert is provided for creating custom LED labels. and FSRZI-SA remote zone indicators are configured using jumpers described in the tables below. peripheral group 1 peripheral group 2 1: Group selection jumper Only two remote zone indicators are allowed per peripheral 2: Zone selection jumpers used to indicate zones 1 to 5 1 to IDC 5 on the control panel) used to indicate zones 6 to 10 6 to IDC 10 on the control panel) used Install a jumper on J3 only when connected to a 10-zone control 3101032-EN REV 03 ISS 02DEC15 / 2 2: Installing the remote zone indicator in a single-gang box 1-gang electrical box capacitance resistance fault impedance size electrical box environment humidity to 27.3 Vdc mA at 24 VDC mA at 24 VDC max. ohms, max. ohms to 18 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 sq mm) OS1-1996, 1- to 4-gang box to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. / 2 3101032-EN REV 03 ISS 02DEC15

PCB Replacement Kit Sheet replace the PCB: Disconnect all field wiring from the PCB. each wire so you can identify where to connect them later. Remove the dialer, if installed. Remove the PCB. See Figure 1. Do not discard the screws and the replacement PCB using the screws and washers from previous step. the dialer, and then connect the field wires to the PCB. Program the control panel. PCB Replacement Kit is used to repair F-Series fire alarm control in the field. This document provides installation instructions for following models: printed circuit board for F-Series, five-zone panels, English overlay (French overlay) printed circuit board for F-Series, ten-zone panels, English overlay (French overlay) replacement printed circuit board (PCB) is shipped with factory settings. If you have changed the default settings, you must the panel. The dialer, if installed, doesn require programming instructions, refer to the technical manual referenced the label marked Protected Premises Control Unit to the inside of the cabinet door. Electrocution Hazard. High voltages capable of causing injury including death may be present. Disconnect all sources power then wait at least 30 seconds for capacitors to discharge to a energy level before proceeding. 2016 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3101033-EN REV 04 ISS 31AUG16 1: PCB replacement x 0.375 pan head screw internal tooth washer information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. / 2 3101033-EN REV 04 ISS 31AUG16

Series Dialer/Modem Sheet F-DACT Series Dialer/Modem transmits system status changes to a compatible digital alarm communicator receiver over the switched telephone network. The F-DACT Series Dialer/Modem capable of split reporting to two different account and telephone installation sheet applies to the models listed in the table below. for FireShield Plus and FX Series units (firmware version 3.x and earlier) for FireShield Plus and FX Series units (firmware version 4.x and later) addition to dialer functions, the F-DACT Series Dialer/Modem An LCD to display event messages and programming prompts An event history log of panel and DACT events A modem for uploading and downloading panel configuration, and current status to a PC running compatible software The F-DACT Series modem function is only rated for 2400 baud Some PC modems may not be compatible with this rate. F-DACT Series Dialer/Modem can be programmed to operate as a or dual line DACT/Modem/LCD display, a Modem/LCD display, an LCD display only. For the F-DACT Series Dialer/Modem to be 72 CS compliant, the following are required: The factory installed warning label must be removed from the line phone jack A second phone line, independent of that used for line one must be to phone jack two The F-DACT Series Dialer/Modem must be programmed for dual operation The F-DACT Series Dialer/Modem must be programmed to a test signal at least once every 24 hours the JP1 wire loop intact configures the F-DACT Series for attended downloading. The panel will not allow to the panel or dialer configuration unless the program jumper inserted. It will allow changes to receiver information (account code, numbers, etc.). UL requires the red wire loop to be intact for remote station systems. additional download security, the F-DACT Series Dialer/Modem be programmed to perform a callback function. to prevent access to the panel programming. a list of compatible receivers, see F-Series Compatibility List 3101019-EN) CAN/ULC-S559 compliant configurations for fire signal receiving and proprietary fire signal receiving center applications refer to Supplement Manual, P/N 3101563. Information The dialer complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. The dialer certification number and Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) displayed on the panel programming label and in this manual. information must be provided to the telephone company if Two FCC compliant telephone cords with 8-pin modular plugs at ends are supplied with the FSDACT. The dialer is designed to connected to the telephone network using the supplied cord an RJ-31X or RJ-38X jack, which must also comply with FCC 68 rules. The REN is used to determine the maximum number of devices may be connected to a single telephone circuit. All telephone are assigned a REN. The sum of the RENs for all devices may not exceed five. The maximum REN may in some areas. Contact the local telephone provider for more the dialer causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone will notify you an advance that temporary discontinuance service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the company will notify you as soon as possible. You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC, if you it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, operations, or procedures that could affect the of the dialer. If this happens, the telephone company will advance notice in order for you to make necessary to maintain uninterrupted service. trouble is experienced with the dialer, for repair or warranty contact: a United Technologies company Town Center Parkway FL 34202 (800) 655-4497. the dialer is causing harm to the telephone network, the company may request you disconnect the dialer until the is resolved. No repairs may be performed on the dialer by the user. The dialer cannot be used on public coin phones or party line provided by the telephone company. Canada Information

Remote Relay Module Sheet OFF ON Description 1: Common alarm 2: Common trouble 3: Common supervisory 4: Common monitor 5: Common power Only one FSRRM24 module configured for common relay is allowed per peripheral group. peripheral group 1 peripheral group 2 3: Group selection jumper Only three FSRRM24 modules are allowed per peripheral on 3- and 5-zone control panels. Only four FSRRM24 modules allowed per peripheral group on 10-zone control panels. 4: Output selection jumpers, J1 to J5 to 2 to 3 output contact the FSRRM24 according to the instructions provided Make sure all power is disconnected from the panel installing. Observe static-sensitive handling practices. FSRRM24 provides five Form C relays that you can as common relays, zone relays, or as programmable to use with F-series fire alarm control panels. In you can configure the relays as dry contact relays or 24 VDC output relays. provide visual indication when each relay is energized when the FSRRM24 is disabled. FSRRM24 includes a plastic snap track for mounting in an cabinet. remote relay modules are configured using the described in the tables below. 1: Disable output jumper all relays all relays 2: Module type jumpers OFF OFF Five programmable relays (common Description or zone) OFF Five zone relays (zones 6 to 10). This is ignored on 3-zone and 5- conventional F-Series control ON Five zone relays (zones 1 to 5) 2013 UTC Fire & Security. All rights reserved. / 4 3101058 REV 02 REB 25JAN13 1: FSRRM24 mounting 2: Data and power wiring remote track panel 24 VDC control panel or power supply [3] install the FSRRM24: Mount the snap track on the MFC-A cabinet as shown in 1. Only two FSRRM24 modules are allowed per cabinet. the bottom edge of the FSRRM24 into the snap then press the top edge in until it snaps into place. Configure the jumpers. Verify that all wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground Connect the data and power wiring as shown Figure 2. Energize the panel and confirm that all relays are in the state before connecting the field wiring. Normally all relays are deenergized. If a jumper is on JP5, relays 1 and 5 are energized. Connect the relay output wiring as shown Figure 3. Make connection will not adversely affect controlled devices elevators, fans, etc.). FSRRM24 remote relay modules will not operate until detected by the control panel. For more see the technical reference manual listed inside control panel door. JP3 JP4 JP5 3: Relay output wiring 2 4 5 C NO C NO C NO 3 JP3 JP4 JP5 All wiring is supervised and power-limited. AUX power supplied by the control panel can exceed A. If more than 0.5 A is required, you must use a and regulated 24 VDC auxiliary/booster supply that is UL/ULC Listed for fire protective systems. / 4 3101058 REV 02 REB 25JAN13 powered from an external supply, the supply must be in the same room as the control panel and their VDC commons ( wired together. Relay outputs are not supervised and do not provide limiting. Connect relays only to power-limited Terminal marking indicates contact position when the relay deenergized. capacitance resistance fault impeda

Duct Smoke Installation Sheet FX-PDD Duct Smoke Detector is designed for use in duct where temperatures can exceed standard detector device address is set using the two rotary switches located on front of the unit. One device address is required. installations where the controls and indicators are hidden from a remote test station or an LED indicator can be connected to detector to provide these functions. settings following jumper settings determine the operation of the See Figure 6 for proper jumper location. 1: JP3 jumper settings the detector for alarm latching the detector for supervisory is the factory default setting. operation LEDs, visible from the front of the detector, show its status. when the detector is in the alarm state. intermittently when the detector is in normal state. the detector is in the alarm/active 2: LEDs LED LED 2020 Carrier The duct smoke detector is not intended as a substitute for open protection. This detector does not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards the local fire protection specialist. The duct smoke detector does not operate as designed outside the listed electrical and environmental specifications. The duct smoke detector does not sense smoke unless the system is operating and the sensor cover is installed. The duct smoke detector may not operate as designed unless in accordance with these instructions and all applicable and local codes as determined by the local authority jurisdiction. Read these instructions thoroughly before installing. Refer to Bulletin P/N 3101107 for additional information regarding instructions. guidelines ensure correct operation, install the duct detector using the guidelines: the duct smoke detector on a flat section of HVAC duct six and ten duct widths from any bends or obstructions. supply-side detectors at a point downstream from the fan and after the air filter. return-side detectors at a point before the return air is diluted by outside air. the duct air velocity order to verify the airflow direction and velocity, air must be through the HVAC system. verify the duct air velocity: Drill a small hole at the point where the duct smoke detector is installed. Using the SD-VTK Air Velocity Test Kit and a suitable air meter, verify that the air velocity in the HVAC duct falls the specified operating range of the detector and note direction the air flows. the air velocity does not fall within the specified range, relocate detector and seal the hole in the HVAC duct. Refer to Bulletin P/N 3101107 for additional information to installation locations. / 6 3101069-EN REV 005 ISS 19OCT20 an appropriate sampling tube: Select a sampling tube that extends at least two-thirds across width of the duct. Refer to Table 3 below. For duct widths greater than 36 inches, use a sampling tube that longer than the width of the duct. Sampling tubes are available in the following lengths: 2: Sampling tube installation (in.) 3: Sampling tubes assemble the detector: Assemble the duct smoke detector as shown in Figure 1. Rotate the air sampling tube so the inlet holes face the direction (in.) airflow. The sampling tube is normally installed from the rear, but it can be installed from the front of the detector as shown in 2. This method r

Analog Class A Single Module Installation Sheet module is an analog addressable device used to connect a open, alarm, supervisory, or monitor type dry contact initiating circuit (IDC) to a control panel. This module is designed for A circuit operation. device address is set using the two rotary switches located on the of the module. One device address is required. device can be preset for alarm or supervisory operation using the switch located on the front of the module. The module can also configured for other device types through front panel programming the configuration utility. The configuration utility is also used to the device. switch operation following slide switch settings determine the operation of the Setting the initial slide switch position is generally performed module installation. This setting can be changed while the is operating, but the change must be confirmed through front programming. 1: Slide switch settings Operation used Supervisory nonlatching US marketplace type description [1] latching: Configures the module for open dry contact initiating devices. the NO input contact of an initiating is closed, an alarm signal is sent to control panel and the alarm condition is at the module. (Factory default) latching Canadian marketplace Configures the module for open dry contact initiating devices. the NO input contact of an initiating is closed, a supervisory signal is sent the control panel and the supervisory is not latched at the module. Configures the module for normally dry contact initiating devices. When the input contact of an initiating device is a supervisory signal is sent to the panel and the supervisory condition is at the module. Additional device types are available through front panel or the configuration utility. Refer to the applicable control technical reference manual. 1: Slide switch operation module provides a bicolor LED that shows its status. Green LED flashes Red LED flashes and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, you should discuss further with your local fire protection specialist. This module does not support conventional smoke detectors. The module is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it no user-serviceable parts and should not be disassembled. install the module: Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground Make all wiring connections shown in Figure 4. Set the module address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. a screwdriver to adjust the two rotary switches on the front of module. Set the TENS rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the ONES rotary switch for the 0 through 9 For example: device address 21, set the TENS rotary switch 2 and set the ONES rotary switch to 1 (see Figure 2). Set slide switch P1 to the appropriate setting. Refer to Figure 1. Mount the module on the electrical box using the screws provided the electrical box. Mount the wall plate on the module using the hardware shown in 3. 2: Module address 6 7 0 Insert screwdriver here 2020 Carrier / 2 3101080-EN REV 006 ISS 19OCT20 3: Module installation Cover plate plastite screw (2X) Wall plate Screw 4: Module wiring the device as shown in Figure 4. Be sure to observe the polarity the wires. All wiring is power-limited and supervised This module does not support

Analog Single Input Module Installation Sheet it connects. 1: LED location a screwdriver to adjust the two rotary switches on the front of module. Set the TENS rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the ONES rotary switch for the 0 through 9 For example: device address 21, set TENS rotary switch to 2 set the ONES rotary switch to 1 (see Figure 2). Position the module into the electrical box, behind the device to FX-IDC1B Analog Single Input Mini Module is an analog device used to connect a normally open, alarm, or monitor type dry contact initiating device circuit (IDC) to control panel. This module is designed for Class B circuit operation. device address is set using the two rotary switches located on the of the module. One device address is required. module is factory set to operate as an alarm-latching device. the NO contact of an initiating device is closed, an alarm signal sent to the control panel and the alarm condition is latched at the device types are available through front panel programming the configuration utility. For additional information, refer to the listed on the control panel label. FX-IDC1B provides two status LEDs. The LEDs are visible from back of the module. and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. This module does not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards the local fire protection specialist. This module does not support conventional two-wire smoke The module is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it no user-serviceable parts and should not be disassembled. install the module: Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground Make all wiring connections as discussed in and shown in 3. Set the module address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. Red LED: Alarm/active Green LED: Normal 2: Module address Insert screwdriver here the device as shown in Figure 3. Be sure to observe the polarity the wires. to the control panel technical reference manual for wiring wiring is power-limited and supervised. 2020 Carrier / 2 3101081-EN REV 007 ISS 19OCT20 Class A or Class B Signaling line circuit (SLC) in Signaling line circuit (SLC) out 3: Module wiring Wire nut or other listed splice or terminal block Class B 47 k EOLR Typical normally open (NO) initiating device maximum maximum line VDC at 350 V peak-to-peak fault impedance device circuit (IDC) resistor value resistance capacitance environment humidity temperature range k k (P/N EOL-47) (25 per wire), max. max. to 120 (0 to 49 to 93%, noncondensing at (32 to 140 ( to 60 information contact information, see www.kidde-esfire.com. / 2 3101081-EN REV 007 ISS 19OCT20

1: Slide switch Analog Class A-B Module Installation operation module provides a bicolor LED that shows its status. Green LED flashes Red LED flashes FX-2WIRE module is designed to interface between compatible two-wire smoke detectors and a control panel. It monitors circuit and smoke detectors and signals the control panel of any or alarm conditions. The module also regulates and supervises 24 VDC input power. module is configured from the factory to operate as a two-wire device that does not require alarm verification. It can be for two-wire alarm verified operation through front panel or the configuration utility. When using the alarm feature of the control panel, do not mix normally open initiating devices with two-wire conventional smoke detectors. module recognizes the CleanMe signal from detectors that this feature. module device address is set using the two rotary switches on the front of the module. One device address is required. device can be set for Class B or Class A operation using the slide located on the front of the module. This module cannot be used on a device loop with isolator or isolator bases. switch operation following slide switch settings determine the operation of the Setting the initial slide switch position is generally performed module installation. This setting can be changed while the is operating, but the change must be confirmed through front programming or using the configuration utility. 1: Slide switch operation Operation Device type description [1] B B 2-wire smoke non-verified: the module to monitor two-wire smoke detectors (that do not alarm verification) and normally contact initiating devices on a Class B A 2-wire smoke non-verified: the module to monitor two-wire smoke detectors (that do not alarm verification) and normally contact initiating devices on a Class A used A Additional device types are available through front panel or the configuration utility. Refer to applicable control technical reference manual. and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. This module will not operate without electrical power. As frequently cause power interruption, you should discuss further with your local fire protection specialist. The module is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it no user-serviceable parts and should not be disassembled. install the module: Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground Make all wiring connections as shown in and in Figure 4. Set the module address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. a screwdriver to adjust the two rotary switches on the front of module. Set the TENS rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the ONES rotary switch for the 0 through 9 For example: device address 21, set TENS rotary switch to 2 set the ONES rotary switch to 1 (see Figure 2). Set slide switch P1 to appropriate setting. Refer to Mount the module on the electrical box using screws provided with Mount the wall plate on the module using the hardware shown in electrical box. 3. 2: Module address 6 7 0 Insert screwdriver here 2020 Carrier / 2 3101082-EN REV 006 ISS 20OCT20 3: Module installation to 28.3 VDC line voltage Maximum 20.6 V peak-to-peak panel input power resettable) power current detector cu

To install the module: Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground Make all wiring connections as shown in and Figure 3. Set the module address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. a screwdriver to adjust the two rotary switches on the front of module. Set the TENS rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the ONES rotary switch for the 0 through 9 For example: device address 21, set TENS rotary switch to 2 set the ONES rotary switch to 1 (see Figure 1). Mount the module on the electrical box using screws provided with Mount the wall plate on the module using the hardware shown in electrical box. 2. 1: Module address Insert screwdriver here 2: Module installation Analog Dual Input – Supervisory Installation Sheet module is an analog addressable device used to connect normally waterflow alarm and supervisory initiating device circuits (IDCs) a control panel. This module is designed for Class B circuit device address is set using the two rotary switches located on the of the module. Two consecutive device addresses are required. second device address is automatically assigned one number than the value set on the rotary switches. module can operate in the following modes. 1: Module operation type description latching delayed: Configures the module for use only nonretarded waterflow alarm switches. When NO input contact of an initiating device is closed, an is sent to the control panel, which after a 16 time delay, generates an alarm signal. Supervisory active nonlatching US marketplace active latching Canadian marketplace Configures the module for normally open contact initiating devices. When the NO input of an initiating device is closed, a supervisory is sent to the control panel and the supervisory is not latched at the module. Configures the module for normally open dry initiating devices. When the NO input contact of initiating device is closed, a supervisory signal is to the control panel and the supervisory condition not latched at the module. operation module provides a bicolor LED that shows its status. Green LED flashes Red LED flashes and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, you should discuss further with your local fire protection specialist. This module does not support conventional smoke detectors. The module is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it no user-serviceable parts and should not be disassembled. 2020 Carrier / 2 3101084-EN REV 006 ISS 20OCT20 Cover plate plastite screws (2X) Wall plate Screw Module Compatible electrical box the device as shown in Figure 3. Be sure to observe the polarity the wires. This module does not support two-wire smoke detectors. All wiring is power-limited and supervised. Refer to the control panel technical reference manual for wiring line voltage fault impedance environment humidity temperature range electrical boxes size device circuit (IDC) resistor value circuit resistance circuit capacitance 3: Module wiring 20.6 V peak-to-peak k to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing at (32 to 140 ( to 60 American 4 inch square in. (64 mm) deep 2 gang box 4 in. square box 1-1/2 in. m

Analog Contact Relay Installation Sheet FX-RLY Analog Contact Relay Module is an analog addressable that provides one Form C dry relay contact. It can also be to provide polarity reversal of its output. The module can be to control external appliances or shut down equipment. device address is set using the two rotary switches located on the of the module. One device address is required. module is wired according to its operation, as shown in The module is configured to operate as a relay nonsilence type from the factory. It can function as either a control relay or reversal relay, depending on how it is wired. relay function: Addressable device that provides one Form C relay contact. The system firmware ensures that the relay is in the state when powered up. Upon command from the control panel, FX-RLY relay energizes. reversal relay function: Addressable device that provides reversal of its output. The system firmware ensures that the is in the proper state when powered up. Upon command from the panel, the FX-RLY relay energizes, reversing the polarity of its Additional device types are available through front panel or the configuration utility. Refer to the applicable control technical reference manual. operation module provides a bicolor LED that shows its status. Green LED flashes Red LED flashes and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. Connecting a device that exceeds this module pilot duty ratings may cause activation failure. This module does not capacitive loads. See on page 2 for contact The module is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it no user-serviceable parts and should not be This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, you should discuss further with your local fire protection specialist. This module does not support conventional smoke detectors. the module within the same room as the device it is install the module: Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground 2020 Carrier Wire the module in accordance with Figure 3, and 4. Set the module address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. a screwdriver to adjust the two rotary switches on the front of module. Set the TENS rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the ONES rotary switch for the 0 through 9 For example: device address 21, set the TENS rotary switch 2 and set the ONES rotary switch to 1 (see Figure 1). Mount the module on the electrical box using screws provided with electrical box (see Figure 2). Mount the wall plate on the module using the hardware shown in 2. 1: Module address Insert screwdriver here 2: Module installation Module Compatible electrical box Cover plate plastite screws (2X) Wall plate Screw all wiring connections as shown in Figure 3 or Figure 4 to the desired function. Be sure to observe the polarity of the Only one conductor per terminal. The signaling line circuit (SLC) circuit is power-limited and Refer to the panel documentation for SLC wiring specifications. / 2 3101086-EN REV 006 ISS 20OCT20 3: Control relay function ) Normally closed contact (NC) Normally open contact (NO) Common contact Class E. Power-limited unless connected to a nonpower-limited If the source is nonpower-limited, eliminate the power- mark and maintain

Single Action Pull Installation Sheet FX-270 Single Action Pull Station combines a single action pull with a single input analog addressable mini module mounted on back of the unit. The pull station requires a single action pulling the handle) to initiate an alarm. device address is set using the two rotary switches located on the of the mini module. One device address is required. mini module is configured for alarm latching operation. When the is pulled, an alarm signal is sent to the control panel and the condition is latched at the pull station. The pull station must be reset prior to resetting the panel. FX-270 provides two status LEDs. The LEDs are visible from the of the FX-270. 1: LED location For example: device address 21, set the TENS rotary switch 2 and set the ONES rotary switch to 1 (see Figure 2). Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground faults connecting to the module terminals. Make all wiring connections to the terminal block as discussed in and shown in Figure 4. Open the pull station by using a slotted screwdriver to twist the release screw counterclockwise while pulling the cover away its backplate. Mount the pull station in the electrical box. use of the glass rod is desired, pull the glass rod release lever install the glass rod through the mounting bracket on the front the pull station. Set the toggle switch to the NORMAL position and snap the cover its locked position. 2: Module address Insert screwdriver here 3: Pull station installation Red LED: Alarm/active Green LED: Normal and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. This pull station does not operate without electrical power. fires frequently cause power interruption, discuss further with the local fire protection specialist. The pull station is shipped from the factory complete with a input mini module attached. The module contains no parts and should not be disassembled. install the pull station: To meet the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), mount the box 48 inches max. from the floor and attach the pull using screws provided with the electrical box. Set the module address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. a screwdriver to adjust the two rotary switches on the front of module. Set the TENS rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the ONES rotary switch for the 0 through 9 Compatible electrical box Cover release screw Toggle switch Backplate Glass rod release lever Screw For system supervision, do not loop the circuit wires around terminals. Break the wire run at each terminal. the device as shown in Figure 4. Be sure to observe the polarity the wires. additional wiring information, refer to the documents listed on the panel label. wiring is power-limited and supervised. 2020 Carrier / 2 3101089-EN REV 007 ISS 21OCT20 4: Pull station wiring SLC in – from previous device or control panel SLC out – to next device or EOLR maximum maximum line size electrical boxes order surface mount glass rods environment humidity temperature range VDC at 350 V peak-to-peak to 18 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm American 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) single gang box 4 in. square box 1-1/2 in. mm) deep box with single gang ring – Cream enamel finish – Red enamel finish P/N 270-GLR (pkg. 20 rods) P/N 27165 (pkg. 12 rods) to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing at (32 to 140

Double Action Pull Installation Sheet FX-278 Double Action Pull Station combines a dual action pull with a single input analog addressable mini module mounted on back of the unit. The pull station requires two actions by the user to an alarm. First, to access the alarm handle, raise the upper marked LIFT THEN PULL HANDLE. Second, pull the alarm to initiate an alarm. device address is set using the two rotary switches located on the of the mini module. One device address is required. mini module is configured for alarm latching operation. When the station is activated, an alarm signal is sent to the control panel the alarm condition is latched at the pull station. The pull station be manually reset prior to resetting the panel. FX-278 provides two status LEDs. The LEDs are visible from the of the FX-278. 1: LED location a screwdriver to adjust the two rotary switches on the front of module. Set the TENS rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the ONES rotary switch for the 0 through 9 For example: device address 21, set the TENS rotary switch 2 and set the ONES rotary switch to 1 (see Figure 2). Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground faults connecting to the module terminals. Make all wiring connections to the terminal block discussed in and shown in Figure 4. Open the pull station by using a slotted screwdriver to twist the release screw counterclockwise while pulling the cover away its backplate. Mount the pull station in the electrical box. use of the glass rod is desired, pull the glass rod release lever install the glass rod through the mounting bracket on the front the pull station. Set the toggle switch to the NORMAL position and snap the cover its locked position. 2: Module address Insert screwdriver here 3: Pull station installation Red LED: Alarm/active Green LED: Normal and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. This pull station does not operate without electrical power. fires frequently cause power interruption, discuss further with the local fire protection specialist. The pull station is shipped from the factory complete with a input mini module attached. The module contains no user- parts and should not be disassembled. install the pull station: To meet the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), mount the box 48 inches max. from the floor and attach the pull using screws provided with the electrical box. Set the module address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. Compatible electrical box Key-latch cover release Backplate Toggle switch Glass rod release lever Screw For system supervision, do not loop the circuit wires around terminals. Break the wire run at each terminal. the device as shown in Figure 4. Be sure to observe the polarity the wires. 2020 Carrier / 2 3101090-EN REV 008 ISS 21OCT20 additional wiring information, refer to the documents listed on the panel label. wiring is power-limited and supervised. 4: Pull station wiring SLC in – from previous device or control panel SLC out – to next device or EOLR maximum maximum line VDC at 350 V peak-to-peak size electrical boxes North American 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) deep to 18 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm order surface boxes glass rods environment humidity gang box 4 in. square box 1-1/2 in. mm) deep box with single gang mud – Cream enamel finish – Red enamel finish P/N 276-GLR (pkg. 20 rods) P/N 27165 (pkg. 12 rods) to 120

Loop Expander Card Sheet XAL127 loop expander card provides an additional device loop on control panel. The card expands the control panel’s device to 254 device addresses total, 127 per loop (any of detectors and modules). loop expander card connects to connector J7 on the main circuit Installation limits are under the jurisdiction of local authority. install the loop expander card: Power down the panel and disconnect the batteries. Locate connector J7 on the main circuit board. It is below the loop card. Connect the card to connector J7 as shown in the installation Make sure you properly align the connector pins and mounting standoffs so that they lock into place. Connect the field wiring. See Power up the panel and connect the batteries. 1: XAL127 installation loop card J7 mounting expander card provides either Class B or Class A wiring options. 2: Class B wiring SEC PRI card 3: Class A wiring (Style 6) line card line 4: Class A wiring (Style 7) devices isolator base SEC PRI SEC PRI card line listed enclosure are three LEDs on the card that indicate loop communication Primary is the primary communication circuit. Secondary is the A return communication when wiring is Class A. Comm is overall communication. 5: Loop card LEDs 3101093-EN REV 04 ISS 03DEC15 / 2 addresses on loop 127 maximum (any combination of voltage current loaded loop) line rating current total loop resistance total loop fault impedance environment and modules) B or Class A VDC 55 mA 128 mA These ratings do not include the of two-wire smoke modules. 20.6 V peak-to-peak to 18 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm2) A max. isolators maximum (total both isolator and modules) to 5 k to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% RH, noncondensing at 90 information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. / 2 3101093-EN REV 04 ISS 03DEC15

Class A Interface Card Sheet SA-CLA card allows NAC Class A wiring of the 64 point control The card’s terminal block provides the wiring connection for the Class A return. SA-CLA also contains circuitry that enables the CH1 and CH2 circuit on the panel. This allows you to connect a Class B remote annunciator circuit to the panel. Refer to the technical reference document for details. Class A card is installed directly onto the control panel circuit using plastic standoffs and a plug connector. install the Class A card: Power down the panel and disconnect the batteries. Locate connector J2 (at the bottom-right of the main circuit board). Connect the card to connector J2 as shown in the diagram below. sure you properly align the connector pins and plastic standoffs. Connect the field wiring. See below. Power up the panel and connect the batteries. 1: SA-CLA installation 2: SA-CLA wiring TB2 on main circuit board SA-CLA installed on main board voltage current resistance capacitance current rating fault impedance 0 to 5 k environment humidity VDC 3 mA 60 mA A per circuit to 18 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm2) to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing at 90 (32 information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. Connector J2 Bottom-right of main circuit Plastic mounting standoffs SA-CLA card wiring connections on the Class A card are used when wiring Class A. 3101094-EN REV 04 ISS 18DEC15 / 2 / 2 3101094-EN REV 04 ISS 18DEC15

RS-232 Interface Card Sheet SA-232 card provides an RS-232 interface to the panel. The card be used for connecting a printer to the control panel to print events. The card can also be used for uploading and panel configuration, history, and current status to a PC the configuration utility. RS-232 card is installed on the plastic assembly and connects to main circuit board via a ribbon cable. install the RS-232 card: Power down the panel and disconnect the batteries. Locate the card location on the plastic assembly behind the main board and connector J3 on the main circuit board (at the of the main board). Attach the card to the plastic assembly using two #6 plastite as shown in the diagram below. Connect the ribbon cable (P/N 7140187) from the card to J3 on the main circuit board as shown in the diagram. Connect field wiring. See Power up the panel, and then connect the batteries. 1: SA-232 card installation of board plastite screws card cable J3 on circuit board RS-232 card can be wired to a printer to print system events or to a computer to download to the panel. 2: SA-232 wiring connections (black wire) (green wire) (white wire) (red wire) wiring The printer must be enabled and configured through for proper operation. to a printer: Locate the serial port on the back of the printer. Connect the DB-25 end of the RS-232 cable to the serial port on back of the printer. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 card. 3: Printer wiring serial port back of printer E E D R M E D ET ELE CT LAR M OW E R IT CH OD E male cable RS-232 card 4: DB-25 pin connections 1 7: COM (black wire) 25 male view) 20: DTR (green wire) 1: SA-232 card to printer DB-25 connections card DB-25 (pin 7) Black wire (ground connection) (pin 20) Green wire (printer supervision) (pin 3) White wire (communication) (pin 2) Red wire (communication) download wiring to a computer: you have a connected printer, disconnect it. Locate a serial port (COM port) on the back of the computer. Connect the DB-9 end of the RS-232 cable to the COM port on the of the computer. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to the RS-232 card. 3101095-EN REV 04 ISS 08OCT15 / 2 5: Computer download wiring COM port back of computer male cable RS-232 card 6: DB-9 pin connections male view) 2: SA-232 card to computer DB-9 connections card DB-9 (pin 5) Black wire (ground connection) (pin 2) White wire (communication) (pin 3) Red wire (communication) used voltage communications length voltage current rating communication environment VDC communications maximum 13 capacitance: 0.7 feet max. 10 V 13 mA 20 mA to 18 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm2) baud to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% RH, noncondensing at 90 information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. / 2 3101095-EN REV 04 ISS 08OCT15

Dialer Installation SA-DACT transmits system status changes (events) to compatible alarm communicator receivers over the public switched network. The SA-DACT queues messages and transmits based on priority (alarm, supervisory, trouble, disable, test, and system). The dialer is capable of single, dual, or split of events to two different account and telephone numbers. modem feature of the SA-DACT can also be used for uploading downloading panel configuration, history, and current status to a running the configuration utility. The modem feature uses line 1 The SA-DACT is compatible with Contact ID (CID) only. DACT is installed on the plastic assembly and connects to the circuit board via a ribbon cable. install the DACT: Power down the panel and disconnect the batteries. Locate the dialer card slot on the plastic assembly behind the main board and connector J8 on the main circuit board (at the of the main board). Slide the DACT into the slot on the plastic assembly as shown in diagram. Attach the DACT to the plastic assembly using two #6 plastite as shown in the diagram. Connect the ribbon cable (P/N 7140188) from the DACT to J8 on the main circuit board. Connect the phone lines. See Power up the panel and connect the batteries. 1: Slide the DACT into its slot circuit board assembly card slot on assembly 2: Screw the DACT in place and connect the ribbon cable cable to connector on main circuit (top-center) plastite screws dialer phone lines connect to connectors on the dialer’s main board. Phone line 1 connects to connector J1 and phone line 2 to connector J4. card typically connects to an RJ-31X block using an 8-position, modular cord. Wire the RJ-31X block as shown below. Install a listed secondary telephone protector between the telco and the SA-DACT card. The SA-DACT card must be the next of equipment that connects to the telephone company (TELCO) lines. to the Cellular Capture Module Configuration Application Guide 3102371-EN) for specific settings and wiring that must be used to UL and ULC Agency requirements for FACU communication with capture modules. optional Panel Presence Failure Condition (PPFC) offered in the capture modules is not supported when the module is to line 2 of the SA-DACT. The cellular capture module must connected to line 1 if the PPFC function is selected. 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 3 3101099-EN REV 005 ISS 31MAR17 3: SA-DACT wiring premises down block Press Cancel to return to the previous menu. or the Menu button to exit menu mode. 2 1 protector protector block by installer) 2 1 4-conductor cords by installer) to the panel compatibility list for compatible receivers and capture modules. or two loop-start lines on a public, network (C31/38X) ID (SIA DC-05) VDC 41 mA 100 mA to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% RH, noncondensing at 90 line type line connector formats voltage current registration number Canada number equivalence environment information To ensure proper operation, this dialer must be installed according the enclosed installation instructions. To verify that the dialer is properly and can successfully report an alarm, it must be immediately after installation, and periodically thereafter, to the enclosed test instructions. order for the dialer to be able to seize the phone line to report an or other event when other customer equipment (telephone, system, computer modem, etc.) connected to the same is in use, the dialer must be connected to a properly installed jack. The

2: Installation and connections Ethernet Interface Installation Sheet SA-ETH card provides a standard 10/100 Base-T Ethernet connection for connecting to a local network. The card can be for uploading and downloading panel configuration, history, and status to a PC running the configuration utility or connect to a central monitoring station receiver over a network. Ethernet card is installed on the plastic assembly and connects to main circuit board via a ribbon cable. The Ethernet card must be configured through programming for operation. install the Ethernet card: Power down the panel by first disconnecting the batteries, and disconnecting the main AC power. Locate the card slot on the plastic assembly behind the main board and connector J1 on the main circuit board (at the of the main board). Slide the card into the slot on the plastic assembly as shown in the 1. Attach the card to the plastic assembly using two #6 plastite as show in Figure 2. Connect the ribbon cable (P/N 7140189) from the card to J1 on the main circuit board. J1 is located on the of the main circuit board. Connect the network cable. See Power up the panel by first connecting the main AC power, and connecting the batteries. 1: Installation #6 plastite screw To connector J1 on main board Ribbon cable You can use either an RJ-45 patch cable or an RJ-45 crossover 3: SA-ETH wiring and LED locations Network cable To network connection router, switch, etc.) Ethernet card LED 4 (DS4): Collision LED 3 (DS3): Duplex LED 2 (DS2): Speed LED 1 (DS1): Link LEDs are four LEDs on the card that indicate card and network status. Figure 3. Card slot on plastic assembly SA-ETH card Top-right of main circuit 2021 Carrier / 2 3101100-EN REV 006 ISS 12JAN21 mode voltage current wire runs 5 cable connector address (default) mask (default) (default) environment humidity information compliance Base-T negotiation VDC 34 mA 41 mA feet (60 m), Cat 5 cable (panel to equipment) to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing at 90 (32 device complies with part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two (1) This device may not cause harmful and (2) this device must accept any received, including interference that cause undesired operation. Indoor dry information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. / 2 3101100-EN REV 006 ISS 12JAN21

and FX-10 Series Reference Manual 3101172-EN REV 07 ISS 11FEB17 2017 United Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. document may not be copied in whole or in part or otherwise reproduced prior written consent from United Technologies Corporation, except specifically permitted under US and international copyright law. and patents The Kidde name and logo are trademarks of United Technologies trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products. This document applies to FX Series panel firmware 4.x and later. information For contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. 1 2 3 4 5 information iii overview and operation 1 overview 2 system requirements 3 overview 4 controls and indicators 5 module controls and indicators 8 and K-FSRA10C controls and indicators 9 descriptions 10 the panel 11 15 checklist 16 the cabinet 17 remote modules 18 the F-DACT1(F) 19 an auxiliary/booster power supply 19 programming 21 programming requirements 22 you begin 23 started 24 the panel 26 initiating device circuits 30 notification appliance circuits 33 coded alarm signals 36 programming 39 you begin 40 started 42 account options 43 dialer options 45 system event transmit options 46 IDC event transmit options 48 NAC event transmit options 48 system 4/2 event activation code options 49 IDC 4/2 event activation code options 50 NAC 4/2 event activation code options 51 dialer default settings 51 53 maintenance 54 a walk test 55 lamp tests 56 messages 57 the control panel fuse 57 parts 58 3101172-EN REV 07 ISS 11FEB17 A B calculations 61 calculation worksheet 62 appliance voltage drop calculation 65 appliance circuit calculations 66 templates 71 programming worksheet 72 programming worksheet 73 programming worksheet 75 programming worksheet 76 C diagrams 83 cautions, and notes 84 D specifications 101 E event codes 103 Contact ID event codes 104 4/2 event codes 105 107 3101172-EN REV 07 ISS 11FEB17 information of liability the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event will United Technologies Corporation be liable for lost profits or business opportunities, loss of use, business interruption, loss of data, or any other indirect, incidental, or consequential damages under any theory of liability, whether based in contract, tort, product liability, or otherwise. Because some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of for consequential or incidental damages the preceding limitation may not apply to you. In any event the liability of United Technologies Corporation shall not exceed the purchase price of the product. The foregoing will apply to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, regardless of whether United Corporation has been advised of the possibility of such damages and regardless of whether any fails of its essential purpose. in accordance with this manual, applicable codes, and the instructions of the authority having is mandatory. every precaution has been taken during the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its United Technologies Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. warning equipment can generate and radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed in accordance this manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. This equipment has been tested and found comply with the limits for Class A computing devices pursuant to Subpar

Frame these instructions and mount them adjacent to the control panel. FX-5 and FX-10 Series Operating operating instructions are for the following FX Series conventional panel models: FX-5 Series, and FX-10 Series. They are intended users who are trained and authorized to operate the control panel in event of an emergency. additional information, see FX-5 and FX-10 Series Technical Manual, P/N 3101172-EN. (no events): Power LED is on. All other LEDs are off. The Power is always on except when operating on standby (battery) power. events: System Alarm LED is on, one or more IDC Alarm LEDs on, and the panel buzzer is on. The system Waterflow LED is on if a switch is active. events: System Supervisory (SUP) LED is on, one or more SUP/MON LEDs are on, and the panel buzzer is on events: System Trouble LED is on, one or more IDC or NAC (TBL) LEDs are on, and the panel buzzer is on. Depending on the the system Disable, Annunciator (ANN) Trouble, Battery (BATT) or Ground (GND) Fault LEDs may also be on. events: One or more IDC SUP/MON LEDs are flashing and the buzzer is on. to alarm signals Evacuate the area. Notify the proper authorities immediately. State the nature and of the emergency. Be prepared to direct firefighters when they arrive. alarm signals The protected premises may be occupied. Do not silence signals or reset the panel unless you are authorized to do so and after all occupants have been evacuated. silence alarm signals: Press the Signal Silence & Alarm On button for less than three The Signal Silence & Alarm On LED (on) indicates that Silence is active. Silence turns off all active audible notification appliances. A new event or pressing the Signal Silence & Alarm On button again turns notification appliances back on. Signal Silence does not turn off coded signals, city tie signals, and alarm signals activated by a waterflow programming may inhibit Signal Silence for one minute after alarm are activated and may prevent Signal Silence from turning off notification appliances. the panel Trouble conditions may affect the panel’s ability to provide detection and indication of a fire. Identify the source of the trouble notify authorized service personnel immediately. silence the panel: Press the Panel Silence button. Silence turns the panel buzzer off. New events will turn the panel back on. If there are no new events, the panel buzzer re-sounds within 24 hours. the panel Press the Reset button. The Reset LED flashes at different intervals the system is resetting then turns off. returns the panel to normal operation provided there are no active devices. Before resetting the panel, make sure all smoke detectors free from smoke and all manual pull stations are restored to normal. programming may inhibit Reset for one minute after alarm signals activated. a manual evacuation Press the Remote Disconnect button to avoid sending manual activation code to the CMS (optional). Press the Signal Silence & Alarm On button for more than three The system Alarm LED (steady) and the Signal Silence & On LED (flashing) indicates that Manual Evacuation is active. Manual Evacuation feature places the control panel in the alarm (e.g., activates the common alarm relay and turns on the Alarm turns on all fire alarm and city signals (but not coded fire alarm and signals the central station. Reset to cancel a Manual Evacuation. recommendations and test the fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72 and local authority having jurisdiction. Verify the correct fuse is installed at least once per year Replace the batteries every five years or sooner as required. service contact: Name Address Phone 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 1 3101236-EN REV 05 ISS 10FEB17

Graphic Annunciator Card Installation GCIX Graphic Annunciator Expander Card provides additional inputs and LED outputs on GCI card-based graphic GCIX card ships with a mounting track, connector hardware, and cables. Attach the GCIX card by screwing the mounting track to the It is not necessary to remove the GCIX card. installing in rows, rotate the GCIX card to orient the input socket (J18) and output cable socket (J15) correctly between Connect J18 to J15 of the previous annunciator card using the ribbon cable (P/N 7140163-01) or long ribbon cable (P/N as required. Connect the field wires, switches, and LEDs as required. See for details. 1: Terminal connections definitions to J1-8 to J2-8 to J3-8 to J7-12 to J4-8 to J5-8 to J6-8 to J8-12 to LED08 to LED016 to LED24 to SW12 to LED32 to LED40 to LED48 to SW12 cable to next card cable from previous card 2: Typical switch wiring J7-1 TB2-2(-3) 3: Typical LED wiring J1-1 TB2-4(-5) inputs Quantity collector outputs Quantity current fault environment humidity factor VDC mA at 24 VDC mA at 24 VDC contact LED driver use only mA at 5.7 V input max. 1.0 (resistive) or programmable mA at 5.7 VDC per LED, typical 5.75 1.50 in. (8.3 2.6 3.8 cm) to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing 3101296-EN REV 03 ISS 08OCT15 / 2 1: Accessories kit. Includes connector hardware for switches and LEDs. ribbon cable assembly, 7 in. ribbon cable assembly, 2 in. 6 in. information American compliance 864, ULC S527 device complies with part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two (1) This device may not cause harmful and (2) this device must accept any received, including interference that cause undesired operation. Indoor dry 3K5 (WEEE directive): Products marked this symbol cannot be disposed of as municipal waste in the European Union. proper recycling, return this product to your supplier upon the purchase of equivalent equipment, or dispose of it at designated points. For more information see: information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. / 2 3101296-EN REV 03 ISS 08OCT15

and SA-TRIM2 Trim Installation Sheet SA-TRIM1 and SA-TRIM2 trim kits are used to semiflush mount cabinet box (see Figure 1). The two models are described in the below. ring kit for 64 point control panels ring kit for 127/254 point and 250/500 point panels the 1/4-inch knockouts in the cabinet box and then attach the ring kit to the cabinet box as shown in Figure 2 using the hardware You must attach the trim ring kit before placing the cabinet box the wall. 1: Semiflush mounting the cabinet box ring box 2: Trim kit installation K-nuts 3101562-EN REV 03 ISS 08OCT15 / 2 information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. / 2 3101562-EN REV 03 ISS 08OCT15

4. For a 17 or 24 Ah battery configuration, position a cross bracket 9000842-3) against the front of the batteries, at least 1/2 in. the battery terminals, and then mark the mounting holes. Remove the batteries. Drill bracket mounting holes where marked, a number 18 drill bit. Replace the batteries and install the brackets using the hardware See Figure 1. 1: Installing the cross brackets for a 17 or 24 Ah battery x 1/2 screw (8X) K-nut (8X) the data cable connections in 3-CAB or 3-RCC series alarm cabinets using the BC-1 battery cabinet to house standby batteries for or 3-RCC series fire alarm cabinets with rail chassis installed, must secure the data cable connections on the rails. The on the 3-CHAS7 or 3-CHASS4 chassis must be tied down ensure that the cables will not disconnect. 2 provides an example of how to wrap a cable tie diagonally two data cable connectors and the rail. If you choose a different of wrapping the tie, make sure you encompass the connectors. secure the data cable connections: Wrap a cable tie over the data cable connectors and around the See Figure 2. Make sure the cable tie is over the connectors and then pull it tight. Cut off any excess cable tie. Repeat the procedure for each rail. Seismic Kit Sheet BC-1EQ Seismic Kit is used to restrain standby batteries in a BC-1 cabinet, and other components in fire alarm system cabinets the BC-1 is used to house their standby batteries. kit provides cross brackets and the necessary mounting hardware, ties, cable mounts, and alcohol wipes. table below lists the affected cabinets and shows how the BC-1EQ used in the cabinets. battery cabinet or 3 RCC series fire system cabinets [1] fire system cabinets [1] When the BC-1 battery cabinet is used to house standby batteries application the standby batteries the data cable connections on a chassis the SA-ETH Ethernet card cable Shock hazard. To avoid personal injury, remove all of power and allow stored energy to discharge before or removing equipment. standby batteries in a BC-1 battery cabinet Shock hazard. Do not touch the battery terminals with the brackets when installing the brackets. Cover the exposed with electrical tape during installation. Failure to follow these can result in personal injury or equipment damage. Do not drill the bracket mounting holes into a knockout. a 3-BTSEN Battery Distribution Bus is installed in the cabinet, do obstruct it when installing the bracket. section describes how to install the BC-1EQ Seismic Kit for the configurations listed below. configuration Description Ah Ah Ah two 12 V, 17 Ah batteries two 12 V, 24 Ah batteries two 12 V, 40 Ah batteries install the battery brackets: After de-energizing the unit, set the batteries in the bottom of the and push them against the back wall. Rest a cross bracket (P/N 9000842-3) across the top of the at least 1/2 in. away from the battery terminals, and mark mounting holes. See Figure 1. For a 40 Ah battery configuration, go to step 5. 3101677-EN REV 04 ISS 16NOV15 / 2 2: Installing the cable tie over data cable connections on a rail 3: Installing the cable mounts and cable tie for an SA-ETH cable Cable tie Data cable connections the SA-ETH Ethernet card ribbon cable in fire alarm cabinets Equipment damage hazard. This product is sensitive to discharge (ESD). To avoid damage, follow accepted ESD procedures. using the BC-1 battery cabinet to house standby batteries for fire alarm cabinets with an SA-ETH Ethernet card you must secure its ribbon cable to ensure that the cable not disconnect. 2 provides an example of how to secure the cable. If you a different method, make sure the cable cannot move. secure the SA-ETH Ethernet card ribbon cable: Open an alcohol wipe and clean the top of the ferrite on the ribbon cable where a 1-inch square cable mount will be See Figure 3. Clean an area on the cabin

WG4 Outdoor Horn Sheet synchronize horn operation, you must install a separate source. See Table 3. When connecting the horn to a control panel, verify synchronization operation on the list for the corresponding panel. output module 3: Compatible synchronization source models Represents any number of additional characters signal master – remote or auxiliary power supply this device in accordance with applicable requirements and in with the local authorities having jurisdiction. Genesis WG4 Outdoor Horn is a life safety notification appliance for indoor or outdoor use on ceilings or walls. See Table 1 for list of models and Table 2 for a list of accessories. surface mount applications, mount the WG4 onto a Model 449 box using the gasket shipped with the appliance. Electrocution hazard. To avoid personal injury or death electrocution, remove all sources of power and allow stored to discharge before installing or removing equipment. Electrical supervision requires that you break the wire run at each Do not loop wires around the terminals. flush mount applications where the mounting surface is flush with surface of the wall or ceiling, use the WG4GSKT gasket kit. Mount the WG4 horizontally or vertically on either the wall or place the electrical box accordingly. See Figure 1. that you need a Model 449 electrical box for waterproof or a standard mount 4 in. square box for all other horn includes field-configurable jumper options that allow you to the horn pattern to temporal or continuous, and the horn volume to or high. or When using a Model 449 electrical box, discard the gasket that is with the box. When using a trim skirt or a surface mount application, use the that comes with the WG4 unit. 1: Models rated wall/ceiling horn, white with FIRE rated wall/ceiling horn, white without marking rated wall/ceiling horn, red with FIRE marking rated wall/ceiling horn, red without marking 2: Accessories [1] Outdoor-rated surface skirt, white, for Genesis WG4 [1] Outdoor-rated surface skirt, red, for Genesis WG4 or horn-strobe or horn-strobe [2] Appliance replacement gasket, flush mount The trim skirt is outdoor-rated when used with the Model 449 box. Not compatible with the trim skirts. flush mount applications on a flat surface, use the WG4GSKT accessory. install the horn: Remove the cover from the appliance by first removing the six screws. See Figure 2, item 1. Position the appropriate gasket over the backplate, ensuring that wire slot and other holes line up properly. the protective backing from the gasket surface and apply the gasket to the WG4, with the adhesive side the appliance. the gasket firmly against the back surface of the appliance that the gasket seats properly. Place the optional trim skirt over the electrical box, if desired. See 2, items 5 and 6. Also see on page 3 for a of compatible boxes. Feed the field wiring through the wire slots on the gasket and the See Figure 2, item 3 and Figure 3, item 1. 2018 United Technologies Corporation / 4 3101999-EN REV 002 ISS 14MAR18 2: Exploded view of the assembly Align the appliance and trim skirt (if applicable), and then secure backplate to the electrical box with the supplied screws. the assembly to ensure that it is securely mounted. Set the horn volume. Set the horn pattern. default horn volume setting is high. To set the horn to low cut jumper JP3. See Figure 3, item 2. default horn pattern is a 3-3 temporal output. To use a horn pattern, cut jumper JP1. See Figure 3, item 3. Connect the horn terminals appropriately to the signal circuit field You m

WG4 Outdoor Horn- Installation Sheet Genesis WG4 Outdoor Horn-Strobe is a life safety notification designed for indoor or outdoor use on ceilings or on walls. Table 1 for a list of models and Table 2 for a list of accessories. surface mount applications, mount the WG4 onto a Model 449 box using the gasket shipped with the appliance. For flush applications where the mounting surface is flush with the of the wall or ceiling, use the WG4GSKT gasket kit. that you need a Model 449 electrical box for waterproof or a standard mount 4 in. square box for all other horn-strobe includes field-configurable jumper options that allow to set the strobe pattern to temporal or continuous, the horn to temporal or continuous, and the horn volume to low or high. horn-strobe also includes a field-configurable switch for setting the candela level. This setting is locked in place and is visible after installation. 1: Models rated wall/ceiling horn-strobe, white with marking, clear lens rated wall/ceiling horn-strobe, white marking, clear lens rated wall/ceiling horn-strobe, red with marking, clear lens rated wall/ceiling horn-strobe, red marking, clear lens 2: Accessories [1] Outdoor-rated surface skirt, white, for Genesis WG4 [1] or horn-strobe surface skirt, red, for Genesis WG4 or horn-strobe [2] Appliance replacement gasket, flush mount The trim skirt is outdoor-rated when used with the Model 449 box. Not compatible with the trim skirts. synchronize horn-strobe operation, you must install a separate source. See Table 3. When connecting the horn- to a listed control panel, verify synchronization operation on the list for the corresponding panel. output module 3: Compatible synchronization source models Represents any number of additional characters signal master – mount or auxiliary power this device in accordance with applicable requirements and in with the local authorities having jurisdiction. Electrocution hazard. To avoid personal injury or death electrocution, remove all sources of power and allow stored to discharge before installing or removing equipment. Electrical supervision requires that you break the wire run at each Do not loop wires around the terminals. You can mount the WG4 horizontally or vertically on either the wall ceiling; place the electrical box accordingly. See Figure 1. When using a 449 electrical box, discard the gasket that is shipped When using a trim skirt or a surface mount application, use the that comes with the WG4 unit. the box. or flush mount applications on a flat surface, use the WG4GSKT accessory. install the horn-strobe: Remove the cover from the horn-strobe by first removing the six screws. See Figure 2, item 1. 2018 United Technologies Corporation / 4 3102000-EN REV 002 ISS 16MAR18 Position the appropriate gasket over the backplate, ensuring that 2: Exploded view of the assembly wire slot and other holes line up properly. the protective backing from the gasket surface and apply the gasket to the WG4, with the adhesive side the appliance. the gasket firmly against the back surface of the appliance that the gasket seats properly. Place the optional trim skirt over the electrical box, if desired. See 2, items 4, 5, and 6. Also see on page 3 for list of compatible boxes. Feed the field wiring through the wire slots on the gasket and the See Figure 2, item 3 and Figure 3, item 1. Align the appliance and trim skirt (if applicable), and then secure backplate to the electrical box with the supplied screws. the assembly to ensure that it is securely mounted. Set the cand

SafeAir Carbon Monoxide Detector Sheet about carbon monoxide Read these installation instructions in their entirety before Leave these instructions with the owner/user this CO detection equipment. product is intended for use in indoor locations of units. It is not designed to comply with Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) or industrial standards. detector only indicates the presence of CO gas at the Carbon monoxide gas may be present in other to properly install, test, and maintain a CO detector cause it to fail, potentially resulting in loss of life. of this detector is not a substitute for proper use, and maintenance of fossil fuel-burning including appropriate ventilation and exhaust reduce the risk of CO poisoning, test the detector when not in use for 10 days or more. detector does not operate without electrical power. As frequently cause power interruption, discuss further with the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). Do not paint the detector. Regulatory code may require that the system generate a temporal code (TC3) for fire alarms and a four- temporal code (TC4) for CO alarms. CO sensor is calibrated at the factory. CO sensitivity set to conform to UL 2034 requirements and cannot be by the user. See on page 7 for sensitivity values. reduce the likelihood of nuisance alarms, ventilate spaces when using household cleaning or similar contaminants. If a detector has been to such contaminants, test it promptly afterwards. of CO poisoning following symptoms related to CO poisoning should be with all occupants of the protected site. monoxide alarm procedure The carbon monoxide (CO) alarm indicates the of CO, which can kill you. If the alarm signal sounds times, pauses for five seconds, and then repeats the Press the Test/Hush button at the detector or at the panel. Move to fresh air immediately outdoors or by an open or window. Check that all persons are accounted for. not reenter the premises or move away from the open or window until emergency services responders have the premises have been aired out, and your remains in normal condition. Call emergency services, the fire department, or 911: After following steps 1 to 3, if your detector reactivates, steps 1 to 3 and call a qualified appliance to check for sources of CO from fuel-burning and appliances, and to inspect for proper of this equipment. problems are found during this inspection, have the serviced immediately. Note any combustion not inspected by the technician and consult the directly for more information about CO for the equipment. Make sure that motor vehicles not, and have not been operating in an attached or adjacent to the premises. 2013 UTC Fire & Security. All rights reserved. / 8 3102002-EN REV 02 ISS 15FEB13 exposure: Slight headache, nausea, vomiting, fatigue, nose, sore eyes (often described as “flu-like” symptoms). exposure: Severe throbbing headache, dizziness, confusion, fast heart rate. exposure: Unconsciousness, brain damage, cardiorespiratory failure, death. cases of reported CO poisoning indicate that while are aware they are not well, they become so that they are unable to save themselves by either the building or calling for assistance. Young children pets may be the first affected. sources CO sensor in this detector is designed to detect carbon gas from any source of combustion. It is not to detect fire, smoke, or any other gas. Potential CO include fuel-fired appliances (e.g., space heater, water heater, range, oven, clothes dryer); other of combustion (e.g., kerosene-burning stove or heater, gas log fireplace); or internal combustion engines. addition, excessive exhaust spillage or reverse venting of appliances can produce dangerous transient of CO. This can be caused by external conditions:

Mounting Bracket Sheet 1: Mounting the RZI-MPL in the MFC(A) RZI-MPL bracket is used to mount the RZI16-2 and RZI16-2RS Zone Interface Modules in the following enclosures: MFC(A) Accessory Enclosure Auxiliary Power Supply (APS) Enclosure installation and wiring details for the RZI16-2 and Remote Zone Interface Modules, see the following: RZI16-2 Remote Zone Interface Module Installation Sheet and VS4 Cabinet Enclosures 3101970) RZI16-2RS Addressable Remote Zone Interface Module Sheet (P/N 3101988) Risk of equipment damage. Make sure the RZI mounting is installed with the RZI module mounting standoffs facing from the enclosure. These mounting standoffs provide clearance the RZI module PCB circuitry and the bracket. mount the RZI-MPL in the MFC(A): Position the RZI-MPL in the MFC(A) enclosure as shown in Secure the RZI-MPL using four self-tapping screws as shown in 1. 1. #6-32 x 5/16 self-tapping MFC(A) enclosure RZI-MPL mounting bracket mount the RZI-MPL in the APS: Position the RZI-MPL in the APS enclosure as shown in Figure 2. Secure the RZI-MPL using four machine screws as shown in (4X) 2. 2: Mounting in an APS enclosure APS enclosure RZI-MPL mounting bracket #6-32 5/16 screws (4X) 3102127-EN REV 01 ISS 16SEP15 / 2 mount the RZI-MPL in an iO1000 or VS4 enclosure: Position the RZI-MPL in the iO1000 or VS4 enclosure as shown in 3. Secure the RZI-MPL using four K-nuts as shown in Figure 3. 3: Mounting in an iO1000 or VS4 enclosure iO1000 or VS4 enclosure RZI-MPL mounting bracket 8-32 K-nuts (4X) information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. / 2 3102127-EN REV 01 ISS 16SEP15

de instalaci del soporte montaje RZI-MPL soporte RZI-MPL se utiliza para el montaje de los m RZI16-2 RZI16-2RS de interfaz de zona remota en los siguientes gabinetes: Gabinete auxiliar MFC(A) Gabinete de fuente de alimentaci auxiliar (APS) Gabinetes iO1000 y VS4 ver detalles sobre la instalaci y el cableado de los m y RZI16-2RS de interfaz de zona remota, consulte la documentaci Hoja de instalaci del m RZI16-2 de interfaz de zona (N/P 3101970-ES) Hoja de instalaci del m RZI16-2RS de interfaz de zona direccionable (N/P 3101988) Riesgo de da en los equipos. Aseg de que el de montaje RZI quede instalado con los separadores de del m RZI apuntando hacia afuera del gabinete. Estos brindan la distancia libre suficiente entre el circuito PCB m RZI y el soporte. montar el soporte RZI-MPL en el gabinete MFC(A): Coloque el soporte RZI-MPL en el gabinete MFC(A), tal como se en la Figura 1. Sujete el soporte RZI-MPL empleando cuatro tornillos tal como se muestra en la Figura 1. 1: Montaje del soporte RZI-MPL en el gabinete MFC(A) Gabinete MFC(A) Soporte de montaje RZI-MPL montar el soporte RZI-MPL en el gabinete APS: Coloque el soporte RZI-MPL en el gabinete APS, tal como se Tornillos autoperforantes 6-32 x 5/16 (x 4) en la Figura 2. Sujete el soporte RZI-MPL empleando cuatro tornillos mec como se muestra en la Figura 2. 2: Montaje en un gabinete APS Gabinete APS Soporte de montaje RZI-MPL Tornillos N. 6-32 x 5/16 (x 4) 3102127-ES REV 01 ISS 16SEP15 / 2 montar el soporte RZI-MPL en un gabinete iO1000 o un VS4: Coloque el soporte RZI-MPL en el gabinete iO1000 o VS4, tal se muestra en la Figura 3. Sujete el soporte RZI-MPL empleando cuatro tuercas K, tal como muestra en la Figura 3. 3: Montaje en un gabinete iO1000 o un gabinete VS4 Gabinete iO1000 o VS4 Soporte de montaje RZI-MPL Tuercas K 8-32 (x 4) de contacto ver informaci de contacto, visite www.edwardsfiresafety.com 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. los derechos reservados. / 2 3102127-ES REV 01 ISS 16SEP15

de instala da RZI-MPL 1: Montando o RZI-MPL no MFC(A) Gabinete MFC(A) Bra de montagem Parafusos autoatarraxantes x 5/16 (4X) 2. montar o RZI-MPL no APS: Posicione o RZI-MPL no gabinete APS como mostrado em Firme o RZI-MPL usando quatro parafusos com fenda, como em Figura 2. 2: Montando em um gabinete APS bra RZI-MPL usada para montar os M de Interface Zona Remota RZI16-2 e RZI16-2RS nos seguintes gabinetes: Gabinete Acess MFC(A) Gabinete de Alimenta de Energia Auxiliar (APS) Compartimentos de Gabinete iO1000 e VS4 instala e detalhes de fia para os M de Interface de Remota RZI16-2 e RZI16-2RS, consulte os seguintes: RZI16-2 Remote Zone Interface Module Installation Sheet RZI16-2RS Remote Zone Interface Module Installation Sheet 3101970-PT) 3101988) Risco de danos ao equipamento. Certifique-se de que a de montagem RZI seja instalada com os separadores de do m RZI voltados para o lado contr do gabinete. separadores de montagem fornecem uma folga entre o circuito do m RZI e a bra montar o RZI-MPL no MFC(A): Posicione o RZI-MPL no gabinete MFC(A) como mostrado em 1. Firme o RZI-MPL usando quatro parafusos autoatarraxantes, mostrado em Figura 1. Gabinete APS Bra de montagem Parafusos #6-32 5/16 (4X) 3102127-PT REV 01 ISS 16SEP15 / 2 Figura 3. 3. montar o RZI-MPL em um gabinete iO1000 ou VS4: Posicione o RZI-MPL no gabinete iO1000 ou VS4 como mostrado Firme o RZI-MPL usando quatro porcas K, como mostrado em 3: Montando em um gabinete iO1000 ou VS4 Gabinete iO1000 ou VS4 Bra de montagem Porcas K 8-32 (4X) de contato informa de contato, consulte www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. os direitos reservados. / 2 3102127-PT REV 01 ISS 16SEP15

Genesis Low Frequency (520 Hz) Horn-Strobe Sheet 1: Models frequency (520 Hz) horn, white housing, FIRE marking, standard output clear strobe frequency (520 Hz) horn, white housing, FIRE marking, standard output clear light frequency (520 Hz) horn, red housing, no marking, standard output clear strobe frequency (520 Hz) horn, red housing, FIRE marking, standard output clear light wall mount box, white housing wall mount box, red housing strobe features an enhanced synchronization circuit to with the latest requirements of UL 1971. Synchronized requires a separately installed synchronization See the control panel or power supply compatibility list compatible synchronization devices. and wire this device in accordance with applicable and local codes, ordinances, and regulations. horn-strobe should be mounted so that the entire lens is less than 80 in. (2.03 m) and not greater than 96 in. m) above the finished floor. The entire lens should also 24 in. (61 cm) or more from the finished ceiling. Electrocution hazard. To avoid personal injury or from electrocution, remove all sources of power and stored energy to discharge before installing or removing Electrical supervision requires that you break the wire at each terminal. Do not loop wires around the terminals. Genesis Low Frequency (520 Hz) Horn-Strobe can be for applications where a low frequency alarm notification with strobe light output is required. The device is for wall mounting and indoor use only. See Table 1 a list of model numbers. this device is used as a low frequency sounder in quarters, the strobe’s candela switch (Figure 1) must set to 110 cd. horn-strobe includes field-configurable jumper options for horn-strobe also includes a field-configurable switch for the strobe candela level. This setting is locked in place is visible after final installation. or steady horn output dB or high dB output or continuous pattern strobe 2014 UTC Fire & Security Americas Corporation, Inc. / 6 3102149-EN REV 03 ISS 20MAY14 install the horn-strobe: Remove the cover by using a screwdriver to depress and twist both tabs on top of the unit. Set the horn signal, sound output level, and strobe signal the desired settings. See Figure 1. change the horn output level from high dB to low dB, jumper JP3. change the horn signal from temporal to steady, cut JP2. change the strobe pattern from continuous to temporal mode), cut jumper JP1. Set the candela output. the candela switch to the desired candela output by it with the indicator notch below the switch. See 1. Mount the horn-strobe as follows. Route the signal circuit field wiring through the in the center of the horn-strobe. mount: Mount the horn-strobe and flush mount onto a compatible electrical box (Figure 2), making not to overtighten the mounting screws. See for compatible electrical boxes. mount: Mount the G4B or G4RB surface mount on the wall (Figure 3), and then secure the appliance the box using the fasteners provided with the box. Connect the signal circuit field wiring to the horn-strobe (Figure 4). Observe polarity for the unit to properly. Replace the cover by aligning it at the bottom, and then it in at the top. Test the unit for proper operation. To maintain the required agency listings, do not factory-applied finishes. unit is not serviceable or repairable. Should the unit fail to contact the supplier for a replacement. a visual inspection and an operational test twice a or as directed by the local authority having jurisdiction. 1: Horn-strobe settings Jumper JP3 Jumper JP2 2: Flush mount Jumper JP1 Candela switch indicator Compatible electrical box Flush mount spacer Horn-strobe Cover 8-32 x 1 in. screw, provided / 6 3102149-EN REV 03 ISS 20MAY14

Single SLC Interface Installation Sheet Connect the card to connector J15 as shown in Figure 2. Make you properly align the connector pins and plastic mounting and then lock into place. Connect the field wiring. See the appropriate SLC label on the panel near the FX-SLC1 See Figure 4 for correct SLC number configurations and placement. Power up the panel by first connecting the main AC power, and connecting the batteries. 1: FX-SLC1 LEDs LED DS3 2: FX-SLC1 installation on an FX-64 panel LED DS1 FX-SLC1 Single SLC Interface Card provides one device signaling circuit (SLC) on the control panel. The card can be installed on a panel as a replacement card or a FX-1000 panel as a or as an additional card. panel: The card provides 64 device addresses that can be any of detectors or modules. panel: The card expands the control panel’s device capability an additional 250 device addresses, (125 detectors and 125 addresses). The installation location of the card on the panel what panel SLC the card controls. After you install a new you must install the correct SLC label included with the card the panel. See Figure 4. the FX-SLC1 is installed in the primary slot (J15), then the card device loop SLC 1. a single SLC card is already installed in the primary slot (J15), this additional card gets installed in the secondary slot (J7) controls device loop SLC2. a dual SLC card is already installed in the primary slot (J15), this additional card gets installed in the secondary slot (J7) controls device loop SLC3. LEDs are two LEDs on the card that indicate loop communication See Table 1 and Figure 1 for location and function of the LEDs. installation location of the card on the panel determines what SLC the LEDs are associated with. See Figure 4. 1: FX-SLC1 LED functions communication: Flashes to indicate normal device 1 fault: Solid ON to indicate an open fault. Flashes to a short fault. and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. only one card is installed in the panel, it must be installed in the position, J15. Installation limits are under the jurisdiction of local authority. install the FX-SLC1 in a FX-64 panel: Power down the panel by first disconnecting the batteries, and disconnecting the main AC power. Plastic mounting standoff Connector J15 FX-SLC1 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 3 3102226-EN REV 002 ISS 26MAR17 4: Panel SLC number configurations for FX-1000 panels install the FX-SLC1 in FX-1000 panel: Power down the panel by first disconnecting the batteries, and disconnecting the main AC power. Connect the card to connector J15 or J7 as shown in the Figure 3. sure you properly align the connector pins and plastic standoffs, and then lock into place. Connect the field wiring. See the appropriate SLC label on the panel near the FX-SLC1 See Figure 4 for correct SLC number configurations and placement. Power up the panel by first connecting the main AC power, and connecting the batteries. 3: FX-SLC1 installation on an FX-1000 panel Connector J15 (primary Connector J7 (secondary Panel label card provides either Class B, Class A, or Class X wiring options. the device as shown in Figure 5, Figure 6, or Figure 7. Be sure to the polarity of the wires. 5: Class B wiring Plastic mounting standoff Connector J15 (primary FX-SLC1 Connector J7 (secondary FX-SLC1 SLC device 6: Class A wiring [1] FX-SLC1 SLC device / 3 3102226-EN REV 002 ISS 26MAR17 7: Class X wiring [2] FX-SLC1 Isolator module SLC devices SLC devices with an isolator UL/ULC listed enclosure For Class X wiring, un- devices must be in a cabinet with on the incomi

and FX-1000 Technical Manual 3102352-EN REV 008 ISS 25AUG21 and compliance information 2021 Carrier. All rights reserved. document may not be copied in whole or in part or otherwise reproduced without written consent from Carrier, except where specifically permitted under US and copyright law. FX-64 and FX-1000 name and Kidde logo are trademarks of Carrier. KESMobile a trademark of Carrier. trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products. A: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference their own expense. contact information, see www.kidde-esfire.com. 1 2 information iv system requirements vii get started vii and wiring 1 backbox installation 2 electronics installation 4 backbox wire routing 5 power wiring 6 transformer wiring 7 wiring (TB8) 8 appliance circuit wiring (TB2) 10 device loop wiring 12 trouble, and supervisory relay wiring (TB3) 17 annunciator wiring (TB4) 18 power output wiring 20 wiring 21 wiring 24 wiring 27 wiring 29 wiring 30 module wiring 31 module wiring 33 panel programming 35 programming requirements 37 started 38 type descriptions 52 the Program menu 61 the time and date 61 daylight saving time 62 the passwords 63 the factory default settings 63 up the programmable keys 64 the event history log 67 the firmware 68 the panel 68 RS-232 communication 69 programming the panel 69 incremental programming 76 and removing devices from programmed systems 79 and FX-1000 Technical Reference Manual 3 4 programming 83 operation 133 overview 135 display screen 136 LEDs 140 display expander LEDs 141 buttons 142 descriptions 147 with event messages 148 ID numbers and descriptions 151 event details 156 the panel 157 panel and annunciator buzzers 158 notification appliances 158 a lamp test 159 and restoring output devices 160 latched output devices 160 and restoring panel NACs 161 and restoring sensor bypass 162 and restoring gas accelerated response 163 and enabling devices 165 and enabling zones 166 and enabling panel events 167 and enabling loop events 168 and enabling panel NACs 170 and enabling the dialer and network 170 a fire drill 171 a walk test 171 175 steps for viewing and printing reports 176 report 176 Test report 177 Maintenance report 178 Status report 178 Groups report 179 Group Configuration report 179 report 180 Configuration report 180 Status report 181 Details report 181 reports 181 Fault report 183 a report 183 3102352-EN REV 008 ISS 25AUG21 5 maintenance, and testing 185 maintenance schedule 186 Ground Check 186 device 186 Device LED 187 comm check 187 panel testing 188 testing of a device (test fire) 189 testing 190 a lamp test 191 and stopping a walk test 191 Hype

FX Addressable Compatibility List 1: Subassemblies 2: Addressable detectors 3: Addressable modules LED display expander interface card A interface card interface card SLC Interface Card SLC Interface Card sheet series photoelectric smoke detector series photoelectric smoke detector series combination photoelectric smoke/fixed-temperature heat detector series combination photoelectric smoke/fixed-temperature heat detector series combination fixed temperature/rate-of-rise heat detector series combination fixed temperature/rate-of-rise heat detector series photoelectric duct smoke detector series photoelectric duct smoke detector series photoelectric smoke detector series combination fixed temperature/rate-of-rise heat detector series combination photoelectric smoke/fixed-temperature heat detector CO sensor fixed-temperature and rate-of-rise heat detector with CO sensor photoelectric smoke detector with CO sensor multisensor photo-heat-CO detector sounder base frequency sounder base base series single-action fire alarm station, English markings, metal series single-action fire alarm station, English markings, metal 2020 Carrier / 19 3102355-EN REV 014 ISS 14NOV20 series double-action, single-stage fire alarm station, plastic series double-action, single-stage fire alarm station, plastic series Class A single input module series Class A single input module series Class B single input mini module series Class B single input mini module series Class A/B two-wire smoke module series Class A/B two-wire smoke module series Class B dual input module series Class B dual input module series combination waterflow/supervisory module series combination waterflow/supervisory module series NAC module series NAC module series control relay module series control relay module series SLC fault isolator module series SLC fault isolator module Zone Interface module pattern generator module 4: Smoke detectors [1] [2] ID per IDC / N/A / N/A / N/A / N/A / N/A smoke detector smoke detector smoke detector smoke detector smoke detector smoke detector smoke detector photoelectric detector duct smoke detector smoke detector smoke detector VDC) smoke detector VDC) with CleanMe smoke detector VDC) with CleanMe and dual sensor (FT/ROR) / N/A / N/A per IDC and (ID 1.0)) 3102355-EN REV 014 ISS 14NOV20 / 19

Temporal Pattern Installation Sheet FX-T3T4 Temporal Pattern Generator is an addressable device to generate T3 (fire) or T4 (CO) temporal signal patterns for use compatible sounder bases. The T3 and T4 temporal patterns are with NFPA 72 and NFPA 720, respectively. In the United States, you can use T3 or T4. In Canada, you can use T3. FX-T3T4 module uses two addresses on the signaling line circuit Address 1 is tied to Channel 1 which is the T3 pattern. Address is tied to Channel 2 which is the T4 pattern. Channel 1 always has highest priority. device address is set using the two rotary switches located on the of the module. Two consecutive device addresses are required. second device address is automatically assigned one number than the value set on the rotary switches. selection fire alarm control unit sends synchronization and channel to the FX-T3T4. Channel selection determines the pattern. fire alarm control unit can also send silencing commands to the system initialization, the SLC controller determines which plays on each channel, depending on the marketplace setting. example, in the US and Canadian marketplaces, a fire alarm takes over a CO alarm, so the T3 pattern is assigned to Channel 1. for other markets are governed by local requirements. an alarm condition occurs, the detector notifies the control unit the control unit commands the FX-T3T4 to activate the T3T4 riser. FX-T3T4 generates the appropriate pattern and synchronizes all sounder bases on a single T3T4 riser. The SLC controller multiple FX-T3T4 modules installed on the same SLC. the FX-T3T4 alarm signal continues until the system resets or is manually The FX-T3T4 can receive silencing commands from the panel. operation FX-T3T4 module uses a bicolor LED to indicate its status, as Normal: Green LED flashes Alarm/active: Red LED flashes and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. This module will not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, you should discuss further with your local fire protection specialist. This module does not support conventional smoke detectors. Electrical supervision requires that you break the wire run at terminal. Do not loop the signaling circuit field wires around the The module is shipped from the factory as an assembled unit; it no user-serviceable parts and should not be Only one module is required for each T3T4 riser. When determining allowable wire resistance, refer to the voltage of the module, the signaling appliance, and the control panel Strip 1/4 in. (about 6 mm) from the ends of all wires that connect to terminal block of the module. Exposing more bare wire may a ground fault and exposing less wire may result in a faulty install the module: Verify that all field wiring is free of opens, shorts, and ground Make the wiring connections as shown in Figure 3. Set the module address. Refer to the control unit documentation a list of valid addresses. a screwdriver to adjust the two rotary switches on the front of module. Set the TENS rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the ONES rotary switch for the 0 through 9 For example: device address 21, set the TENS rotary switch 2 and set the ONES rotary switch to 1 (see Figure 1). Mount the module on the electrical box using the screws provided the electrical box. See Figure 2. on page 3 for compatible electrical boxes. Mount the wall plate on the module using the hardware shown in 2. 1: Module address 6 7 0 5 Insert screwdriver here. 2020 Carrier / 3 3102359-EN REV 002 ISS 21OCT20

Installation Wiring for N.O. Single and Pole Fire Alarm Stations Installation Sheet the glass rod after mounting on all catalog K-277* and models. installations: Fire alarm system components and wiring be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Code, NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling and in accordance with the local authorities having the Fire Alarm Station in accordance with Figure 1 or 2 for the applicable catalog number. ensure proper supervision of connections: Do not twist wires together. wire run and connect to each lead separately as . branching to be as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 1: Double pole normally open OF LINE LEADS SPARE N.O. PROVIDED CUSTOMER USE NUT NUMBERS: K-270A-DPO WHITE LEADS WIRING BLACK LEADS WIRING / 2 3102416-EN REV 01 ISS 27JUN16 2: Single pole normally open OF LINE NUT NUMBERS: K-277B-1110 & -1120 K-279B-1110 & -1120 K-270A-SPO information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. 2016 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. WHITE LEADS WIRING BLACK LEADS WIRING / 2 3102416-EN REV 01 ISS 27JUN16

Installation Wiring for N.O./N.C Double Fire Alarm Stations Installation Sheet installations: Fire alarm system components and wiring be installed in accordance with the local recognized of CAN/ULC-S524, C22.1 Canadian Electrical code Part Section 32, and in accordance with the local authorities jurisdiction. installations: Fire alarm system components and wiring be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Code, NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling and in accordance with the local authorities having the Fire Alarm Station in accordance with Figure 1 for the catalog number. ensure proper supervision of connections: Do not use looped wires under terminals. Break the wire Use both sides of the terminal screw as shown in 2. Do not twist wires together. branching to be as shown in Figure 1. 1: Double pole normally open/normally closed N.C. switch contact for customer use 2: Wire break example numbers: – UL only – UL & cUL Alarm information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. 2016 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. / 1 3102417-EN REV 01 ISS 28JUN16

Installation Wiring for N.O. Single and Pole Fire Alarm Stations Installation Sheet the glass rod after mounting on all catalog K-276* and models. installations: Fire alarm system components and wiring be installed in accordance with the local recognized of CAN/ULC-S524, C22.1 Canadian Electrical code Part Section 32, and in accordance with the local authorities jurisdiction. installations: Fire alarm system components and wiring be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Code, NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling and in accordance with the local authorities having 1: Double pole normally open N.O. switch contact for customer use 560 ohm resistor is to 270L model only the Fire Alarm Station in accordance with Figure 1 or 2 for the applicable catalog number. ensure proper supervision of connections: Do not use looped wires under terminals. Break the wire Use both sides of the terminal screw as shown in 3. Do not twist wires together. branching to be as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 numbers: – UL only – UL only – UL only Alarm / 2 3102418-EN REV 01 ISS 27JUN16 2: Single pole normally open 560 ohm resistor is to 270L model only numbers: -1110 – UL only -1120 – UL & cUL -1110 – UL only -1120 – UL & cUL – UL & cUL Alarm 3: Wire break example information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. 2016 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. / 2 3102418-EN REV 01 ISS 27JUN16

Installation Wiring for K-270P-DPO Fire Stations Installation Sheet installations: Fire alarm system components and wiring be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Code, NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling and in accordance with the local authorities having the Fire Alarm Station in accordance with Figure 1 for the catalog number. ensure proper supervision of connections: Do not use looped wires under terminals. Break the wire Use both sides of the terminal screw as shown in 2. Do not twist wires together. branching to be as shown in Figure 1. 1: Double pole normally open with normally open key N.C. SWITCH CONTACT FOR CUSTOMER USE OF LINE NUMBER: K-270P-DPO 2: Wire break example PANEL information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. 2016 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. / 1 3102419-EN REV 01 ISS 27JUN16

Installation Wiring for Single and Double Fire Alarm Stations Installation Sheet the Fire Alarm Station in accordance with Figure 1 or 2 for the applicable catalog number. ensure proper supervision of connections: Do not use looped wires under terminals. Break the wire Use both sides of the terminal screw as shown in 3. Do not twist wire together. branching to be as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 the glass rod after mounting on all catalog K-276* and models. installations: Fire alarm system components and wiring be installed in accordance with the local recognized of CAN/ULC-S524, C22.1 Canadian Electrical code Part Section 32, and in accordance with the local authorities jurisdiction. installations: Fire alarm system components and wiring be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 National Code, NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling and in accordance with the local authorities having 1: Double pole normally open to spare N.O. switch contact for customer use numbers: / 2 3102420-EN REV 01 ISS 27JUN16 numbers: – UL only 2: Single pole normally open 3: Wire break example information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. 2016 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. / 2 3102420-EN REV 01 ISS 27JUN16

Number Back Box K-276B-RSB back box is for use with following catalog numbers: K-277, K-278 and K-279 Series non fire alarm stations. 2016 3102421-EN 01 3102421-EN REV 01 ISS 27JUN16 / 1

Genesis Trim Accessory Mount the Genesis device cover by aligning the bottom, then tabs in at the top. Mount the wall plate cover by aligning the bottom, then snapping in at top. Remove trim plate by depressing both tabs on top of the device a small screwdriver. diagram plate with tabs up information Genesis Trim Accessory is a wall plate compatible with Genesis and EG1R series devices. It allows a Genesis device to be in a four-inch, two-gang, four-inch octagonal, or one-gang box. It also is compatible with an assortment of European boxes including 100 mm square. They are available in white red, with or without a FIRE label on the trim. *EG1T, *EG1RT, *EG1T-FIRE, and *EG1RT-FIRE are compatible all Genesis EG1 and EG1R series devices. devices: Genesis EG1 and EG1R series devices electrical boxes: 4 inch square inch octagonal mm square (European) High impact engineering polymer White and red instructions install the Genesis Trim Accessory: Mount the back wall plate cover to the electrical box with tabs up mounting diagram). Mount the Genesis device to the back plate cover. information Genesis Trim Accessory is a wall plate compatible with Genesis and EG1R series devices. It allows a Genesis device to be in a four-inch, two-gang, four-inch octagonal, or one-gang box. It also is compatible with an assortment of European boxes including 100 mm square. They are available in white red, with or without a FIRE label on the trim. EG1T, EG1RT, EG1T-FIRE, and EG1RT-FIRE are compatible all Genesis EG1 and EG1R series devices. devices: Genesis EG1 and EG1R series devices electrical boxes: 4 inch square inch octagonal mm square (European) High impact engineering polymer White and red instructions install the Genesis Trim Accessory: Mount the back wall plate cover to the electrical box with tabs up mounting diagram). Mount the Genesis device to the back plate cover. Sheet Trim Accessory Sheet Trim Accessory P/N: 3102426-EN REV: 01 / 1 Genesis Trim Accessory electrical box Mount the Genesis device cover by aligning the bottom, then tabs in at the top. Mount the wall plate cover by aligning the bottom, then snapping in at top. Remove trim plate by depressing both tabs on top of the device a small screwdriver. diagram plate with tabs up electrical box P/N: 3102426-EN REV: 01 / 1

Steady Horn Sheet Genesis Horn is an audible fire alarm notification appliance for indoor walls. See Table 1 for a list of model numbers. in accordance with applicable requirements in the latest editions the NFPA codes and standards and Canadian Electrical Code, 1, Section 32, and in accordance with the local authorities having 1: Model numbers description white white, with FIRE marking red red, with FIRE marking plate, white plate, white, with FIRE marking plate, red plate, red, with FIRE marking numbers voltage current output size electrical environment listings Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 to 22 AWG American 2-1/2 in (64 mm) deep box 4 in square box 1-1/2 in (38 mm) box or 4 in. octagonal with EG1T or trim accessory to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% RH, noncondensing at 90 (32 ULC-S525 and UL 464 seventh edition 2: Operating voltage / ULC [1] to 33 This device was tested to the regulated 24 VDC/FWR operating limits of 16 V and 33 V. Do not apply 80% and 110% of these for system operation. to 33 3: Maximum operating current (mA RMS) range to 33 VDC to 33 VFWR 4: Sound output (dBA) [1] room per UL 464 at 16 VDC chamber per ULC-S525 at 16 VDC. specific SPL data in Table 5 Sound level output at 10 ft. (3.05m) dBA minimum dBA minimum 5: Measured SPL (sound pressure levels) VDC VDC VDC VFWR VFWR VFWR level output measured in an anechoic chamber per ULC-S525 = Volts direct current, regulated and filtered = Volts full wave rectified. output (dBA) characteristics directional characteristics for the Genesis horn, see the following tables. 6: 24 VDC horizontal axis right right left left angles are measured by moving up from on-axis. dB (ref.) dB dB dB dB 7: 24 VDC vertical axis up down down angles are measured from above the unit. dB (ref.) dB dB dB 2016 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102427-EN REV 01 ISS 01SEP16 information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. 8: 24 VFWR horizontal axis right right left left angles are measured by moving to the right of on-axis. dB (ref.) dB dB dB dB 9: 24 VFWR vertical axis up down down angles are measured by moving up from on-axis. dB (ref.) dB dB dB instructions The Genesis models are for indoor use only. The Genesis models have no serviceable parts inside. When determining allowable wire resistance, refer to the voltage of the signaling device and the control panel specifications. install: Remove the cover by depressing both tabs on the top of the unit a small screwdriver and twisting slightly. Connect wires as shown. Electrical supervision requires the wire to broken at each terminal. (See the wiring diagram.) Mount on a compatible electrical box, making sure not to over- the mounting screws. Replace the cover by aligning at the bottom, then snapping in at top. Test the unit for proper operation. 1: Wiring diagram From NAC listed as compatible To next appliance, listed end-of-line device, or return (for Class A Polarity is shown in alarm condition. Refer to NAC source eq

Temporal Horn Sheet Genesis Temporal Horn is an audible fire alarm notification designed for indoor walls. See Table 1 for a list of model horn includes field configurable jumper options for selecting: Temporal or steady horn output (see Figure 1 item 1) High dB or low dB output (see Figure 1 item 2) 1: Models horn, white horn, white, with FIRE marking horn, red horn, red, with FIRE marking plate, white plate, white, with FIRE marking plate, red plate, red, with FIRE marking this device in accordance with applicable requirements in the editions of the NFPA codes and standards; the National Building of Canada; the Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, Section 32, in accordance with the local authorities having jurisdiction. Electrical supervision requires breaking the wire run at each Do not loop the signaling circuit field wires around the install the horn: Remove the cover by depressing both tabs on the top of the unit a small screwdriver and twisting slightly. Set the horn signal and sound output level to desired settings. See 1. Connect the horn terminals to the signal circuit field wiring. polarity for the unit to function properly. See Figure 2. Mount the unit onto a compatible electrical box, making sure not to the mounting screws. Replace the cover by aligning at the bottom, then snapping in at top. Test the unit for proper operation. 1: Horn settings J3 To change the horn signal from temporal to steady, cut from J2 to edge of circuit board To change the horn sound output level from high dB to low dB. J3 by snipping the board trace between holes 2: Wiring diagram From NAC output To next NAC output Polarity is shown in the alarm condition. To maintain the required agency listings, do not change applied finishes. unit is not serviceable or repairable. Should the unit fail to contact the supplier for replacement. a visual inspection and an operational test twice a year or as by the local authority having jurisdiction. 2: Sound level output (dBA) and voltage 464: Sound level output at 10 ft. (3.05 m) measured in a room. VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC 3: Sound level output (dBA, temporal tone, peak) and voltage VDC VDC VDC VFWR VFWR VFWR Meets or exceeds 85 dBA in an anechoic chamber at ft. (3.05 m) 2016 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102428-EN REV 01 ISS 01SEP16 and compliance rating American 24 DC and 24 FWR and UL 464 information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. 4: Operating current in RMS (A) VDC VDC VDC VFWR VFWR VFWR = Volts direct current, regulated and filtered = Volts full wave rectified 5: Audible directional characteristics (horizontal pattern) ( [1] Angles are measured from a perpendicular axis; positive angles to right Peak output at 24 VDC, set for temporal tone. output (dBA) [2] ( ( ) (3 ) (6 ) 6: Audible directional characteristics (vertical pattern) ( [1] Angles are measured from a perpendicular axis; positive angles are Peak output at 24 VDC, set for temporal tone. output (dBA) [2] ( ( dBA (3) (6) Voltage Operating level output directional size electrical 16 to 33 VDC, 16 to 33 VFWR

wire the KI-IB4: Wire the detector base as shown in Figure 1. the wire run at each terminal. Do not loop the signaling line field wires around the terminals. Detector Base Sheet the shield with electrical tape. 1: Wiring the KI-IB4 SLC IN (from previous device) SLC OUT (to next device) 1: Base terminals Description Number Description used IN / OUT + IN used 5 6 7 used OUT used KI-IB4 is a Signature Series detector base with outer mounting for a 4-inch square box, and includes a GSA-TS trim skirt. The has a built-in line fault isolator for use on a Class A signaling line (SLC). It does not operate without a detector and does not the GSA-LED. isolator operates as follows: A short on the line causes all isolators open within 23 ms; at 10 ms intervals, beginning on the side of the A circuit nearest the loop controller, the isolators close to provide next isolator down the line with power; when the isolator next to the closes, it reopens within 10 ms. The process repeats beginning the other side of the loop controller. Risk of equipment damage. To prevent damage to the base, not overtighten the base mounting screws or wire terminal screws. to on page 2 for torque values. to Technical Bulletin P/N 270659 for location and spacing install the KI-IB4: Mount the KI-IB4 on a compatible electrical box using the screws with the electrical box. Wire the base as shown in the section. Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided apply the label to the inside rim of the base. the GSA-TS trim skirt to finish the installation. Risk of system failure. Electrical supervision requires that the run be broken at each terminal. Do not loop the field wires around terminals. noise. Shielded wire is required only in environments with very high Shields, if used, must be continuous and insulated from ground. 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102476-EN REV 001 ISS 12JAN17 3 0 16 05 4 6 0 resistance isolators size max. to 18 AWG (1.0 to 4.0 mm 16 and 18 AWG are preferred torque mounting lbf-in (2.0 N max. lbf-in (1.4 N max. impact engineering polymer, white detectors Series detectors Four-Inch Box Trim Skirt/Ring electrical American single-gang box box 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep box 4 in. (102 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep single-gang box 75 mm with mm fixing centers box with 60.3 mm fixing centers box 4 in. (102 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep (using the outer mounting lugs the base) environment humidity to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing bulletin 270659 information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. / 2 3102476-EN REV 001 ISS 12JAN17

Detector Base Installation Risk of system failure. Electrical supervision requires that the run be broken at each terminal. Do not loop the field wires around terminals. Shielded wire is required only in environments with very high noise. Shields, if used, must be continuous and insulated from ground. wire the KI-IB: Wire the detector base as shown in Figure 1. the wire run at each terminal. Do not loop the signaling line field wires around the terminals. the shield with electrical tape. 1: Wiring the KI-IB KI-IB is a Signature Series detector base with a built-in line fault for use on a Class A signaling line circuit (SLC). It does not without a detector and does not support the GSA-LED. isolator operates as follows: A short on the line causes all isolators open within 23 ms; at 10 ms intervals, beginning on the side of the A circuit nearest the loop controller, the isolators close to provide next isolator down the line with power; when the isolator next to the closes, it reopens within 10 ms. The process repeats beginning the other side of the loop controller. Risk of equipment damage. To prevent damage to the base, not overtighten the base mounting screws or wire terminal screws. to on page 2 for torque values. SLC IN from previous device SLC OUT to next device 1: Base terminals to Technical Bulletin P/N 3102483-EN for location and spacing install the KI-IB: Mount the KI-IB on a compatible electrical box using the screws with the electrical box. Wire the base as shown in the section. Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided apply the label to the inside rim of the base. Use a GSA-TS trim skirt to finish the installation as needed. Description Number Description used IN / OUT + IN used 5 6 7 used OUT used 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102477-EN REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 3 0 16 05 4 5 9 resistance isolators size max. to 18 AWG (1.0 to 4.0 mm 16 and 18 AWG are preferred torque mounting lbf-in (2.0 N max. lbf-in (1.4 N max. impact engineering polymer, white detectors Series detectors Four-Inch Box Trim Skirt/Ring electrical American single-gang box box 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep box 4 in. (102 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep single-gang box 75 mm with mm fixing centers box with 60.3 mm fixing centers environment humidity to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing bulletin 3102483-EN information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. / 2 3102477-EN REV 001 ISS 10AUG17

en garde : risque de d du syst La supervision n que le c soit interrompu chaque borne. pas les fils autour des bornes. d de la base d KI-IB Un c blind est requis uniquement dans des environnements un niveau tr de bruit Si un blindage est utilis il doit continu et isol du sol. c la base KI-IB : Branchez la base du d comme illustr la Figure 1. le c toutes les bornes. N pas les fils du de signalisation local autour des bornes. le blindage avec du ruban 1 : C de la base KI-IB base KI-IB est une base des d de la s Signature avec de d de ligne int pour utilisation sur un circuit de de signalisation (SLC) de classe A. Elle ne fonctionne pas sans et ne prend pas en charge la GSA-LED. fonctionne comme suit : un court-circuit sur la ligne entra de tous les isolateurs en 23 ms; partir du circuit de A le plus proche du contr de boucle, les isolateurs se intervalles de 10 ms pour alimenter le prochain isolateur sur ligne; lorsque l c du court-circuit se ferme, il s en moins de 10 ms. Ce processus est le m de l du contr de boucle. en garde : risque de dommages l Pour le risque dommages la base, ne pas trop serrer les vis de fixation de la ou les vis des bornes de c Se reporter la rubrique en page 2, pour les valeurs de couple de serrage. reporter au bulletin technique P/N 3102483-EN pour les exigences l et l installer le KI-IB : vis fournies. Montez la base KI-IB dans un bo compatible l Branchez la base comme illustr la section C l attribu au d sur l fournie et l sur la face int du rebord de la base. Utilisez une embase d GSA-TS pour terminer au besoin. Entr SLC du dispositif pr Sortie SLC du dispositif 1 : Bornes de la base Description Num Description 5 SLC + 6 SLC SLC 7 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102477-FR REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 3 0 16 05 4 5 9 max. 18 AWG (1 4 mm 16 et 18 AWG conseill de serrage de la base lbf-po (2,0 N.m) max. lbf-po (1,4 N.m) max. du circuit les isolateurs des fils technique haute r blanc de la s Signature d de bo de mm (4 po) GSA-TS simple nord-am octogonal de 89 mm (3 1/2 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur octogonal de 102 mm (4 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur simple conforme aux normes de 75 mm avec des centres de de 60,3 mm conforme l avec centres de de 60,3 mm de relative 49 (32 120 93 % sans

wire the KI-RB4: Wire the detector base as shown in Figure 1, observing polarity. the wire run at each terminal. Do not loop the signaling line field wires around the terminals. Detector Base Sheet the shield with electrical tape. 1: Wiring the KI-RB4 Common (terminal 3) Normally closed (terminal 6) Normally open (terminal 1) SLC IN from previous device SLC OUT to next device 1: Base terminals Description Number Description open IN / OUT + IN 5 6 7 used closed OUT KI-RB4 is a Signature Series detector base with outer mounting for a 4-inch square box, and includes a GSA-TS trim skirt. The connects the detector to the signaling line circuit (SLC), but does support the GSA-LED. The KI-RB4 adds relay functionality to the compatible detectors. Risk of equipment damage. To prevent damage to the base, not overtighten the base mounting screws or wire terminal screws. to on page 2 for torque values. to Technical Bulletin P/N 3102483-EN for location and spacing install the KI-RB4: Mount the KI-RB4 on a compatible electrical box using the screws with the electrical box. Wire the base as shown in the section. Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided apply the label to the inside rim of the base. the GSA-TS trim skirt to finish the installation. Risk of system failure. Electrical supervision requires that the run be broken at each terminal. Do not loop the field wires around terminals. noise. Shielded wire is required only in environments with very high Shields, if used, must be continuous and insulated from ground. For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground at the device. 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 3 3102478-EN REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 (2) (3) 3 0 16 05 4 5 8 rating A at 30 VDC, pilot duty size to 18 AWG (1.0 to 4.0 mm 16 and 18 AWG are preferred torque mounting lbf-in (2.0 N max. lbf-in (1.4 N max. impact engineering polymer, white detectors Series detectors Four-Inch Box Trim Skirt/Ring electrical American single-gang box box 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep box 4 in. (102 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep single-gang box 75 mm with mm fixing centers box with 60.3 mm fixing centers box 4 in. (102 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep (using the outer mounting lugs the base) environment humidity to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing bulletin 3102483-EN information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. / 3 3102478-EN REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 3102478-EN REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 / 3

c la base KI-RB4 : Branchez la base du d comme illustr la Figure 1, en la polarit le c toutes les bornes. N pas les fils du de signalisation local autour des bornes. d de la base d KI-RB4 le blindage avec du ruban 1 : C de la base KI-RB4 Courante (borne 3) Normalement ferm (borne 6) Normalement ouverte (borne 1) Entr SLC du dispositif pr Sortie SLC du dispositif suivant 1 : Bornes de la base reporter au bulletin technique P/N 3102483-EN pour les exigences l et l 5 Description Num Description SLC + 6 ferm SLC 7 SLC base KI-RB4 est une base des d de la s Signature des bornes de montage ext pour un bo carr de mm (4 po), et qui comprend une embase d GSA-TS. relie le d au circuit de ligne de signalisation (SLC), mais prend pas en charge la GSA-LED. La base KI-RB4 ajoute une de relais aux d compatibles en garde : risque de dommages l Pour le risque dommages la base, ne pas trop serrer les vis de fixation de la ou les vis des bornes de c Se reporter la rubrique en page 2, pour les valeurs de couple de serrage. installer le KI-RB4 : Montez la base KI-RB4 dans un bo compatible des vis fournies. Branchez la base comme illustr la section C l attribu au d sur l fournie et l sur la face int du rebord de la base. l d GSA-TS pour terminer en garde : risque de d du syst La supervision n que le c soit interrompu chaque borne. pas les fils autour des bornes. Un c blind est requis uniquement dans des environnements un niveau tr de bruit Si un blindage est utilis il doit continu et isol du sol. Pour le c de classe B, il n a aucun raccord de blindage terre au dernier dispositif. 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102478-FR REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 (2) (3) 3 0 16 05 4 5 8 du contact A 30 V c.c., r de fonctionnement des fils 18 AWG (1 4 mm 16 et 18 AWG conseill de serrage de la base lbf-po (2,0 N.m) max. lbf-po (1,4 N.m) max. technique haute r blanc de la s Signature d de bo de mm (4 po) GSA-TS simple nord-am octogonal de 89 mm (3 1/2 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur octogonal de 102 mm (4 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur simple conforme aux normes de 75 mm avec des centres de de 60,3 mm conforme l avec centres de de 60,3 mm carr standard de 102 mm (4 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur (avec bornes montages ext sur la base) de relative

wire the KI-SB4: Wire the detector base as shown in Figure 1. the wire run at each terminal. Do not loop the signaling line field wires around the terminals. Detector Base Sheet the shield with electrical tape. 1: Wiring the KI-SB4 SLC IN from previous device. SLC OUT to next device. To GSA-LED. Maximum per wire is 10 1: Base terminals Description Description used IN/OUT + used IN LED LED + used OUT KI-SB4 is the standard Signature Series detector base with outer lugs for a 4-inch square box, and includes a GSA-TS trim The base connects the detector to the signaling line circuit (SLC), provides wiring terminals for connection to a GSA-LED. Risk of equipment damage. To prevent damage to the base, not overtighten the base mounting screws or wire terminal screws. to on page 2 for torque values. to Technical Bulletin P/N 3102483-EN for location and spacing install the KI-SB4: Mount the KI-SB4 on a compatible electrical box using the screws with the electrical box. Wire the base as shown in the section. Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided apply the label to the inside rim of the base. the GSA-TS trim skirt to finish the installation. Risk of system failure. Electrical supervision requires that the run be broken at each terminal. Do not loop the field wires around terminals. noise. Shielded wire is required only in environments with very high Shields, if used, must be continuous and insulated from ground. For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground at the device. 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102479-EN REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 3 0 16 05 4 5 7 size to 18 AWG (1.0 to 4.0 mm 16 and 18 AWG are preferred American UL 268, and UL 521 information information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. torque mounting lbf-in (2.0 N max. lbf-in (1.4 N max. engineering polymer, white detectors Series detectors Four-Inch Box Trim Skirt/Ring electrical American single-gang box box 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep box 4 in. (102 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep single-gang box 75 mm with mm fixing centers box with 60.3 mm fixing centers box 4 in. (102 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep (using the outer mounting lugs the base) environment humidity to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing bulletin 3102483-EN / 2 3102479-EN REV 001 ISS 10AUG17

c la base KI-SB4 : Branchez la base du d comme illustr la Figure 1. le c toutes les bornes. N pas les fils du de signalisation local autour des bornes. d de la base d KI-SB4 le blindage avec du ruban 1 : C de la base KI-SB4 base KI-SB4 est la base standard des d de la s avec des bornes de montage ext pour un bo de 102 mm (4 po), et qui comprend une embase d La base branche le d sur le circuit de ligne de (SLC) et fournit les bornes de c pour le d GSA-LED. en garde : risque de dommages l Pour le risque dommages la base, ne pas trop serrer les vis de fixation de la ou les vis des bornes de c Se reporter la rubrique en page 2, pour les valeurs de couple de serrage. reporter au bulletin technique P/N 3102483-EN pour les exigences l et l installer le KI-SB4 : Montez la base KI-SB4 dans un bo compatible des vis fournies. Branchez la base comme illustr la section C l attribu au d sur l fournie et l sur la face int du rebord de la base. l d GSA-TS pour terminer en garde : risque de d du syst La supervision n que le c soit interrompu chaque borne. pas les fils autour des bornes. Entr SLC du dispositif Branchement de la GSA- La r maximale fil est de 10 Sortie SLC du dispositif 1 : Bornes de la base Description Description SLC + SLC distance distance + SLC Un c blind est requis uniquement dans des environnements un niveau tr de bruit Si un blindage est utilis il doit continu et isol du sol. Pour le c de classe B, il n a aucun raccord de blindage terre au dernier dispositif. 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102479-FR REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 3 0 16 05 4 5 7 des fils 18 AWG (1 4 mm 16 et 18 AWG conseill de serrage de la base lbf-po (2,0 N.m) max. lbf-po (1,4 N.m) max. r UL 268 et UL 521 nord- technique haute r blanc de la s Signature conna nos coordonn consultez le site Web d de bo de mm (4 po) GSA-TS simple nord-am octogonal de 89 mm (3 1/2 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur octogonal de 102 mm (4 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur simple conforme aux normes de 75 mm avec des centres de de 60,3 mm conforme l avec centres de de 60,3 mm carr standard de 102 mm (4 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur (avec bornes montages ext sur la base) de

Detector Base Sheet Risk of system failure. Electrical supervision requires that the run be broken at each terminal. Do not loop the field wires around terminals. noise. device. wire the KI-RB: Shielded wire is required only in environments with very high Shields, if used, must be continuous and insulated from ground. For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground at the Wire the detector base as shown in Figure 1, observing polarity. the wire run at each terminal. Do not loop the signaling line field wires around the terminals. the shield with electrical tape. 1: Wiring the KI-RB KI-RB is a Signature Series detector base. It connects the detector the signaling line circuit (SLC), but does not support the GSA-LED. KI-RB adds relay functionality to the listed compatible detectors. Risk of equipment damage. To prevent damage to the base, not overtighten the base mounting screws or wire terminal screws. to on page 2 for torque values. to Technical Bulletin P/N 3102483-EN for location and spacing install the KI-RB: Mount the KI-RB on a compatible electrical box using the screws with the electrical box. Wire the base as shown in the section. Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided apply the label to the inside rim of the base. Use a GSA-TS trim skirt to finish the installation as needed. Common (terminal 3) Normally closed (terminal 6) Normally open (terminal 1) SLC IN from previous device SLC OUT to next device 1: Base terminals Description Number Description open IN / OUT + IN 5 6 7 used closed OUT 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102480-EN REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 (2) (3) 3 0 16 05 4 5 6 rating A at 30 VDC, pilot duty size to 18 AWG (1.0 to 4.0 mm 16 and 18 AWG are preferred torque mounting lbf-in (2.0 N max. lbf-in (1.4 N max. impact engineering polymer, white detectors Series detectors Four-Inch Box Trim Skirt/Ring electrical American single-gang box box 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep box 4 in. (102 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep single-gang box 75 mm with mm fixing centers box with 60.3 mm fixing centers environment humidity to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing bulletin 3102483-EN information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. / 2 3102480-EN REV 001 ISS 10AUG17

en garde : risque de d du syst La supervision n que le c soit interrompu chaque borne. pas les fils autour des bornes. d de la base d KI-RB Un c blind est requis uniquement dans des environnements un niveau tr de bruit Si un blindage est utilis il doit continu et isol du sol. Pour le c de classe B, il n a aucun raccord de blindage terre au dernier dispositif. c la base KI-RB : Branchez la base du d comme illustr la Figure 1, en la polarit le c toutes les bornes. N pas les fils du de signalisation local autour des bornes. le blindage avec du ruban 1 : C de la base KI-RB base KI-RB est la base des d de la s Signature. Elle le d au circuit de ligne de signalisation (SLC), mais ne pas en charge la GSA-LED. La base KI-RB ajoute une de relais aux d compatibles en garde : risque de dommages l Pour le risque dommages la base, ne pas trop serrer les vis de fixation de la ou les vis des bornes de c Se reporter la rubrique en page 2, pour les valeurs de couple de serrage. reporter au bulletin technique P/N 3102483-EN pour les exigences l et l installer le KI-RB : Montez la base KI-RB dans un bo compatible des vis fournies. Branchez la base comme illustr la section C l attribu au d sur l fournie et l sur la face int du rebord de la base. Utilisez une embase d GSA-TS pour terminer 1 : Bornes de la base au besoin. Description Num Description Courante (borne 3) Normalement ferm (borne 6) Normalement ouverte (borne 1) Entr SLC du dispositif pr Sortie SLC du dispositif suivant 5 SLC + 6 ferm SLC 7 SLC 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102480-FR REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 (2) (3) 3 0 16 05 4 5 6 du contact A 30 V c.c., r de fonctionnement des fils 18 AWG (1 4 mm 16 et 18 AWG conseill de serrage de la base lbf-po (2,0 N.m) max. lbf-po (1,4 N.m) max. technique haute r blanc de la s Signature d de bo de mm (4 po) GSA-TS simple nord-am octogonal de 89 mm (3 1/2 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur octogonal de 102 mm (4 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur simple conforme aux normes de 75 mm avec des centres de de 60,3 mm conforme l avec centres de de 60,3 mm de relative 49 (32 120 93 % sans condensation technique 3102483-EN conna nos coordonn consultez le site Web / 2 3102480-FR REV 001 ISS 10AU

wire the KI-SB: Wire the detector base as shown in Figure 1. the wire run at each terminal. Do not loop the signaling line field wires around the terminals. Detector Base Sheet the shield with electrical tape. 1: Wiring the KI-SB SLC IN from previous device. SLC OUT to next device. To GSA-LED. Maximum per wire is 10 Description Description 1: Base terminals used IN/OUT + used IN LED LED + used OUT KI-SB is the standard base for Signature Series detectors. It the detector to the signaling line circuit (SLC), and provides terminals for connection to a GSA-LED. Risk of equipment damage. To prevent damage to the base, not overtighten the base mounting screws or wire terminal screws. to on page 2 for torque values. to Technical Bulletin P/N 3102483-EN for location and spacing install the KI-SB: Mount the KI-SB on a compatible electrical box using the screws with the electrical box. Wire the base as shown in the section. Write the address assigned to the detector on the label provided apply the label to the inside rim of the base. Use a GSA-TS trim skirt to finish the installation as needed. Risk of system failure. Electrical supervision requires that the run be broken at each terminal. Do not loop the field wires around terminals. noise. Shielded wire is required only in environments with very high Shields, if used, must be continuous and insulated from ground. For Class B wiring, there is no shield connection to ground at the device. 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102481-EN REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 3 0 16 05 4 5 5 size to 18 AWG (1.0 to 4.0 mm 16 and 18 AWG are preferred American UL 268, and UL 521 information information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. torque mounting lbf-in (2.0 N max. lbf-in (1.4 N max. engineering polymer, white detectors Series detectors Four-Inch Box Trim Skirt/Ring electrical American single-gang box box 3-1/2 in. (89 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep box 4 in. (102 mm) by 1-1/2 in. mm) deep single-gang box 75 mm with mm fixing centers box with 60.3 mm fixing centers environment humidity to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing bulletin 3102483-EN / 2 3102481-EN REV 001 ISS 10AUG17

c la base KI-SB : Branchez la base du d comme illustr la Figure 1. le c toutes les bornes. N pas les fils du de signalisation local autour des bornes. d de la base d KI-SB le blindage avec du ruban 1 : C de la base KI-SB Entr SLC du dispositif Branchement de la GSA- La r maximale fil est de 10 Description Description Sortie SLC du dispositif 1 : Bornes de la base SLC + SLC distance distance + SLC base KI-SB est la base standard des d de la s Elle relie le d au circuit de ligne de signalisation et fournit les bornes de c pour le branchement d en garde : risque de dommages l Pour le risque dommages la base, ne pas trop serrer les vis de fixation de la ou les vis des bornes de c Se reporter la rubrique en page 2, pour les valeurs de couple de serrage. reporter au bulletin technique P/N 3102483-EN pour les exigences l et l installer le KI-SB : Montez la base KI-SB dans un bo compatible des vis fournies. Branchez la base comme illustr la section C l attribu au d sur l fournie et l sur la face int du rebord de la base. Utilisez une embase d GSA-TS pour terminer au besoin. en garde : risque de d du syst La supervision n que le c soit interrompu chaque borne. pas les fils autour des bornes. Un c blind est requis uniquement dans des environnements un niveau tr de bruit Si un blindage est utilis il doit continu et isol du sol. Pour le c de classe B, il n a aucun raccord de blindage terre au dernier dispositif. 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102481-FR REV 001 ISS 10AUG17 3 0 16 05 4 5 5 18 AWG (1 4 mm 16 et 18 AWG conseill nord- UL 268 et UL 521 r de serrage de la base lbf-po (2,0 N.m) max. lbf-po (1,4 N.m) max. technique haute r blanc de la s Signature conna nos coordonn consultez le site Web des fils d de bo de mm (4 po) GSA-TS simple nord-am octogonal de 89 mm (3 1/2 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur octogonal de 102 mm (4 po) par mm (1 1/2 po) de profondeur simple conforme aux normes de 75 mm avec des centres de de 60,3 mm conforme l avec centres de de 60,3 mm de relative 49 (32 120 93 % sans condensation technique 3102483-EN / 2 3102481-FR REV 001 ISS 10AUG17

Intelligent CO Installation Sheet exposure: Slight headache, nausea, vomiting, fatigue, runny nose, eyes (often described as symptoms). Do not paint the detector. Regulatory code may require that the system generate a three- temporal code (TC3) for fire alarms and a four-pulse code (TC4) for CO alarms. The CO sensor is calibrated at the factory. CO sensitivity is set to to UL 2034 requirements and cannot be changed by the See information on page 4 for specific sensitivity Connect this detector only to a UL Listed control panel capable of between alarm signals (fire, burglary, CO, etc.) and distinct identification for each. To reduce the likelihood of nuisance alarms, ventilate spaces when using household cleaning supplies similar contaminants. If a detector has been exposed to such test it promptly afterwards. of CO poisoning following symptoms related to CO poisoning should be discussed all occupants of the protected site. exposure: Severe throbbing headache, dizziness, drowsiness, fast heart rate. exposure: Unconsciousness, brain damage, convulsions, failure, death. cases of reported CO poisoning indicate that while victims are they are not well, they become so disoriented that they are to save themselves by either exiting the building or calling for Young children and pets may be the first affected. sources CO sensor in this detector is designed to detect carbon monoxide from any source of combustion. It is not intended to detect fire, or any other gas. Potential CO sources include fuel-fired (e.g., space heater, furnace, water heater, range, oven, dryer); other sources of combustion (e.g., kerosene-burning or heater, or gas log fireplace); or internal combustion engines. addition, excessive exhaust spillage or reverse venting of fuel- appliances can produce dangerous transient levels of CO. This be caused by external conditions: Wind direction, velocity, or a combination of both, including high of wind or insufficient draft in vent pipes Temperature inversions that can trap exhaust gases near the Negative pressure differential resulting from the use of exhaust monoxide alarm procedure The carbon monoxide (CO) alarm indicates the presence CO, which can kill you. If the alarm signal sounds four times, pauses five seconds, and then repeats the pattern, follow the steps shown Move to fresh air immediately outdoors or by an open door or Check that all persons are accounted for. Do not reenter premises or move away from the open door or window until services responders have arrived, the premises have aired out, and your detector remains in normal condition. Call emergency services, the fire department, or 911: about carbon monoxide Read these installation instructions in their entirety before Leave these instructions with the owner/user of this detection equipment. This product is intended for use in indoor locations of dwelling It is not designed to comply with Occupational Safety and Administration (OSHA) commercial or industrial standards. The detector only indicates the presence of CO gas at the Simultaneous operation of several fuel-burning appliances Carbon monoxide gas may be present in other areas. for limited internal air Failure to properly install, test, and maintain a CO detector may Vent pipe connections vibrating loose from dryers, furnaces, or it to fail, potentially resulting in loss of life. heaters of this detector is not a substitute for proper installation, and maintenance of fossil fuel-burning appliances, including ventilation and exhaust systems. Obstructions in vent pipes or unconventional vent pipe designs can amplify the above situations Poorly designed or maintained chimneys and/or vents To reduce the risk of CO poisoning, test the detector operation not in use for 10 days or more. This detector does not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, di

Intelligent Fixed- and Rate-of-Rise Detector with CO Sensor Sheet monoxide alarm procedure The carbon monoxide (CO) alarm indicates the presence CO, which can kill you. If the alarm signal sounds four times, pauses five seconds, and then repeats the pattern, follow the steps shown Move to fresh air immediately outdoors or by an open door or Check that all persons are accounted for. Do not reenter premises or move away from the open door or window until services responders have arrived, the premises have aired out, and your detector remains in normal condition. Call emergency services, the fire department, or 911: about carbon monoxide Read these installation instructions in their entirety before Leave these instructions with the owner/user of this detection equipment. exposure: Slight headache, nausea, vomiting, fatigue, runny nose, eyes (often described as symptoms). Do not paint the detector. Regulatory code may require that the system generate a three- temporal code (TC3) for fire alarms and a four-pulse code (TC4) for CO alarms. The CO sensor is calibrated at the factory. CO sensitivity is set to to UL 2034 requirements and cannot be changed by the See information on page 4 for specific sensitivity Connect this detector only to a UL Listed control panel capable of between alarm signals (fire, burglary, CO, etc.) and distinct identification for each. To reduce the likelihood of nuisance alarms, ventilate spaces when using household cleaning supplies similar contaminants. If a detector has been exposed to such test it promptly afterwards. of CO poisoning following symptoms related to CO poisoning should be discussed all occupants of the protected site. exposure: Severe throbbing headache, dizziness, drowsiness, fast heart rate. exposure: Unconsciousness, brain damage, convulsions, failure, death. cases of reported CO poisoning indicate that while victims are they are not well, they become so disoriented that they are to save themselves by either exiting the building or calling for Young children and pets may be the first affected. sources CO sensor in this detector is designed to detect carbon monoxide from any source of combustion. It is not intended to detect fire, or any other gas. Potential CO sources include fuel-fired (e.g., space heater, furnace, water heater, range, oven, dryer); other sources of combustion (e.g., kerosene-burning or heater, or gas log fireplace); or internal combustion engines. addition, excessive exhaust spillage or reverse venting of fuel- appliances can produce dangerous transient levels of CO. This be caused by external conditions: Wind direction, velocity, or a combination of both, including high of wind or insufficient draft in vent pipes Temperature inversions that can trap exhaust gases near the This product is intended for use in indoor locations of dwelling Negative pressure differential resulting from the use of exhaust It is not designed to comply with Occupational Safety and Administration (OSHA) commercial or industrial standards. The detector only indicates the presence of CO gas at the for limited internal air Carbon monoxide gas may be present in other areas. Vent pipe connections vibrating loose from dryers, furnaces, or Simultaneous operation of several fuel-burning appliances Failure to properly install, test, and maintain a CO detector may heaters it to fail, potentially resulting in loss of life. of this detector is not a substitute for proper installation, and maintenance of fossil fuel-burning appliances, including ventilation and exhaust systems. Obstructions in vent pipes or unconventional vent pipe designs can amplify the above situations Poorly designed or maintained chimneys and/or vents Extended operation of unvented fossil fuel-burning devices (range, To reduce the risk of CO poisoning, test the detector operation not in use for

and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. Intelligent Fixed- and Rate-of-Rise Detector Installation studies indicate that heat detectors should only be when property protection alone is involved. Never rely on detectors as the sole means of fire protection. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room before applying power. The dust cover (supplied) must remain on the detector during and be removed prior to commissioning and service. dust cover is not a substitute for removing the detector during construction or heavy remodeling. This detector does not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards the local fire protection specialist. This detector does not sense fires in areas where heat cannot the detector. Heat from fires in walls, roofs, or on the side of closed doors may not reach the detector. This detector by itself does not provide smoke or fire protection. this detector with ionization or photoelectric smoke detectors, both. This detector does not detect oxygen levels, smoke, toxic gases, flames. Use this device as part of a broad-based life safety which includes a variety of information sources pertaining heat and smoke levels, extinguishment systems, visible and devices, and other safety measures. Canada, install according to CAN/ULC-S524 Standard for the of Fire Alarm Systems, CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Part 1, and the local authority having jurisdiction. and wire the base, as described on the installation sheet with the base. Set the detector address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. Use a screwdriver to adjust two rotary switches on the back of the detector. Figure 2.) Set the left rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the right rotary switch for the 0 through 9 digit. Attach the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise it snaps into the locked position. 2: Setting detector address (address 52 shown) Insert a screwdriver here to set the address model KIR-HD Intelligent Fixed-Temperature and Rate-of-Rise Detector that contains a fixed-temperature heat sensor to detect from fire. The heat sensor monitors the temperature of the air in surroundings and the detector analyzes the data to determine to initiate an alarm. indicator. The LED indicator (see Figure 1) displays the following Normal: Green LED indicator flashes, no action Alarm/active: Red LED indicator flashes, evacuate the area 1: KIR-HD features install the detector: Self-locking tab LED indicator 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102529-EN REV 001 ISS 15AUG17 6 7 8 5 testing, notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is maintenance and will be temporarily out of service. each sensor in the detector. Heat damage. Excessive heat may damage the detector cover. Do not apply excessive heat when using a hair dryer. using a Testifire detector tester, you must install a Testifire Assembly. sure the Testifire Adapter Assembly (model is installed in the Testifire detector tester before Refer to the Testifire Adapter Assembly Installation Sheet 3101942-ML) for further details. perform an initial installation test: Remove the detector from its base and verify that the proper address, trouble signals, and messages are reported. wired for Class A operation, verify that the detector continues to first with SLC_IN disconnected, reconnect SLC_IN and with SLC_OUT disconnected. (Refer to the installation sheet the base.) Place a momentary ground fault on the SLC to verify operation of ground fault detection circuitry. Run a system detector maintenance report on all detectors and that the readings fall within acceptable limits. p

et raccordez ce dispositif conform aux codes, aux et aux r nationaux et locaux en vigueur. d du de chaleur de type et KIR-HD Des ind indiquent que les d de chaleur devraient utilis que lorsqu s de prot une Il ne faut jamais d uniquement des d chaleur pour se prot des incendies. : Pour assurer un fonctionnement correct, placez le d des port recommand Laissez le d se la temp ambiante avant de le mettre sous couvercle de protection contre la poussi (fourni) doit rester le d durant l et seulement retir avant mise en service. Le couvercle de protection contre la poussi pas un substitut au retrait du d durant des travaux nouvelle construction ou d r d Ce d ne fonctionne pas sans Puisque les provoquent souvent des coupures de courant, il faut d mesures de protection avec les sp de protection contre les incendies de votre r Cet appareil ne d pas les incendies hors de sa port la chaleur d feu provenant des murs, du toit ou de c d porte ferm Ce d par lui-m ne prot pas contre la fum ou le Utilisez cet appareil avec des d de fum ionisation photo ou combinant ces deux. Cet appareil ne d pas des niveaux d de fum de toxique ou de flammes. Utilisez cet appareil dans le cadre d global de s pour prot la vie des personnes, qui comprend une vari de sources d relatives niveaux de chaleur et de fum des syst d dispositifs visuels et sonores, et d mesures de s Au Canada, votre installation doit r aux exigences de la CAN/ULC-S524, Norme sur l des r d de la clause CSA C22.1 du Code de l Partie 1, et des autorit comp installer le d : et c la base tel que d sur la fiche d avec la base. R l du d Reportez-vous au manuel de technique du panneau pour une liste d valides. un tournevis pour r les deux commutateurs rotatifs l du d la Figure 2.) R le commutateur rotatif gauche (0 12) les dizaines et les centaines et le commutateur droit pour les de 0 9. Fixez le d sur la base en tournant le d dans le des aiguilles d montre jusqu ce qu s dans position bloqu D de chaleur de type thermostatique et intelligent KIR-HD comporte un d de de type thermostatique qui d la chaleur se d incendie. Le capteur de chaleur surveille la temp de l et analyse les donn pour d s doit d alarme. DEL. Le t DEL (voir la Figure 1) affiche les : Normal : le t DEL vert clignote, aucune action. Alarme/actif : le t DEL rouge clignote, les lieux. 1 : caract du KIR-HD Languette autobloquante T

Intelligent Photoelectric Detector with CO Sensor Sheet Regulatory code may require that the system generate a three- temporal code (TC3) for fire alarms and a four-pulse code (TC4) for CO alarms. The CO sensor is calibrated at the factory. CO sensitivity is set to to UL 2034 requirements and cannot be changed by the See information on page 4 for specific sensitivity Connect this detector only to a UL Listed control panel capable of between alarm signals (fire, burglary, CO, etc.) and distinct identification for each. To reduce the likelihood of nuisance alarms, ventilate spaces when using household cleaning supplies similar contaminants. If a detector has been exposed to such test it promptly afterwards. of CO poisoning following symptoms related to CO poisoning should be discussed all occupants of the protected site. exposure: Slight headache, nausea, vomiting, fatigue, runny nose, eyes (often described as symptoms). monoxide alarm procedure The carbon monoxide (CO) alarm indicates the presence CO, which can kill you. If the alarm signal sounds four times, pauses five seconds, and then repeats the pattern, follow the steps shown Move to fresh air immediately outdoors or by an open door or Check that all persons are accounted for. Do not reenter premises or move away from the open door or window until services responders have arrived, the premises have aired out, and your detector remains in normal condition. Call emergency services, the fire department, or 911: about carbon monoxide exposure: Severe throbbing headache, dizziness, drowsiness, fast heart rate. exposure: Unconsciousness, brain damage, convulsions, failure, death. cases of reported CO poisoning indicate that while victims are they are not well, they become so disoriented that they are to save themselves by either exiting the building or calling for Young children and pets may be the first affected. sources CO sensor in this detector is designed to detect carbon monoxide from any source of combustion. It is not intended to detect fire, or any other gas. Potential CO sources include fuel-fired (e.g., space heater, furnace, water heater, range, oven, dryer); other sources of combustion (e.g., kerosene-burning or heater, or gas log fireplace); or internal combustion engines. addition, excessive exhaust spillage or reverse venting of fuel- appliances can produce dangerous transient levels of CO. This be caused by external conditions: Read these installation instructions in their entirety before Wind direction, velocity, or a combination of both, including high Leave these instructions with the owner/user of this detection equipment. of wind or insufficient draft in vent pipes Temperature inversions that can trap exhaust gases near the This product is intended for use in indoor locations of dwelling It is not designed to comply with Occupational Safety and Administration (OSHA) commercial or industrial standards. The detector only indicates the presence of CO gas at the Carbon monoxide gas may be present in other areas. Failure to properly install, test, and maintain a CO detector may it to fail, potentially resulting in loss of life. of this detector is not a substitute for proper installation, and maintenance of fossil fuel-burning appliances, including ventilation and exhaust systems. To reduce the risk of CO poisoning, test the detector operation not in use for 10 days or more. This detector does not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). Do not paint the detector. Negative pressure differential resulting from the use of exhaust Simultaneous operation of several fuel-burning appliances for limited internal air Vent pipe connections vibrating loose from dryers, furnaces, or heaters Obstructions in vent pipes or unconventional vent pipe designs

Intelligent Smoke Installation Sheet Upon completion of the original installation and following any or additions to the system, perform a calibrated test per NFPA code. The Kidde Intelligent devices can this test at the panel which can then generate a system report. Refer to Kidde Intelligent Detector Application Bulletin 3102534-EN) for additional information on detector placement spacing. install the device: and wire the base, as described on the installation sheet with the base. Set the detector address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. Use a screwdriver to adjust two rotary switches on the back of the detector. Figure 1.) Set the left rotary switch (0 through 12) for the and 100s digit and the right rotary switch for the 0 through 9 Attach the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise it snaps into the locked position. 1: Setting detector address (address 52 shown) Insert a screwdriver here to set the address 2: KIR-PD features model KIR-PD Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector is an device that uses an optical sensing chamber to detect The detector analyzes data from the sensing chamber to whether to initiate an alarm. indicator. The LED indicator (see Figure 2) displays the following Normal: Green LED indicator flashes, no action. Alarm/active: Red LED indicator flashes, evacuate the area. This detector does not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards the local fire protection specialist. This detector does not sense fires in areas where smoke cannot the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the side of closed doors may not reach the detector. Photoelectric detectors have a wide range of fire-sensing and are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room before applying power. The dust cover (supplied) must remain on the detector during and be removed prior to commissioning and service. dust cover is not a substitute for removing the detector during construction or heavy remodeling. Self-locking tab LED indicator Do not use smoke detectors with detector guards unless the has been evaluated and found suitable. testing, notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is maintenance and will be temporarily out of service. and wire this device in accordance with applicable national local codes, ordinances, and regulations. perform an initial installation test: Canada, install according to CAN/ULC-S524 Standard for the of Fire Alarm Systems, CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical and the local authority having jurisdiction. Remove the detector from its base and verify that the proper address, trouble signals, and messages are reported. For KIR-PD detectors placed in the air ducts, verify that the airflow within specifications. See on page 2. 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102531-EN REV 001 ISS 15AUG17 6 7 8 5 wired for Class A operation, verify that the detector continues to first with SLC_IN disconnected, reconnect SLC_IN and with SLC_OUT disconnected. (Refer to the installation sheet the base.) information UL 268, UL 268A Place a momentary ground fault on the SLC circuit to verify to 3.94 %/ft. (1.7 to 12.35 %/m) obscuration American smoke range compliance device complies with part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must any interference received, including that may cause undesired Canada Class A digital apparatus complies with

Au Canada, votre installation doit r aux exigences de la CAN/ULC-S524, Norme sur l des r d de la clause CSA C22.1 du Code de l et des autorit comp locales. la fin de l d et suite des modifications ou ajouts au syst proc un test de sensibilit calibr la norme NFPA. Les appareils intelligents Kidde effectuer ce test sur le panneau qui cr un rapport de du syst Pour de l suppl sur l des et l respecter entre eux, reportez-vous Kidde Intelligent Detector Application Bulletin no3102534-EN). installer le dispositif : et c la base tel que d sur la fiche d avec la base. R l du d Reportez-vous au manuel de technique du panneau pour une liste d Utilisez un tournevis pour r les deux commutateurs situ l du d la Figure 1.) R le commutateur rotatif gauche (0 12) les dizaines et les centaines et le commutateur droit pour les de 0 9. Fixez le d sur la base en tournant le d dans le des aiguilles d montre jusqu ce qu s dans position bloqu 1 : R de l du d (adresse 52 illustr Ins un tournevis ici pour r l 2 : caract du KIR-PD d du de fum intelligent D de fum photo intelligent KIR-PD est un intelligent utilisant une chambre de d optique de d la fum Il analyse les donn de la chambre d pour d s doit d une alarme. DEL. Le t DEL (voir la Figure 2) affiche les : Normal : le t DEL vert clignote, aucune action. Alarme/actif : le t DEL rouge clignote, les lieux. Ce d ne fonctionne pas sans Puisque les provoquent souvent des coupures de courant, il faut d mesures de protection avec les sp de protection contre les incendies de votre r Cet appareil ne d pas les incendies hors de sa port la fum d feu provenant des murs, du toit ou de l d porte ferm d photo sont dot de nombreuses de d d et conviennent le mieux dans le de feux couvants lente. Pour assurer un fonctionnement correct, placez le d des port recommand Laissez le d se la temp ambiante avant de le mettre sous couvercle de protection contre la poussi (fourni) doit rester le d durant l et seulement retir avant mise en service. Le couvercle de protection contre la poussi pas un substitut au retrait du d durant des travaux nouvelle construction ou d r d Languette autobloquante T DEL N pas les d de fum avec des protections, sauf l des deux a et autoris et raccordez ce dispos

Intelligent Photo-Heat-CO Installation Sheet exposure: Slight headache, nausea, vomiting, fatigue, runny nose, eyes (often described as symptoms). Regulatory code may require that the system generate a three- temporal code (TC3) for fire alarms and a four-pulse code (TC4) for CO alarms. The CO sensor is calibrated at the factory. CO sensitivity is set to to UL 2034 requirements and cannot be changed by the See information on page 4 for specific sensitivity Connect this detector only to a UL Listed control panel capable of between alarm signals (fire, burglary, CO, etc.) and distinct identification for each. To reduce the likelihood of nuisance alarms, ventilate spaces when using household cleaning supplies similar contaminants. If a detector has been exposed to such test it promptly afterwards. of CO poisoning following symptoms related to CO poisoning should be discussed all occupants of the protected site. exposure: Severe throbbing headache, dizziness, drowsiness, fast heart rate. exposure: Unconsciousness, brain damage, convulsions, failure, death. cases of reported CO poisoning indicate that while victims are they are not well, they become so disoriented that they are to save themselves by either exiting the building or calling for Young children and pets may be the first affected. sources CO sensor in this detector is designed to detect carbon monoxide from any source of combustion. It is not intended to detect fire, or any other gas. Potential CO sources include fuel-fired (e.g., space heater, furnace, water heater, range, oven, dryer); other sources of combustion (e.g., kerosene-burning or heater, or gas log fireplace); or internal combustion engines. addition, excessive exhaust spillage or reverse venting of fuel- appliances can produce dangerous transient levels of CO. This be caused by external conditions: Wind direction, velocity, or a combination of both, including high of wind or insufficient draft in vent pipes Temperature inversions that can trap exhaust gases near the Negative pressure differential resulting from the use of exhaust monoxide alarm procedure The carbon monoxide (CO) alarm indicates the presence CO, which can kill you. If the alarm signal sounds four times, pauses five seconds, and then repeats the pattern, follow the steps shown Move to fresh air immediately outdoors or by an open door or Check that all persons are accounted for. Do not reenter premises or move away from the open door or window until services responders have arrived, the premises have aired out, and your detector remains in normal condition. Call emergency services, the fire department, or 911: about carbon monoxide Read these installation instructions in their entirety before Leave these instructions with the owner/user of this detection equipment. This product is intended for use in indoor locations of dwelling It is not designed to comply with Occupational Safety and Administration (OSHA) commercial or industrial standards. The detector only indicates the presence of CO gas at the Carbon monoxide gas may be present in other areas. Simultaneous operation of several fuel-burning appliances for limited internal air Failure to properly install, test, and maintain a CO detector may it to fail, potentially resulting in loss of life. Vent pipe connections vibrating loose from dryers, furnaces, or heaters of this detector is not a substitute for proper installation, and maintenance of fossil fuel-burning appliances, including ventilation and exhaust systems. To reduce the risk of CO poisoning, test the detector operation not in use for 10 days or more. This detector does not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). Obstructions in vent pipes or unconventional vent pipe designs can amplify the above situations

Intelligent Photo-Heat Installation Sheet Upon completion of the original installation and following any or additions to the system, perform a calibrated test per NFPA code. The Kidde Intelligent devices can this test at the panel which can then generate a system report. install the device: and wire the base, as described on the installation sheet with the base. Set the detector address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. Use a screwdriver to adjust two rotary switches on the back of the detector. Figure 1) Set the left rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the right rotary switch for the 0 through 9 digit. Attach the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise it snaps into the locked position. 1: Setting detector address (address 52 shown) model KIR-PHD Intelligent Multisensor Photo-Heat Detector is an device that contains a photoelectric smoke sensor and a heat sensor with a fixed temperature setting. The detector the data from both sensing devices and determines whether alarm should be initiated. Can be operated as a single detector smoke or heat to initiate an alarm. indicator. The LED indicator (see Figure 2) displays the following Normal: Green LED indicator flashes, no action. Alarm/active: Red LED indicator flashes, evacuate the area. Insert a screwdriver here to set the address 2: KIR-PHD features This detector does not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards the local fire protection specialist. This detector does not sense fires in areas where smoke or heat reach the detector. Smoke or heat from fires in walls, roofs, on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector. Photoelectric detectors have a wide range of sensing capabilities, are best suited for detecting slow, smoldering fires. The heat in this device provides a source of supplemental The heat sensor by itself does not provide life safety Self-locking tab LED indicator To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room before applying power. The dust cover (supplied) must remain on the detector during and be removed prior to commissioning and service. dust cover is not a substitute for removing the detector during construction or heavy remodeling. Do not use smoke detectors with detector guards unless the has been evaluated and found suitable. Canada, install according to the CAN/ULC-S524 Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, the CSA C22.1 Canadian Code, and the local authority having jurisdiction. testing, notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is maintenance and will be temporarily out of service. each sensor in the detector. Heat damage. Excessive heat may damage the detector cover. Do not apply excessive heat when using a hair dryer. using a Testifire detector tester, you must install a Testifire Assembly. sure the Testifire Adapter Assembly (model is installed in the Testifire detector tester before Refer to the Testifire Adapter Assembly Installation Sheet (P/N for further details. 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102533-EN REV 001 ISS 15AUG17 6 7 8 5 Run a system detector sensitivity report on all detectors and verify readings fall within acceptable limits. mount distance from in. (305 mm) max. perform an initial installation test: Remove the detector from its base and verify that the proper address, trouble signals, and messages are reported. For KIR-PHD detectors placed in the air ducts, verify that the is within specifications. See below. wired for Class A operation, verify that the detector continues to first with SLC_IN disconnected, reconnect SLC_IN and with SLC_OUT dis

n pas un substitut au retrait du d durant des travaux nouvelle construction ou d r d N pas les d de fum avec des protections, sauf l des deux a et autoris Au Canada, votre installation doit r aux exigences de la CAN/ULC-S524, Norme sur l des r d de la clause CSA C22.1 du Code de l et des autorit comp locales. la fin de l d et suite des modifications ou ajouts au syst proc un test de sensibilit calibr la norme NFPA. Les appareils intelligents Kidde effectuer ce test sur le panneau qui cr un rapport de du syst installer le dispositif : et c la base tel que d sur la fiche d avec la base. R l du d Reportez-vous au manuel de technique du panneau pour une liste d valides. un tournevis pour r les deux commutateurs rotatifs l du d (Voir la Figure 1.) R le rotatif gauche (0 12) pour les dizaines et les et le commutateur droit pour les chiffres de 0 9. Fixez le d sur la base en tournant le d dans le sens aiguilles d montre jusqu ce qu s dans la bloqu 1 : R de l du d (adresse 52 illustr Ins un tournevis ici pour r l 2 : caract du KIR-PHD d du multicapteurs photo thermique intelligent KIR- D multicapteurs photo et thermique intelligent KIR-PHD est appareil intelligent qui comporte un d de fum et un d de chaleur de type avec un param thermostatique. Le d les donn des deux appareils de d pour d doit d une alarme. Il peut fonctionner comme un seul en utilisant la fum ou la chaleur pour d une DEL. Le t DEL (voir la Figure 2) affiche les : Normal : le t DEL vert clignote, aucune action. Alarme/actif : le t DEL rouge clignote, les lieux. Ce d ne fonctionne pas sans Puisque les provoquent souvent des coupures de courant, il faut d mesures de protection avec les sp de protection contre les incendies de votre r Cet appareil ne d pas les incendies dans les zones o la ou la chaleur sont hors de la port du d comme la ou la chaleur d feu provenant des murs, du toit ou de c d porte ferm Les d photo sont dot de nombreuses de d et conviennent le mieux dans le cas de feux lente. Le capteur de chaleur inclus dans cet fournit une source d suppl mais suffit pas pour prot la vie des personnes. Pour assurer un fonctionnement correct, placez le d des port recommand Laissez le d se la temp ambiante avant de le mettre sous Languette autobloquante T DEL Le couvercle de protection contre la poussi (fourni) doit rester le d durant l

No text preview available.

4.0 and FSP/FX Panel Firmware Release Notes 1 system compatibility 1 compatibility 1 versions and compatibility 2 new in this release 2 4.0 Help 5 of NFPA 72 testing requirements 5 of NFPA 720 requirements 5 issues 5 information 6 release notes contain a summary of the changes included with FA-CU version 4.0 and FX/FSP panel firmware version 4.0. read the release notes in their entirety to become familiar with new panel functionality and upgrade system compatibility 4.0 was tested and found compatible with the following Microsoft Windows Operating Systems: 10 Professional, Windows 8.1 Professional, and Windows 7 Professional. compatibility F-DACT1(F) is compatible with FSP/FX conventional control units running firmware versions 4.0. The is compatible with FSP/FX conventional control units running firmware versions 3.x and earlier. 2017 United Technologies Corporation / 6 3102540-EN REV 001 ISS 03MAY17 versions and compatibility can use FA-CU 4.0 to configure FSP/FX control units running firmware versions 4.0 and earlier. On FSP/FX units running firmware earlier than 4.0: The Alarm On event (manual evacuation) is not supported. Instead, the FA-CU uses the Drill event. Setting the DACT transmission test frequency to 6 hours is not supported. Instead, the FA-CU converts days hours when reading panel data, and converts hours to days when writing panel data. new in this release 4.0 and panel firmware version 4.0 include the following new features: New configuration utility for programming FSP/FX conventional control units New overlays for 5-zone and 10-zone FSP/FX conventional control units New ON system event replaces the event DACT transmission test frequency values are now specified in hours, not in days (default is 6 hours) configuration utility for FSP/FX conventional control units 4.0 is the new configuration utility used for configuring FireShield Plus and FX Series fire alarm control 4.0 is installed in the C: folder. However, you can choose a different location during the To start the FA-CU, click the desktop shortcut shown below. can also start the FA-CU from the Windows Start menu as shown below. 4.0 supports the latest UL/ULC requirements and is compatible with FSP/FX control units running version 4.0. FA-CU 4.0 may be used to configure databases for FSP/FX control units running firmware earlier than 4.0 with the following exceptions: The FA-CU replaces the new Alarm ON event with the Drill event. FSP/FX control units running firmware earlier than 4.0 do not support the Alarm ON event. 3102540-EN REV 001 ISS 03MAY17 / 6 The FA-CU converts the DACT transmission test frequency from days to hours when reading panel data, and hours to days when writing panel data. FSP/FX control units running firmware versions earlier than do not support DACT transmission test frequency values less than whole number days. overlays for 5-zone and 10-zone FSP/FX conventional control units part of new UL/ULC requirements and to support the new Manual Evacuation feature, 5-zone and 10-zone control unit overlays have been changed to provide an ON button as shown below. Signal SIL & Alarm ON button operates as follows: Signal Silence: Pressing the button for less than three seconds turns all active audible notification appliances until you press it again or until another event turns them back on. Alarm ON: Pressing the button for more than three seconds places the control unit in the alarm condition activates the common alarm relay and turns on the Alarm LED), turns on all fire alarm and city signals not coded fire alarm signals), and signals the central station if a dialer/modem is installed. control unit continues to respond to initiating device circuits that are activated while in the manual evacuation The Alarm ON event is restored by pressing the panel reset. If the Alarm ON is initiated while a panel reset in progress, the event will be restored at the end of the reset. 3102540-EN REV 001

(1) 1: Screw and spacer locations Series Replacement Supply Board Sheet Barrel spacers (3X) Do not remove #6-32 5/16 screws (5X) #6-32 1-1/2 screws (3X) remove the system board: Power-down the equipment. Disconnect the field wiring. Tag each wire so you can identify to connect them on the replacement system board. Remove the five #6-32 5/16 screws (Figure 1, item 1) and the #6-32 1-1/2 screws (Figure 1, item 2). the screws and the barrel spacers aside for use later. Lift the system board out of the cabinet backbox. See Figure 2. Series replacement power supply boards are direct for the system boards inside APS Series and BPS power supplies. installation instructions are for the RBPS Series replacement supply boards listed below. board, APS/BPS, 6 A, 120 V board, APS/BPS, 6 A, 220/240 V board, APS/BPS, 10 A, 120 V board, APS/BPS, 10 A, 220/240 V the system board Electrocution hazard. To avoid personal injury or death electrocution, remove all sources of power and allow stored inside the cabinet to discharge before installing or removing the Equipment damage hazard. This product is sensitive to discharge (ESD). To avoid damage, follow accepted ESD procedures. system board is attached to the cabinet backbox using five 5/16 screws (1), three #6-32 1-1/2 screws (2), and three spacers (3). See Figure 1. Do not remove the two screws holding the heat sink to the board. See Figure 1, item 4. 2020 Carrier / 2 3102541-EN REV 002 REB 10DEC20 placing the unit into service placing the unit into service: Set the switches and jumpers on the new system board to match old system board. Attach the field wires. Test the unit completely, including full operation on battery power. and wiring BPS Series power supplies, see Remote Booster Power Supply Reference Manual (P/N 3100485-EN). APS Series power supplies, see Auxiliary Power Supply Technical Manual (P/N 3100970). BPS Series power supplies, see Remote Booster Power Supply Reference Manual (P/N 3100485-EN). APS Series power supplies, see Auxiliary Power Supply Technical Manual (P/N 3100970). information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. the system board and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. replacing the system board, you can use the #6-32 1-1/2 and barrel spacers provided in the hardware kit or use the and spacers from the old system board. Do not handle the system board in a manner that could damage components. For example, do not carry the system board by only one side of the heat sink or do not flex the system by placing your thumbs on the corner of the heat sink and fingers on the edge of the system board, and then squeezing. Do not use power tools to secure the system board to the cabinet replace the system board: Carefully lift the system board out of the carton and lay it on a flat Do not bend or otherwise stress the system board as you it. Place three barrel spacers between the heat sink and the system (see Figure 1, item 3), and then insert a #6-32 1-1/2 screw each barrel spacer. Make sure the screw goes all the way the system board. Without flexing the system board, carefully align it with the on the cabinet backbox. See Figure 2. sure the #6-32 1-1/2 screws and barrel spacers do not fall of place. Start, but do not completely tighten the three #6-32 1-1/2 screws 1, item 2). 1, item 1). Start, but do not completely tighten the five #6-32 5/16 screws Visually inspect the barrel spacers (Figure 1, item 3) to ensure that are properly in place. Units will not operate properly without barrel spacers. Hand tighten all eight screws. 2: Removing the system board #6-32 5/16 screws (5X) / 2 3102541-

EG1 Series Signaling Installation Sheet EG1 Series signaling appliances feature: Field-configurable horn and strobe outputs. See Figure 2. Enhanced synchronization circuitry to comply with the latest of UL 1638 and CAN/ULC-S526. wiring test points on the front of the appliance when the is removed. Synchronized operation requires a separately installed device. See the control unit or remote booster/auxiliary supply compatibility list for compatible synchronization devices. Equipment damage hazard. Using excessive force when the appliance cover may damage the cover and prevent it latching in place. configure the signaling appliance: Remove the appliance cover. See Figure 1. a small, flat-bladed screwdriver into the slot at the bottom of appliance. pull up on the screwdriver to pry the bottom of the cover down and away from the appliance. the bottom of the cover out and over the top of the appliance. Set the light and sound output switches. See Figure 2. EG1 Series horns, strobes, and horn-strobes are compact, fire alarm signaling appliances designed for indoor dry See Table 1 through Table 3 for a list of models. Replace the appliance cover. 1: Removing and replacing the cover 1: Horn models 2: Strobe models wall horn, red, FIRE wall horn, red, no marking wall horn, white, FIRE wall horn, white, no marking wall strobe, red, FIRE wall strobe, red, no marking wall strobe, white, FIRE wall strobe, white, no marking 3: Horn-strobe models wall horn-strobe, red, FIRE wall horn-strobe, red, no marking wall horn-strobe, white, FIRE wall horn-strobe, white, no marking 2018 United Technologies Corporation / 4 3102550-EN REV 002 ISS 03APR18 2: Light and sound output settings (2) (3) (4) 4: Mounting on a 1-gang electrical box Constant, low dB Constant, high dB T3 temporal, low dB T3 temporal, high dB 75 candela 30 candela 15 candela Electrical box EG1 Series signaling appliance Captive screw (2X) Appliance cover Using a trim ring is optional except when installing the signaling on electrical boxes greater than three inches wide. For instructions when using a trim ring, see Genesis EG1 Trim Ring Installation Sheet (P/N 3102552-EN). and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. Electrical supervision requires that you break the wire run at terminal. Do not loop the signaling circuit field wires around the Do not use Genesis EG1 Series strobe and horn-strobe appliances in applications where signal power is cycled on off, such as coded or private mode signaling systems. install the appliance: Remove the appliance cover. and testing Equipment damage hazard. To maintain the required agency do not change factory-applied finishes. unit is not serviceable or repairable. Should the unit fail to contact the supplier for replacement. a visual and operational inspection in accordance with codes and standards or as directed by the local authority jurisdiction. wiring test points are available on the front of the appliance when cover is removed. The test points let you easily spot-check the field wiring without the need to remove the appliance from the wall. Figure 5. Connect the field wiring. Observe signal polarity for the appliance operate properly. See Figure 3. 5: Test points Attach the appliance and, if used, the trim ring backplate to the box. Do not overtighten the screws. See Figure 4. Replace the cover by hooking it to the top of the appliance, and snapping the bottom into place. See Figure 1. Test the unit for proper

EGC Series Signaling Installation Sheet Equipment damage hazard. Using excessive force when the appliance cover may damage the cover and prevent it latching in place. configure the signaling appliance: Remove the appliance cover. See Figure 1. a small, flat-bladed screwdriver into the slot at the bottom of appliance. pull up on the screwdriver to pry the bottom of the cover down and away from the appliance. the bottom of the cover out and over the top of the appliance. Set the light and sound output switches. See Figure 2. Replace the appliance cover. 1: Removing and replacing the cover EGC Series horns, strobes, and horn-strobes are ceiling- or plug-in fire alarm signaling appliances designed for dry applications. See Table 1 for a list of models. horn, red, FIRE horn, white, FIRE strobe, red, FIRE strobe, red, no marking strobe, white, FIRE strobe, white, no marking horn-strobe, red, FIRE horn-strobe, red, no marking horn-strobe, white, FIRE horn-strobe, white, no marking 1: Models EGC Series signaling appliances feature: Field-configurable horn and strobe outputs. See Figure 2. Enhanced synchronization circuitry to comply with the latest of UL 1638 and CAN/ULC-S526. wiring test points on the front of the appliance when the is removed. Synchronized operation requires a separately installed device. See the control unit or remote booster/auxiliary supply compatibility list for compatible synchronization devices. 2019 United Technologies Corporation / 4 3102551-EN REV 002 ISS 24JUN19 2: Light and sound output settings 3: Mounting diagram 115 candela 75 candela 30 candela 15 candela Constant, low dB Constant, high dB T3 temporal, low dB T3 temporal, high dB Temporal 3 coding is the required output for fire notification per NFPA 72. Any device coding other than Temporal 3 is at discretion and approval of the local authority having jurisdiction and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. Electrical supervision requires that you break the wire run at terminal. Do not loop the signaling circuit field wires around the install the appliance: Attach the wiring plate and, if used, the trim plate to the electrical See Figure 3. The trim plate is ordered separately. Connect the field wiring. Observe signal polarity for the appliance operate properly. See Figure 4. Remove the shorting clip (Figure 4, item 3). Retain for future use. Plug the appliance into the wiring plate by setting the appliance on top of the wiring plate, and then snapping the bottom into See Figure 5. unplug the appliance, press the spring clip on the bottom, and lift the appliance away from the wiring plate. Test the unit for proper operation. Electrical box Trim plate (optional) Wiring plate Machine screw (2X, supplied with wiring plate) EGC Series signaling appliance 4: Wiring Horn/strobe circuit in (signal polarity shown in the active condition) Horn/strobe circuit out Shorting clip / 4 3102551-EN REV 002 ISS 24JUN19 5: Removing and replacing the appliance and testing Equipment damage hazard. To maintain the required agency do not change factory-applied finishes. unit is not serviceable or repairable. If the unit fails to operate, the supplier for a replacement. a visual and operational inspection in accordance with codes and standards or as directe

EGC Series Trim Installation Sheet ( D) 0.3 in. (26.92 0.76 cm) Figure 2 electrical 2-gang, 4-inch octagon, square to 122 (0 to 50 to 93% noncondensing environment humidity 2: Dimensions EGC Series trim plates add a finished look to your Genesis Series signaling appliances by hiding unsightly blemishes and around the electrical box. See Table 1 for a list of models. plate, EGC Series, red plate, EGC Series, white the trim plate as shown in Figure 1. Use the pass through holes the trim plate that match the electrical box. 1: Mounting diagram information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. 1: Models Electrical box Trim plate Mounting plate Machine screws (2X, supplied with mounting plate) 2019 United Technologies Corporation / 1 3102553-EN REV 001 ISS 07MAR19

LED EG4 Series Wall Appliance Installation LED EG4 Series notification appliances feature: Field-configurable horn and strobe outputs. See Figure 2. Enhanced synchronization circuitry to comply with the latest of UL 1638 and CAN/ULC-S526. wiring test points on the front of the appliance when the is removed. Synchronized operation requires a separately installed device. See the control unit or power supply list for compatible synchronization devices. Equipment damage hazard. Using excessive force when the appliance cover may damage the cover and prevent it latching in place. configure the notification appliance: Remove the appliance cover. See Figure 1. a small, flat-bladed screwdriver into the slot at the bottom of appliance. pull up on the screwdriver to pry the bottom of the cover down and away from the appliance. the bottom of the cover out and over the top of the appliance. LED EG4A horns, EG4V strobes, and EG4VA horn-strobes wall-mounted plug-in fire alarm notification appliances designed for dry applications. See Table 1 to Table 3 for a list of models. On horns and horn-strobes, set the sound output switch for the value. See Figure 2. On strobes and horn-strobes, set the light output for the required See Figure 2. Replace the appliance cover. 1: Removing and replacing the cover 1: EG4A horn models number horn, red, FIRE horn, red, no marking horn, white, FIRE horn, white, no marking 2: EG4V strobe models number strobe, red, FIRE strobe, red, no marking strobe, white, FIRE strobe, white, no marking 3: EG4AV horn-strobe models number horn-strobe, red, FIRE horn-strobe, red, no marking horn-strobe, white, FIRE horn-strobe, white, no marking 2020 Carrier / 4 3102554-EN REV 002 ISS 31AUG20 2: Light and sound output settings 3: Typical electrical box mounting Electrical box Trim plate (optional) Wiring plate (required) Machine screw (2X, supplied with wiring plate) Notification appliance Shorting clip 4: Typical surface box mounting Surface box Wiring plate (required) Plastite screw (2X, supplied with surface mount box) Notification appliance Shorting clip 110 candela 75 candela 30 candela 15 candela Constant, low dB Constant, high dB T3 temporal, low dB T3 temporal, high dB Temporal 3 coding is the required output for fire notification per NFPA 72. Any device coding other than Temporal 3 is at discretion and approval of the local authority having jurisdiction and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. Electrical supervision requires that you break the wire run at terminal. Do not loop the notification circuit field wires around the install the appliance: Using the screws supplied with the wiring plate, attach the wiring and, if used, the trim plate to the electrical box. See Figure 3 Figure 4. Do not overtighten the screws. trim plate is ordered separately. Connect the field wiring. Observe signal polarity for the appliance operate properly. See Figure 4. Remove the shorting clip (Figure 3, item 6). Retain for future use. Plug the appliance into the wiring plate by setting the appliance on top of the wiring plate, and then snapping the bottom into See Figure 5. unplug the appliance, press the spring clip on the bottom, and lift the appliance away from the wiring plate. Test the unit for proper op

2: Mounting on a 2-gang electrical box EG4 Series Trim Plate Sheet Electrical box Trim plate Wiring plate (supplied with signaling appliance) Machine screw (2X, supplied with wiring plate) 3: Mounting on a 4-inch octagon electrical box EG4 Series trim plates add a finished look to your Genesis Series signaling appliances by hiding unsightly blemishes and around the electrical box. See Table 1 for a list of models. 1: Models plate, EG4 Series, red plate, EG4 Series, white the trim plate as shown in Figure 1 to Figure 4. Use the pass holes on the trim plate that match the electrical box. 1: Mounting on a 1-gang electrical box Electrical box Trim plate Wiring plate (supplied with signaling appliance) Machine screw (2X, supplied with wiring plate) Electrical box Trim plate Wiring plate (supplied with signaling appliance) Machine screw (2X, supplied with wiring plate) 2019 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102555-EN REV 001 ISS 26JUL19 4: Mounting on a 4-inch square electrical box Electrical box Trim plate Wiring plate (supplied with signaling appliance) Machine screw (2X, supplied with wiring plate) electrical 2-gang, 4-inch octagon, square 7.5 0.3 in. 19.05 076 cm) Figure 5 to 122 (0 to 50 to 93% noncondensing (W H D) environment humidity 5: Dimensions information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. / 2 3102555-EN REV 001 ISS 26JUL19

1: KI-HDT Battery Cover Kidde Handheld Tool Installation 2: KI-HDT Terminal Connectors & Ports 10-position terminal block 4-position terminal block (Not used at this time) USB Flash drive connector Micro USB connector Power Button connect the KI-HDT to your SLC loop, use the 10-position terminal block. Wire the SLC positive to positions B+ and negative to B- of the terminal block (see Figure 3). pin 10 of terminal block 1 to chassis ground to enable fault detection. (Refer to label on product for terminal KI-HDT Kidde Handheld Diagnostic Tool is a standalone battery diagnostic tool intended to help the user initialize and a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). The KI-HDT ships with the accessories: USB flash drive (Includes PC software and user guide P/N USB charging cable (USB 2.0 A-male to Micro-B cable) AC USB charging adapter KI-HDT Installation sheet (P/N 3102575-EN) terminal connector block terminal connector block battery Charging and Installation KI-HDT is powered by a Lithium-ion battery. The USB cable is to charge the KI-HDT. Connect the USB cable to the KI-HDT and AC USB adapter or a USB port to charge the device. install and charge the battery Remove the battery cover by removing the 2 battery cover screws. Figure 1. the battery into the battery holder. Connect the battery to the keyed wire connector. Fasten the battery cover previously removed. Connect the USB charging cable and charge the battery for a of 2 hours. 2018 United Technologies Corporation / 2 3102575-EN REV 001 ISS 02MAR18 Cover Connection Battery (4) (5) C B A B T information compliance device complies with part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two (1) This device may not cause harmful and (2) this device must accept any received, including interference that cause undesired operation. 3K5 (Indoor use only) directive: This product contains a battery cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal The battery is marked with this symbol, may include lettering to indicate cadmium lead (Pb), or mercury (Hg). For proper return the battery to your supplier or to designated collection point. For more see: www.recyclethis.info. information contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com 3: Wiring diagram to the KI-HDT User Guide (P/N 3102576-EN) for instructions on the tool to initialize a loop, troubleshoot, and using the PC A copy of the guide can be found on the USB flash device or at www.my-eddie.com. 4: KI-HDT Activities LED Communication LED (Flashing green LED) Charging LED (Solid red LED) see www.my-eddie.com for any firmware updates. VDC Lithium-Ion x 37mm x 10.5mm with HDT-BATT size to 26 AWG (1.31 to 0.13 mm (W H D) 3.25 1.75 in. 82.5 44.5 mm) environment humidity to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% noncondensing / 2 3102575-EN REV 001 ISS 02MAR18 Shield, if used, must be continuous and free from earth ground. Data circuits are Style 4 (Class B)

Intelligent Handheld Tool 3102576-EN REV 001 ISS 07MAR18 2018 United Technologies Corporation rights reserved. document may not be copied in whole or in part or otherwise reproduced prior written consent from United Technologies Corporation, except specifically permitted under US and international copyright law. and patents The KI-HDT and logo are trademarks of United Technologies Corporation is a trademark of United Technologies Corporation is a registered trademark of Microsoft, Inc. trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products. This document applies to KI-HDT version 1.0. compliance This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful and (2) this device must accept any interference received, interference that may cause undesired operation. compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user be required to correct the interference at his own expense. class 3K5 (Indoor use only) Battery directive: This product contains a battery that cannot be disposed of unsorted municipal waste. The battery is marked with this symbol, which include lettering to indicate cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), or mercury (Hg). proper recycling, return the battery to your supplier or to a designated point. For more information see: www.recyclethis.info. information For contact information, see www.kiddelifesafety.com. 1 2 3 4 5 the KI-HDT 1 of the KI-HDT 2 Review of Mapping 5 is mapping? 6 map a system? 6 mapping process (N/A for KIR and FX Series) 6 mapping process (N/A for KIR and FX Series) 8 of map faults on a loop 9 the KI-HDT 11 Menu 12 Loop Function 13 Loop Function 15 Level Function 16 Analysis Function (V, KI, and GSA- Series) 17 Menu 20 25 History 25 Device History 26 Data to USB Flash Drive 27 the KI-HDT PC Software 31 the KI-HDT PC Software 32 the KI-HDT Device 33 (Buttons) 35 Data from the KI-HDT 40 Imported Data to PC 43 45 Bootloader non-respensive 46 current difference value (N/A for KIR and FX Series) 47 IN/OUT wiring (N/A for KIR and FX Series) 49 (N/A for KIR and FX Series) 50 End of Line Device (N/A for KIR and FX Series) 52 Fault Detection 54 6 A Functions 55 Device EEPROM 56 EE Data 58 Value 59 Codes 61 trouble codes 62 trouble codes 63 Trouble Code 64 B Series Module Troubleshooting Matrix 65 Matrix 66 3102576-EN REV 001 ISS 07MAR18 information of liability the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event will United Technologies Corporation be liable for lost profits or business opportunities, loss of use, business interruption, loss of data, or any other indirect, incidental, or consequential damages under any theory of liability, whether based in contract, tort, product liability, or otherwise. Because some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of for consequential or incidental damages the preceding limitation may not apply to you. In any event the liability of United Technologies Corporation shall not exceed the purchase price of the product. The foregoing will apply to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law,

Interface Card Sheet SA-USB Interface Card provides a USB connection to a supported or a connection to a PC. The card can be used for connecting a to the control panel to print system events. The card can also used for PC communications, including the configuration utility (CU) Firmware update utility (FUU). default printer baud rate is 9600. connectors and LEDs to Figure 1 and Table 1 for a description of the SA-USB 1: SA-USB LEDs and connectors 1: SA-USB connectors and LEDs Label Description 2.0, Type B device port: Used as a temporary to a PC. jumper: Shown in the not installed When installed over both pins, the jumper is during programming the SA-USB to update This can only be accomplished with from Technical Support. 2.0, Type A host port: Used to connect supported to connect the SA-USB to the panel electronics LED: Used to indicate all communications to the for both the printer and all PC applications. LED: Used to indicate all communications from panel for both the printer and all PC applications. LED: Used to indicate when it detects any trouble, such as off-line, out of paper, or the disconnected. The panel will only display a printer trouble if the is set to supervised. operation 2: LED operation Operation steady. Flashes when the SA-USB is receiving data from printer or PC applications. steady. Flashes when the SA-USB is transmitting data to printer or PC applications. steady when a trouble exists between the SA-USB and the printer. and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. Equipment damage hazard. This product is sensitive to discharge (ESD). To avoid damage, follow accepted ESD procedures. The SA-USB is installed in the same location as the SA-232, the SA-232 card must be removed prior to installing the card. install the SA-USB: Power down the panel and disconnect the batteries. installed, remove the SA-232 card from the panel. Refer to SA- RS-232 Interface Card Installation Sheet, P/N 3101095 for Locate the SA-USB card location on the plastic assembly behind main circuit board and connector J3 on the main circuit board the top-left of the main board). Attach the SA-USB to the plastic assembly using two #6 plastite as shown in Figure 2. Connect one end of the ribbon cable (P/N 7140187) to connector on the SA-USB card and the other end to connector J3 on the circuit board as shown in Figure 2. Connect the applicable USB cable to the SA-USB. See 2021 Carrier / 3 3102654-EN REV 001 ISS 12JAN21 Power up the panel, and then connect the batteries. 2: SA-USB installation (typical, LCD removed for clarity) installed on both pins, remove jumper JP1 (item 2, Figure 1) from pin on the SA-USB card as shown in Figure 1. the included ferrite clamp (item 3, Figure 2) onto the USB by opening and then snapping it in place over the USB cable shown in Figure 2. wiring wire to a computer: Locate a powered USB 2.0 port on the computer. Connect a USB 2.0 A to B cable, purchased separately, to the USB port. J4 (Figure 1). Connect the other end of the USB 2.0 cable to the SA-USB card, installation required driver for the SA-USB will install automatically on most systems when you connect it to a computer. If the driver not install automatically, perform the following. Make sure that the SA-USB is connected to the computer. and VS systems: Download the SA-USB driver from the My- website (http://my-eddie.com/) to your computer. FX systems: Download the SA-USB driver from the FX series (http://kiddefx.kidde.com/) to you

Field Server Bridge Sheet SA-FSB field server bridge (FSB) provides a communication between iO, VS and FX life safety systems and building systems (BMS) by converting the control panel External Protocol into supported serial and Ethernet protocols. list of the supported protocols can be found in on 4. The SA-FSB is intended for ancillary use only. Use in non-ancillary is not permitted unless approved by the local authority jurisdiction. The SA-FSB cannot be used for smoke control applications. section describes possible SA-FSB communication applications a control panel and a BMS. SA-FSB programming, and wiring is the same for each application. iO, VS and FX control panels can support one SA-FSB per control Each SA-FSB is programmed with the point events it is for sending to the BMS. of points SA-FSB supports up to 3,600 programmed point events. The number of programmed point events consists of the point events into the SA-FSB and the point events going out to the BMS. For a SA-FSB, you could program 1,800-point events to into the SA-FSB and up to 1,800-point events to go out to your calculating the number of points in your application, consider the total supported programmed point events are made up of devices (smoke detector, module, etc.) and event types (alarm, supervisory, etc.), and that one device point reporting into the from a panel may have many event type points going out to BMS. tasks following tasks are required to prepare the SA-FSB for between your control panel and a BMS. 2021 Carrier / 5 Program the SA-FSB (see below). the SA-FSB (see on page 3). Connect the field wiring (see on page 3). started getting started, make sure the following tools are available: A computer with a network interface card. A RJ-45 Ethernet patch cable, Cat 5e or better. A list of the life safety system device addresses and possible states. Refer to the the device address list from iO, VS, or FX Configuration Utility (CU) below. A connection to the BMS. The SA-FSB configuration file (config.csv) for the protocol being by your BMS. The default configuration file, Modbus TCP, is in the SA-FSB. Other protocols can be configured and using Steps 6 and 7. will also need the following documents that can be downloaded the MSA website. Enter https://us.msasafety.com/smc in your and then click the appropriate product under Featured (e.g. ProtoNode). When the product page opens, click the tab at the bottom of the page to locate the document. Start-Up Guide – ProtoNode Field Server Manual – FieldServer Toolbox and Graphic User FieldServer Manual – FieldServer Configuration Guide Protocol Driver sheet BACnet Protocol Driver sheet M-BUS Protocol Driver sheet DNP_3.0_Serial Field Server FS-8705-47 iO, VS, and FX Fire Alarm Panel Manual also required and can be downloaded on the following Websites. and VS panels: My-Eddie website (http://my-eddie.com/) panels: FX series website (http://kiddefx.kidde.com/) the device address list from the iO, VS, or FX Utility (CU) program device addresses in the SA-FSB configuration file, you a list of the life safety system device addresses and possible states (e.g., alarm, trouble, etc.). If you do not have the list, you export it from the iO, VS, or FX Configuration Utility (CU). export the device address list: Create a project or open an existing iO, VS, or FX CU project. Right-click the Panel menu, and then click Export All System (FSB). Select the appropriate File Path, and then click Export to export the file data to the computer. By default the file is: Name>Panel Name>All_System_Events.csv. field baud rate is fixed at 9600. Node ID and protocol can be set in configuration file (refer to Step 6). 1: Download and install the FieldServer Toolbox Enter https://us.msasafety.com/smc in your browser, and then click under Feature

Configuration Equipment damage hazard. Using excessive force when the appliance cover may damage the cover and prevent it latching in place. configure the notification appliance: Remove the appliance cover. See Figure 1. a small, flat-bladed screwdriver into the slot at the bottom of appliance. pull up on the screwdriver to pry the bottom of the cover down and away from the appliance. the bottom of the cover out and over the top of the appliance. On speakers and speaker-strobes, set the speaker wattage and switches for the required values. See Figure 2. On speaker-strobes, set the strobe candela switch for the required See Figure 3. Replace the appliance cover. 1: Removing and replacing the cover 2: Speaker switch settings LED EG4S Series Speaker-Strobe Sheet LED EG4S speakers and EG4SV speaker-strobes are wall- plug-in fire alarm notification appliances designed for indoor applications with 25 or 70 VRMS distributed speaker systems. See tables below for a list of models. 1: EG4S speaker models number wall, red, FIRE wall, red, no marking wall, white, ALERT wall, white, FIRE wall, white, no marking wall, red, FIRE wall, red, no marking wall, white, ALERT wall, white, FIRE wall, white, no marking 2: EG4SV speaker-strobe models number LED EG4S Series speakers and speaker-strobes feature: Field-configurable speaker and strobe outputs. See Figure 2 and 3. Enhanced synchronization circuitry to comply with the latest of UL 1638 and CAN/ULC-S526. wiring test points on the front of the appliance when the is removed. Speakers that are approved for low frequency sounder when used with compatible tone file and systems. Synchronized operation requires a separately installed device. See the control unit or power supply list for compatible synchronization devices. 2020 Carrier / 4 3102667-EN REV 002 ISS 31AUG20 3: Strobe switch settings 4: Typical electrical box mounting and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. Electrical supervision requires that you break the wire run at terminal. Do not loop the notification circuit field wires around the install the appliance: Using the screws supplied with the wiring plate, attach the wiring and, if used, the trim plate to the electrical box. See Figure 4. not overtighten the screws. trim plate is ordered separately. Connect the field wiring. Observe signal polarity for the appliance operate properly. See Figure 5. Remove the shorting clip (Figure 5, item 5). Retain for future use. Plug the appliance into the wiring plate by setting the appliance on top of the wiring plate, and then snapping the bottom into See Figure 6. unplug the appliance, press the spring clip on the bottom, and lift the appliance away from the mounting plate. Test the unit for proper operation. Electrical box Trim plate (optional) Wiring plate (required) Machine screw (2X, supplied with wiring plate) Notification appliance Shorting clip 5: Typical surface box mounting Surface box Wiring plate (required) Machine screw (2X, supplied with wiring plate) Notification appliance Shorting clip / 4 3102667-EN REV 002 ISS 31AUG20 8: Strobe circuit test points Marking indicates signal polarity when the circuit is active

Intelligent Rotary Photoelectric Smoke Installation Sheet KIR-OSD is an intelligent device that uses an advanced optical chamber to detect smoke. The detector analyzes data from sensing chamber to recognize smoke from a fire while ignoring non-fire sources and whether to initiate an alarm to the Fire Control Panel. indicator. The LED indicator (see Figure 1 below) displays the states: Normal: Green LED indicator flashes, no action. Alarm/active: Red LED indicator flashes, evacuate the area. 1: KIR-OSD features Self-locking tab LED indicator This detector does not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards the local fire protection specialist. This detector does not sense fires in areas where smoke cannot the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the side of closed doors may not reach the detector. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room before applying power. The dust cover (supplied) must remain on the detector during and be removed prior to commissioning and service. dust cover is not a substitute for removing the detector during construction or heavy remodeling. Do not install detectors until after final construction cleanup (unless specified by the AHJ). Do not use smoke detectors with detector guards unless the has been evaluated and found suitable. Canada, install according to CAN/ULC-S524 Standard for the of Fire Alarm Systems, CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical and the local authority having jurisdiction. Upon completion of the original installation and following any or additions to the system, perform a calibrated test per NFPA code. The Kidde Intelligent Series can perform this test and the panel can generate a system report. install the detector: and wire the base, as described on the installation sheet with the base. Set the detector address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. Use a screwdriver to adjust two rotary switches on the back of the detector. Figure 2.) Set the left rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the right rotary switch for the 0 through 9 digit. Attach the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise it snaps into the locked position. Attach the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise it snaps into the locked position. 2: Setting detector address (address 52 shown) 6 7 8 5 Insert a screwdriver here to set the address testing, notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is maintenance and will be temporarily out of service. 2020 Carrier / 2 3102676-EN REV 001 ISS 02DEC20 Run a system detector sensitivity report on all detectors and verify the readings fall within acceptable limits. Canada Information American smoke range compliance UL 268-7, UL 268A to 4.36 %/ft. (1.63 to 13.62 %/m) obscuration device complies with part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two (1) This device may not cause harmful and (2) this device must accept any received, including interference that cause undesired operation. Class A digital apparatus complies with ICES-003. information contact information, see www.kidde-esfire.com. perform an initial installation test: Remove the detector from its base and verify that the proper address, trouble signals, and messages are reported. For KIR-OSD detectors placed in the air ducts, ve

Intelligent Rotary Optical Smoke and Heat Installation Sheet KIR-OSHD is an intelligent device that contains an optical smoke and a rate-of-rise heat sensor with a fixed temperature setting. detector analyzes data from both the heat sensor and optical chamber to recognize smoke from a fire while ignoring non-fire sources and whether to initiate an alarm to the Fire Control Panel. This device can be operated as a single detector smoke or heat to initiate an alarm or as a split sensor with heat smoke initiating separate signals. indicator. The LED indicator (see Figure 1 below) displays the states: Normal: Green LED indicator flashes, no action. Alarm/active: Red LED indicator flashes, evacuate the area. 1: KIR-OSHD features Self-locking tab LED indicator and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. studies indicate that heat detectors should only be when property protection alone is involved. The heat sensor this device provides a source of supplemental information. The sensor by itself does not provide life safety protection. Never on heat detectors as the sole means of fire protection. This detector does not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruption, discuss further safeguards the local fire protection specialist. This detector does not sense fires in areas where smoke or heat reach the detector. Smoke or heat from fires in walls, roofs, on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room before applying power. The dust cover (supplied) must remain on the detector during and be removed prior to commissioning and service. dust cover is not a substitute for removing the detector during construction or heavy remodeling. Do not install detectors until after final construction cleanup (unless specified by the AHJ). Do not use smoke detectors with detector guards unless the has been evaluated and found suitable. Canada, install according to the CAN/ULC-S524 Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems, the CSA C22.1 Canadian Code, and the local authority having jurisdiction. Upon completion of the original installation and following any or additions to the system, perform a calibrated test per NFPA code. The Kidde Intelligent Series can perform this test and the panel can generate a system report. install the detector and wire the base, as described on the installation sheet with the base. Set the detector address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. Use a screwdriver to adjust two rotary switches on the back of the detector. Figure 1.) Set the left rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the right rotary switch for the 0 through 9 digit. Attach the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise it snaps into the locked position. 2020 Carrier / 2 3102677-EN REV 001 ISS 02DEC20 1: Setting detector address (address 52 shown) 6 7 8 5 Insert a screwdriver here to set the address testing, notify the proper authorities that the fire alarm system is maintenance and will be temporarily out of service. each sensor in the detector. Heat damage. Excessive heat may damage the detector cover. Do not apply excessive heat when using a hair dryer. using a Testifire detector tester, you must install a SIGA Testifire Assembly. sure the SIGA Testifire Adapter Assembly (model is installed in the Testifire detector tester bef

1: KIR-OSHCD features Intelligent Rotary Optical Smoke Heat and Detector Installation Sheet KIR-OSHCD is an intelligent device that contains an advanced smoke sensor, a rate of rise heat sensor with a fixed setting for detecting fire conditions, and a life safety monoxide sensor to detect carbon monoxide gas from sources combustion. The detector analyzes data from both the heat sensor the optical sensing chamber to recognize smoke from a fire while nuisance non-fire sources and whether to initiate an alarm to Fire Alarm Control Panel. The detector analyzes the smoke and sensors independently from the CO sensor to determine whether initiate a fire alarm, a life safety CO alarm, or both. indicator. The LED indicator (see Figure 1) displays the following Normal: Green LED indicator flashes, no action. Alarm/active: Red LED indicator flashes, evacuate the area. end-of-life indicator. The detector signals a ACT condition on the control panel when the CO sensor its end of life. Pressing the Details button on the control panel OF LIFE ACT providing verification that it is an end-of- trouble of the CO sensor. This trouble remains active until the is replaced, even if the panel is reset. Self-locking tab LED indicator This detector does not sense fires in areas where smoke or heat reach the detector. Smoke or heat from fires in walls, roofs, on the opposite side of closed doors may not reach the detector. The heat sensor in this device provides a source of supplemental The heat sensor by itself does not provide life safety To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room before applying power. The dust cover (supplied) must remain on the detector during and be removed prior to commissioning and service. dust cover is not a substitute for removing the detector during construction or heavy remodeling. Do not install detectors until after final construction cleanup (unless specified by the AHJ). Do not use smoke detectors with detector guards unless the has been evaluated and found suitable. per NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, 720 Standard for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) and Warning Equipment, and UL 2075 Standard for Gas Vapor Detectors and Sensors. Upon completion of the original installation and following any or additions to the system, perform a calibrated test per NFPA code. The Kidde Intelligent Series can perform this test and generate a system sensitivity install the detector: and wire the base as described on the installation sheet with the base. Set the detector address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. Use a screwdriver to adjust two rotary switches on the back of the detector. Figure 1.) Set the left rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the right rotary switch for the 0 through 9 digit. Attach the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise it snaps into the locked position. 2020 Carrier / 4 3102678-EN REV 001 ISS 02DEC20 required by the AHJ or local codes, affix the supplied CO Label (P/N 3303928) in proximity to the detector. 1: Setting detector address (address 52 shown) 6 7 8 5 Insert a screwdriver here to set the address monoxide alarm procedure The carbon monoxide (CO) alarm indicates the presence CO, which can kill you. If the alarm signal sounds four times, pauses five seconds, and then repeats the pattern, follow the steps shown Move to fresh air immediately outdoors

1: KIR-OSCD features Intelligent Rotary Photoelectric Smoke with CO Sensor Sheet KIR-OSCD is an intelligent device that uses an advanced optical chamber to detect smoke. The detector analyzes data from sensing chamber to recognize smoke from a fire while ignoring non-fire sources and whether to initiate an alarm to the Fire Control Panel. A separate CO sensor is used to detect carbon from sources of combustion. The detector analyzes the and CO sensors independently to determine whether to initiate fire alarm, a life safety CO alarm, or both. indicator. The LED indicator (see Figure 1) displays the following Normal: Green LED indicator flashes, no action. Alarm/active: Red LED indicator flashes, evacuate the area. end-of-life indicator. The detector signals a ACT condition on the control panel when the CO sensor its end of life. Pressing the Details button on the control panel OF LIFE ACT providing verification that it is an end-of- trouble of the CO sensor. This trouble remains active until the is replaced, even if the panel is reset. Self-locking tab LED indicator This detector does not sense fires in areas where smoke cannot the detector. Smoke from fires in walls, roofs, or on the side of closed doors may not reach the detector. This detector does not detect oxygen levels or flames. Use this as part of a broad-based life safety program which includes variety of information sources pertaining to heat and smoke extinguishment systems, visual and audible devices, and safety measures. To ensure proper operation, store the detector within the ranges. Allow the detector to stabilize to room before applying power. The dust cover (supplied) must remain on the detector during and be removed prior to commissioning and service. dust cover is not a substitute for removing the detector during construction or heavy remodeling. Do not install detectors until after final construction cleanup (unless specified by the AHJ). Do not use smoke detectors with detector guards unless the has been evaluated and found suitable. per NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, 720 Standard for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) and Warning Equipment, and UL 2075 Standard for Gas Vapor Detectors and Sensors. Upon completion of the original installation and following any or additions to the system, perform a calibrated test per NFPA code. The Kidde Intelligent Series can this test and generate a system sensitivity report. install the detector: and wire the base, as described on the installation sheet with the base. Set the detector address. Refer to the panel technical reference for a list of valid addresses. Use a screwdriver to adjust two rotary switches on the back of the detector. Figure 1:) Set the left rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s 100s digit and the right rotary switch for the 0 through 9 digit. Attach the detector to the base by rotating the detector clockwise it snaps into the locked position. 2020 Carrier / 4 3102680-EN REV 001 ISS 02DEC20 required by the AHJ or local codes, affix the supplied CO Label (P/N 3303928) in proximity to the detector. 1: Setting detector address (address 52 shown) 6 7 8 5 Insert a screwdriver here to set the address monoxide alarm procedure The carbon monoxide (CO) alarm indicates the presence CO, which can kill you. If the alarm signal sounds four times, pauses five seconds, and then repeats the pattern, follow the steps shown Move to fresh air immediately outdoors or by an open door or Check that all p

Genesis LED Strobe Installation Sheet and wire this device in accordance with applicable national and codes, ordinances, and regulations. Electrical supervision requires that you break the wire run at terminal. Do not loop the notification circuit field wires around the new flush mount installations, install the electrical box so the is at least 83 inches above the finished floor. See Figure 1. install the G4SE strobe expander: Attach the G4SE strobe expander to a standard metal electrical Use the screws provided with the electrical box. Tighten until with the mounting surface. Run the field wires through the stobe expander opening, and then them to the terminal screws. See Figure 2 and Figure 3. Remove the shorting clip and then install the notification appliance. to the notification appliance installation sheet for 1: Typical flush mount installation Electrical box Strobe expander Sheet metal screws (2X, with electrical box) Notification appliance Shorting clip Genesis LED Strobe Expanders add a second synchronizable, strobe to Genesis LED G4 horn/strobes and Genesis G4S speaker/strobes. Together, they provide fire alarm signaling mass notification/emergency communication signaling in one assembly. Synchronized operation requires a separately installed device. See the control unit or power supply list for compatible synchronization devices. document provides installation instructions for the G4SE strobe models listed in Table 1 below. 1: Models expander, white, amber lens expander, white, red lens expander, white, green lens expander, white, blue lens expander, white, no marking, amber lens expander, white, no marking, red lens expander, white, no marking, green lens expander, white, no marking, blue lens expander, red, amber lens the G4SE as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3. To maintain circuit continuity, do not remove the shorting clip you are ready to install the notification appliance. in. cm) 2020 Carrier / 3 3102687-EN REV 001 ISS 27AUG20 2: G4SE strobe circuit wiring Notification appliance strobe circuit in (signal polarity shown in the Expander strobe circuit in (signal polarity shown in the active condition) Expander strobe circuit out Notification appliance strobe circuit out Shorting clip 3: G4SE speaker circuit wiring voltage current to 33 VDC to 33 VFWR output lens (-A models) Green lens (-G models) flash rate distribution lens (-B models) lens (-R models) Machine screws screws screws size torque Mounting screws to box center offset electrical boxes to 33 VDC, 16 to 33 VFWR mA mA cd cd cd cd fps (flash per second) approx. Figure 4 max. between any two devices. determine allowed wire resistance, to these specifications, and the for the synchronized source. to 18 AWG (0.75 to 2.50 mm2) lbf-in (0.6 N-m, typical lbf-in (1.8 N-m), typical lbf-in (1.4 N-m) max. Figure 5 in. (9.9 cm) American 4-inch square box, inches deep (no extension ring) to 122 (0 to 50 to 93% noncondensing to 158 (-40 to 70 environment humidity temperature This device was

Modules Quality Plan 3102772-EN REV 002 ISS 10JUN21 2021 Carrier. All rights reserved. access to, copying, use of, or disclosure of this artifact, or any its features, is strictly prohibited. Your access to or possession of a copy of artifact is pursuant to a limited license; ownership of the artifact and any media remain with Carrier. and patents EDWARDS is a trademark of Carrier. is a trademark of Carrier. trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products. information For contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 1 2 3 4 A B information ii 1 2 and approval 3 assurance 5 approach 6 development planning 6 requirements 7 7 to manufacturing 7 article testing 7 9 10 and process planning 10 material quality assurance 11 assurance 12 assurance 14 information collection and feedback 18 assembly 19 audit and customer quality support 21 22 monthly reliability audit 22 analysis / corrective and preventative actions 23 material support 23 process in the U.S. 25 process 26 Modules SKUs – FAI audit process requirements 28 production and test flowcharts 33 Manufacturing Process PCBA and Subassemblies 34 3102772-EN REV 002 ISS 10JUN21 information document is the quality plan created during the design, manufacture, reliability assurance, and quality support phases of the project to develop Signal Modules. quality plan conforms to and exceeds the requirements of the Carrier Excellence (Cx) standard as well as the of UL, ULC, and other regulatory agencies. This plan and subsequent updates to the plan a continuing resolve to make products as reliable and consistent as one would expect for life safety operation. In all cases, ensurances are put in place for the system to operate reliably without the life safety aspect of operation. The Quality Plan, in general, verifies that all stages of the NPD Product Development) process are completed according to the standards; this process is shown in the Quality Plan (Figure 1 below). 1: Standard Quality Plan flowchart 3102772-EN REV 002 ISS 10JUN21 of liability the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event will Carrier be liable for any lost profits or opportunities, loss of use, business interruption, loss of data, or any other indirect, special, incidental, or damages under any theory of liability, whether based in contract, tort, negligence, product liability, otherwise. Because some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or damages the preceding limitation may not apply to you. In any event the total liability of Carrier shall not the purchase price of the product. The foregoing limitation will apply to the maximum extent permitted by law, regardless of whether Carrier has been advised of the possibility of such damages and regardless whether any remedy fails of its essential purpose. with these manual, applicable codes, and the instructions of the authority having jurisdiction is every precaution has been taken during the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its Carrier assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. 3102772-EN REV 002 ISS 10JUN21 3102772-EN REV 002 ISS 10JUN21 1 2 and approval 3 3102772-EN REV 002 ISS 10JUN21 1: Introduction plan defines activities carried out to ensure the product line meets all required functional pe

LED Quality Plan 3102773-EN REV 002 ISS 23AUG21 2021 Carrier. All rights reserved. access to, copying, use of, or disclosure of this artifact, or any its features, is strictly prohibited. Your access to or possession of a copy of artifact is pursuant to a limited license; ownership of the artifact and any media remain with Carrier. and patents EDWARDS is a trademark of Carrier. is a trademark of Carrier. trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products. information For contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 1 2 3 4 A B information ii 1 2 and approval 3 assurance 5 approach 6 development planning 6 requirements 7 7 to manufacturing 7 article testing 8 trial testing 8 9 10 and process planning 10 material quality assurance 11 assurance 12 assurance 14 information collection and feedback 16 assembly 17 audit and customer quality support 19 20 monthly reliability audit 20 analysis / corrective and preventative actions 21 material support 21 process in the U.S. 23 process 24 LED SKUs – FAI audit process requirements 26 production and test flowcharts 33 Manufacturing Process PCBA and Subassemblies 34 3102773-EN REV 002 ISS 23AUG21 information document is the quality plan created during the design, manufacture, reliability assurance, and quality support phases of the project to develop Genesis LED. quality plan conforms to and exceeds the requirements of the Carrier Excellence (Cx) standard as well as the of UL, ULC, and other regulatory agencies. This plan and subsequent updates to the plan a continuing resolve to make products as reliable and consistent as one would expect for life safety operation. In all cases, ensurances are put in place for the system to operate reliably without the life safety aspect of operation. The Quality Plan, in general, verifies that all stages of the NPD Product Development) process are completed according to the standards; this process is shown in the Quality Plan (Figure 1 below). 1: Standard Quality Plan flowchart 3102773-EN REV 002 ISS 23AUG21 of liability the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in no event will Carrier be liable for any lost profits or opportunities, loss of use, business interruption, loss of data, or any other indirect, special, incidental, or damages under any theory of liability, whether based in contract, tort, negligence, product liability, otherwise. Because some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or damages the preceding limitation may not apply to you. In any event the total liability of Carrier shall not the purchase price of the product. The foregoing limitation will apply to the maximum extent permitted by law, regardless of whether Carrier has been advised of the possibility of such damages and regardless whether any remedy fails of its essential purpose. with these manual, applicable codes, and the instructions of the authority having jurisdiction is every precaution has been taken during the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its Carrier assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. 3102773-EN REV 002 ISS 23AUG21 3102773-EN REV 002 ISS 23AUG21 1 2 and approval 3 3102773-EN REV 002 ISS 23AUG21 1: Introduction plan defines activities carried out to ensure the product line meets all required functional performance

Worksheet instructions worksheet is an interactive PDF form. You can fill in the fields online and save the form to your hard drive or print form and fill it in manually. information contact information, see www.kidde-esfire.com. Settings tab section identifies questions to ask the IT administrators. the local IT administrator: Where is the physical IP connection made to the network (switch, etc.)? there a DHCP server at the site? ________________________________________ During CU programming, choose the option to obtain the server addresses automatically. Obtain the following static addresses. During CU manually enter the addresses. address mask _______________ gateway Does the panel need to connect outside the local network? Default gateway During CU programming, enter 0.0.0.0. Does the local network have a DNS server? Does the IT administrator or programmer want the panel use the DNS server? Can the address be obtained automatically? During CU programming, choose the option to the DNS server addresses automatically. Obtain the following DNS addresses. During programming, manually enter the addresses. DNS server _______________ DNS server _______________ (optional) No additional information is required. Go to the next step. This completes the IP Configuration tab section. IP Dialer Configuration Services – IP Dialer Setting dialog section identifies questions to ask the central monitoring station administrator. the CMS administrator: What is the CMS account ID. account ID What is the primary receiver IP address or domain name? During programming, enter one of these. receiver IP address What is the primary receiver port number to be opened for receiver port number Can the connection be secure? Primary receiver encryption key During CU programming, no entry is required. What is the primary receiver account code? receiver account code an alternate receiver supported? Obtain the alternate receiver information. receiver IP address receiver port number receiver encryption key receiver account code During CU programming, no entry is required. Does the account use a dialed number identification service? DNIS value During CU programming, no entry is required. What values does the CMS administrator want for the following? time (seconds) time (seconds) attempts the formulas below to calculate the maximum heartbeat and time configurations to meet agency requirements. CAN/ULC-S559: [Supervision Time] + [Heartbeat Time] s (3 min) UL 864 ninth edition: [Supervision Time] + [Heartbeat 300 s (5 min) UL 864 tenth edition: [Supervision Time] + [Heartbeat 3600 s (60 min) This completes the IP Dialer Settings Configuration dialog box 2021 Carrier / 1 3102788-EN REV 001 ISS 01MAR21

Figure 1: Installing the RKEY Remote Annunciator Switch Installation Sheet RKEY Remote Annunciator Key Switch is a key switch mounted a single-gang plate and designed for use with the LSRA-C and annunciators. The RKEY is a normally open dry contact used with annunciators, the key switch enables or inhibits the control buttons on the annunciators. For LSRA-C the annunciator programming determines which buttons controlled by the key switch. key switch is finished in brushed stainless steel and has the symbols for lock and unlock printed on the front. additional connection details, see the installation sheet or technical manual for the annunciator you are using. 2: Wiring the RKEY to the annunciator Annunciator Key switch External switch terminals or connector most applications, the RKEY must be mounted within 3 ft. (0.9 m) the annunciator and the wiring must be in a metal conduit. Consult appropriate electrical codes and the authority having jurisdiction. runs must be broken at all terminal connections to provide proper of the circuit. install the RKEY: Pull the wiring from the annunciator box to a compatible electrical 2.) Connect the annunciator wiring to TB1 on the RKEY. (See Mount the RKEY in the electrical box using the security screws (See Figure 1.) voltage current wire size configuration VDC mA in. (64 mm) deep 1-gang box terminals AWG (2.5 mm closed information contact information, see www.edwardsfiresafety.com. 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc. rights reserved. 387459-EN REV 04 ISS 28SEP15 / 1

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

ANS25A / ANS50A / ANS100A INSTRUCTIONS ANS25A / ANS50A / ANS100A is a self contained amplifier, tone generator, power and supervisory interface. It is designed to be used in conjunction with the ANS 25 / / 100 to provide additional speaker output power. It may also be used stand-alone in with a Fire Alarm Control Panel to provide voice evacuation where an automatic is not desired. and operation is identical to the ANS 25 / 50 / 100 (see Installation Instructions ANS-5001. With the exception that no digital message is present. When used in with the ANS 25 / 50 / 100 the Expander will act as a slave reproducing the and message generated by the master. When used as a stand-alone, the Expander connect to the FACP exactly as the ANS 25 / 50 / 100 does to provide automatic tone in and voice override capability. terminal designations and volume controls are identical to the ANS 25 / 50 / 100. One is that on the Expander SN1 determines Tone, Master/Slave, Battery and supervision. There is no SN2. defaults are: Expander as Slave = OFF Temporal Whoop Signal = OFF = OFF = OFF = OFF = OFF Slave (ON = Master setting) = ON Battery connected (OFF = No Batteries) = OFF No Mic (ON = Mic connected) Expander as Master / Stand-Alone = OFF Temporal Whoop Signal = OFF = OFF = OFF = OFF = ON Master setting = ON Battery connected (OFF = No Batteries) = ON Mic connected Network Detail = 0 (UP) = 1 (DOWN) Tone Selection 1 Sets the evac tone. Settings: 0 Temporal Whoop 1 Temporal Chime ratings and specifications see ANS 25 / 50 / 100 Installation Instructions P/N ANS-5001 464 520 Hz Low Frequency Signal for Sleeping Areas: Models ANS25A and ANS100A when used in conjunction with models ANS25 and are tested compliant with UL 464 520 Hz Low Frequency Signal for Sleeping Areas with the following speakers: Series: G4HF and GCHF ANS-5002 R5.16 1 of 2 2015 Walter Kidde Portable Equipment, Inc All rights reserved. ALARM CONTROL PANEL POLARITY POWER VAC Limited – Power Limited – Power Limited 25A / 50A / 100A INSTALLATION – Power Limited (Style Life Safety Speakers, Strobes connected and powered separately. wire to maintain supervision. Do not loop wire around speaker terminals. faults are indicated at 10K impedance or less. 2 3 / 50A / 100A (Style – Power Limited Fire Emergency Use Only wiring connections: wire clamp screw 14-18 AWG wire clamp screw 12-18 AWG wire entry terminal 18-26 AWG gauge determined by circuit load Wire Harness – Non Power Limited Current 1A max. Wire is Provided 25A / 50A / 100A / Slave Connection Detail ALARM CONTROL PANEL wiring connections: wire clamp screw 14-18 AWG wire clamp screw 12-18 AWG wire entry terminal 18-26 AWG gauge determined by circuit load 2 3 – Power Limited Non-Supervised wiring must be only run in the same cabinet or between cabinets which are piped together within the same room at a maximum of 20 1

firealarmresources.com

Issue Notification E C H N I C A L S U P P O R T / N T I N 1 9 0 0 2 E Remote Booster Power Supply (BPS Technical Reference Manual incorrect Voltage This Technical Issue Notification is to inform you that the Edwards business is aware of an issue where the Series Technical Reference Manual (P/N 3100485-EN Rev 04 ISS 28AUG12) incorrectly lists the Source as 19.1V. Please note that the Technical Support, Edwards Engineering and Compliance Teams are aware that the Voltage documented in Rev 04 of the BPS Series Technical Reference Manual is incorrectly documented 19.1V. The correct value is 19.7V. The APS Series Technical Reference Manual (part number 3100970, 05) already documents the correct value of 19.7V. Products: BPS10A, BPS10A-6, BPS10AC, BPS10A/230, BPS6A, BPS6A-6, BPS6AC, BPS6A/230, EBPS6A, MIRBPS10A, MIRBPS10A-6, MIRBPS6A, MIRBPS6A-6, RBPS10A, RBPS10A/230, and RBPS6A/230. Should You Do? When utilizing the equations listed on Page 41 of the current Remote Booster Power Supply Technical Manual, during Step 2: Calculating the minimum voltage (Vm), use 19.7V for Vs. Calculate the minimum voltage (Vm). = Vs (Itot K) Vs = source voltage = total current (from above) K = load factor For the power supply, Vs is 19.7V and K is 0.59 V/A The Load Factor, K, is correctly documented as 0.59V, but is currently under review. 2019 United Technologies Corporation / 2 TIN19002E R001 BPS-Incorrect Source Voltage The BPS Technical Reference Manual is in process of being updated to correct this discrepancy. Until the Manual has been published, use this Technical Issue Notification as required to provide evidence of the Source Voltage value. support +1 888 244 9979 +1 866 226 2126 sole purpose of this bulletin is to notify our network of Edwards Strategic Partners of a potential product issue has been identified and which Edwards is currently investigating. Once the investigation is complete Edwards provide additional communication regarding the issue including any required corrective action 2019 United Technologies Corporation / 2 TIN19002E R001 BPS-Incorrect Source Voltage

August 24, 2016 detector take a punch new 30-3013 explosionproof smoke detector is a high optical smoke sensing device that is Class I, 1 and IECEx Zone approved for use in hazardous It is corrosion-resistant and features a non- aluminum alloy retaining ring that protects the sensor against the effects of explosions and other events. addition to its explosion-resistant properties, the 30-3013 meets IP44 ingress protection standards, making it for onshore and offshore petroleum extraction facilities. 30-3013 advanced optical detector features a sensor module that is hot-swappable and intrinsically safe powered. This allows maintenance work to be performed without having to declassify the protected area a hazardous location. integrated Trouble relay helps to ensure that the 30-3013 detector always performs as expected. On-board and Auxiliary relays integrate easily with EDWARDS fire systems, as well as auxiliary equipment such as and door closers. 30-3013 Hazardous Location Smoke detector replaces the V9006-0001-013 detector, which is now out more. Download the following document from myEDDIE today visit my-eddie.com today

Notes Bulletin E C H N I C A L S U P P O R T / N F N 0 0 0 0 9 K Conventional – Dialer/Modem Answering Two Rings bulletin informs you of an issue with FX Conventional F-DACT Series Dialer/Modems and tells you how to it. This issue affects the following dialer/modem models: F-DACT with firmware V2.0 and earlier F-DACTF with firmware V2.0 and earlier F-DACT1 with firmware V1.0 F-DACT1F with firmware V1.0 the dialer/modem detects a dialer delivery trouble, the Rings to Answer option setting is automatically to 2. After the dialer delivery trouble is restored, the Rings to Answer option setting remains at 2. It does automatically change back to the previous setting. be aware that this is a nuisance condition that only affects locations where the fire alarm control unit lines are shared with the main business contact telephone line, and only causes the dialer/modem to incoming calls after two rings. Life safety functions are not impacted. The dialer/modem remains able to out to the CMS receiver regardless of the Rings to Answer setting. issue has been resolved with the release of F-DACT(F) firmware V2.1 and F-DACT1(F) firmware V1.1. installations that do not employ shared telephone lines, this issue does not affect you, and no action is installations with shared telephone lines where this issue is a concern: Determine the firmware version of the dialer/modem, as follows: press and hold the Remote Disconnect button and the Walk Test button. The LCD displays following: xx P:x.yy.zz 2018 United Technologies Corporation / 2 FN00009K REV 001 ISS 04APR18 DB# is the database revision number P:x.yy.zz is the panel firmware version D:x.yy.zz is the dialer/modem firmware version you have the affected firmware, submit an RMA request by email to: [email protected] support +1 888 244 9979 +1 866 226 2126 FN00009K REV 001 ISS 04APR18 / 2

Genesis Speakers Strobes EG4 Series Catalog u Speakers and Speaker-strobes pending Genesis line of life safety signals are the smallest, most audible-visible emergency signaling devices in the world. no more than one inch from the wall, Genesis speakers speaker-strobes blend with any decor. safety appliances feature textured housings in architecturally white or traditional life safety red. to patented breakthrough technology, Genesis strobes do require bulky specular reflectors. Instead, an exclusive design and conditions light to produce a highly controllable pattern. feature selectable candela output with a conven- switch on the bottom of the device. The candela remains clearly visible even after final installation. Genesis speakers include a DC blocking capacitor to allow supervision of the audio distribution circuit. The speaker its sealed back construction provides extra durability and audibility. Features Unique low-profile design The most compact UL/ULC listed speaker-strobe available Ultra-slim, protrudes a mere one inch from the wall Attractive appearance, no visible mounting screws Field configurable no need to remove the device! 1, or 2 watt operation and selectable candela output with convenient switches that remain visible even after the unit is installed Unparalleled performance most even light distribution loud 90 dBA output ensures clear, crisp audio Exclusive FullLight strobe technology produces the Precision timing electronics meet tough new synchronizing standards for strobes when used with compatibile modules Optional field-configurable temporal strobe output 25 Vrms and 70 Vrms models available, all supplied with a DC blocking capacitor for audio circuit supervision Easy to install Fits all standard 4 square electrical boxes with plenty of behind the signal for extra wire no extension ring or trim plate needed #18 – #12 AWG terminals ideal for long runs or using existing wiring 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T FX85001-0549 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 10 Application suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone with alert or alarm signals is a minimum of 15 dB above the ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound having a duration at least 60 seconds, is greater. This measured 5 feet (1.5 m) the floor. in anechoic chamber Sound Output dBA two watts Application clear-lensed strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as public-mode notification appliances for the hearing Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambi- noise conditions exceed specified levels, where occupants use protection, and in areas of public accommodation. Genesis strobes meet UL synchronization requirements (within milliseconds over a two-hour period) when used with a syn- source. Synchronization is important in order to avoid sensitivity. Configuration speakers may be set for 1, or 2 watt operation. The setting is visible through a small window on the bottom the device and is changed by simply sliding the switch until the setting appears in the window. The speaker does not have be removed to change the wattage. speaker-strobes feature selectable candela output. The setting is visible through a small window on the bottom of device and is changed by simply sliding the switch until the setting appears in the window. The speaker-strobe does have to be removed to change the output. the Candela Switch and the switch to set desired operation. change strobe to temporal mode) cut JP1 switch switch View speaker-strobes may also be configured for temporal This battery-saving feature is intended for private mode only. To set the device for temporal flash, snip the circuit as shown in the Jumper Locations diagram above. the distance from signal to the ear will

FireworX Catalog u Conventional Initiating Devices Grade Photoelectric Alarm Series FireworX 350/320A Series AC/DC single/multiple station smoke alarms are commercial-grade and specifically for rigorous use in high traffic residential occupancies, hotels, motels, and educational/military dormitories. The Series 120VAC with back up lithium battery is compat- with the legendary ESL 320 Series wiring connector and up to units may be interconnected for tandem operation. FireworX 350/320A Series features a test/hush button on the of the alarm that facilitates testing and silences the alarm the unlikely case of a nuisance alarm. The series continuously tors its own sensitivity; and if the alarm falls out of sensitiv- FireworX patented field replaceable optical chamber enables and easy cleaning and maintenance. Additional diagnostic is activated by applying a magnet near the detector reed switch. This initiates a self-diag nostic routine and pro- visual indication of sensitivity level, or if service is required. series meets NFPA 72 field sensitivity requirements without need for external meters. 350/320A Series provides an industry leading lithium backup offers up to 7-days of continuous protection in the event of a outage. Other models provide auxiliary relays that can oper- based on either the initiating smoke alarm or the tandem wire any smoke alarm relay. models are equipped with early warning photoelectric technol- which detects smoldering fires faster than the more common inexpensive ionization technology. Since smoldering fire is of the most prevalent types of residential fires, photoelec tric are essential in these applications. Also, the US Consumer Safety Commission recommends the 350 photoelectric technology to significantly reduce nuisance alarms as to common ionization smoke alarms. drift compensation automatically adjusts the sensitivity as detector gets dirty. Normal sensing occurs every 9 seconds. rate doubles when a signal exceeding the alarm threshold is sensed. Two additional successive signals above the level will initiate an alarm. Features Early warning photoelectronic smoke sensing technology sig- reduces nuisance alarms Backward compatible with existing ESL 320 connectors and Tandem or isolated auxiliary relays Built-in 85dB temporal sounder Up to 12 units can be interconnected enabling all sounders to during alarm 120VAC with backup lithium battery Low profile design blends in with any environment Test and hush feature Built-in drift compensation reduces nuisance alarms Field replaceable optical chamber for quick and easy mainte- 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T FX85001-0593 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3 us… [email protected] http://fireworx.edwardsfire.com/ is an EDWARDS brand. Corporate Park Drive NC 27302 2013 UTC Fire & Security Americas Inc. All rights reserved. subject to change notice. Edwards is part of UTC Controls & Security, a unit of Technologies Corporation. Specifications 350/320A Series photoelectric single/multiple station smoke alarms are low and fully backward compatible with existing ESL 320 Series alarms. The 350/320A features a test/hush button on the front of the unit that allows for easy testing of overall operation of the unit. The test/hush button also allows the alarm to be silenced. LED response indicates alarm sensitivity. If the detector is out of sensitivity, field is quick and easy with FireworX patented field replaceable optical chamber. installation instructions for information about correct installation, maintenance, and The 350 is a 120VAC photoelectric smoke alarm with a 9V lithium back up bat- that meets the existing building codes. Specifications compensation adjustment temperature humidity range time delay max. Ultralife Lithium min. to 2.46%/ft. max max.

FireworX Catalog u Conventional Initiating Devices Monoxide with SafeTestTM SafeAirTM 250-CO carbon monoxide (CO) detector is an accu- and reliable means of alerting building occupants of potentially levels of CO in the protected area. The internal electro- sensor communicates with a sophisticated on-board that accurately tracks CO levels over time. commercial-grade detection technology results in quick reliable sensing, fast reset time, and superior false alarm Its small size allows the 250-CO to blend inconspicu- with any decor, and its smooth contoured design is compat- with both residential and commercial environments. by normal indoor temperature variations, the 250-CO self-adjusts for environmental changes and operates reli- under a wide variety of conditions. It also monitors its own and automatically compensates for sensitivity drift the course of its service life. Features SafeTest enables a full functional test with spray of real CO Electro-chemical sensing technology Transmits sensor end-of-life to the control panel and central if the system is monitored Fully listed to the latest UL 2075 CO standard for residential or occupancies Built-in trouble/power supervision relay Six-year sensor Self-diagnostics keep the device operating optimally through- its service life 12 or 24VDC operation and 150mA relay contact configurable normally open or normally closed operation 250-CO features the SafeTest functional test feature, which testing with real CO gas. SafeTest meets the functional requirement in NFPA 720, 2009/2012 editions. all CO detectors, the 250-CO has a limited service life. When approaches this point, the 250-CO six-year end-of-life timer triggers a warning, locally, at the control panel, and at a central monitoring station, indicating that the device be serviced. Large SEMS terminals ease wiring installation 14 to 22 AWG One-touch TEST/HUSH button simplifies local operation Integrated 85 dBa temporal 4-sounder for local notification On-board LED provides local alarm and trouble indication Inconspicuous footprint and attractively contoured design Adapter plate makes replacing ESL 240-COe CO detector integrated temporal 4 sounder provides local signaling capabil- for the 250-CO, and it easily interfaces with any listed intrusion or alarm system by means of its 150mA output relay. Its low current results in little additional demand on the system power supply. 250-CO fully complies with the latest UL 2075 requirements allows for installation in a wide range of both residential and settings. 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T FX85001-0618 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 4 SafeAir 250-CO Carbon Monoxide Detector is intended for indoor-dwelling unit applications in both residential and occupancies, including single/multiple family residential hotel rooms, dorm rooms, and other areas approved the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). The 250-CO detec- can connect to either UL 985 (Household Fire Warning) or UL (Commercial Fire) control panels. It is not intended for use in applications such as gasoline refineries or parking ga- which require different listings. The 250-CO detector has an adapter mounting plate for the ESL 240COe CO detector. purchase the plate order P/N 250-COPLT-5PKG. a suitable location is critical to the operation of CO Install the 250-CO in accordance with NFPA 720 Stan- for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection and Equipment. Place wall-mounted detectors at least 5 ft. m) up from the floor. For ceiling mounted applications, place detector at least 1 ft. (0.3 m) from any wall. hotel rooms and dorm rooms. CO detector locations: 9 Within 10 ft. (3 m) of all sleeping areas, including areas such 9 In a suitable environment: areas with a temperature range of to 104 (0 to 40 and with a relative humidity range of 0 90% noncondensing. 9 In residential dwellings, locate detectors in every bedroom, 10 ft. (3 m) of sleeping areas, and on each level. At a place one detector outside the sleeping ar

Explosionproof Detector 30-3013 30-3013 detectors are high performance smoke detectors for use in hazardous locations. They are corrosion-resistant feature a non-conducting aluminum alloy retaining ring that the detector sensor against the effects of explosions and catastrophic events. retaining ring mounts securely to a companion junction box, offers several common port configurations for conduit con- Together, the ring and box provide a sturdy protective for the detector head. 30-3013 advanced optical detector performs effectively with smoldering fires, as well as quickly rising flames. sensor module is hot-swappable and intrinsically safe while This allows maintenance work to be performed without to declassify the protected area as a hazardous location. integrated Trouble relay ensures that the 30-3013 detector performs as expected. On-board Alarm and Auxiliary relays easily with EDWARDS fire systems, as well as auxiliary such as dampers and door closers. Features High performance optical smoke detection Built-in 0-20 mA output for easy Distributed Control System integration Self diagnostics for reliable operation Alarm, Auxiliary, and Trouble relays for annunciator and control connection On-board LED provides local annunciation Non-latching operation Convenient magnetic switch for manual testing FM Approved for smoke detection in Class I, Division 1 hazard- locations IECEx Zone approved IP44 ingress protection level suitable for onshore or offshore 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T FX85001-0645 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 30-3013 Explosionproof Smoke Detector features a rugged built to withstand environmental extremes. Its integrated outputs make it ideal for a wide range of industrial appli- while its agency approval ratings make it suitable for both and off-shore facilities. applications for the 30-3013 Explosionproof Smoke Detec- include: Indication LED located on the 30-3013 annunciates detector status. operating normally, the LED flashes every four seconds. the device is in alarm, it is steady on. operation detector will check the alarm status once every 10 seconds. smoke falls below the alarm threshold, the alarm condition clear within 10 seconds. Combustible storage facilities Munitions manufacturing Volatile chemical storage Chemical processing plants Petroleum refineries Turbine enclosures Battery rooms HVAC applications external wiring to the device is connected inside the integrated box. The 30-3013 has ports for up to four conduit entries. port accepts conduit with 3/4 inch NPT. in mm) in mm) and Maintenance Diagnostics normal operation, the detector performs a self-test function in the background once per second. Detection is interrupted during the test, and no indication is given if the test If the test fails, a Critical Fault condition will occur. If sen- drift is found to be approaching critical levels, an Advisory condition will occur. Testing on-board magnetic switch is used to initiate the Manual Self- The LED will light when a magnet is detected at the switch. test will immediately check the smoke chamber optics for degradation. there is a failure, the LED will shut off immediately after the one test, and a Trouble condition will occur. If the test passes, Alarm will be annunciated while the LED remains active. The will clear after 10 seconds. 2 of 4 D A T A S H E E T FX85001-0645 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 proper temperature rated cabling type and diameter for input as well as output signal wiring. Terminals accept 14 to 18 shielded stranded copper wire. field wiring terminal connections are certified for a single wire size from 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (or two conductors with the same section 0.2 to 0.75 mm2). The screws must be tightened with a torque 0.4 to 0.5 N

No text preview available.

(cid:1)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:12)(cid:10)(cid:7)(cid:5)(cid:5)(cid:13) (cid:10)(cid:6)(cid:5)(cid:14)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:9)(cid:7)(cid:3)(cid:9)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:9)(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:8)&(cid:6)(cid:15)(cid:14)(cid:26)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:28)(cid:28)(cid:18)(cid:13)(cid:22)(cid:7)(cid:11)(cid:18)(cid:2)

GENESIS LED APPLIANCES STROBES, SPEAKERS GOT IT COVERED most energy-efficient notification appliances in their class, the Genesis LED of horns, strobes and speakers employs patented electronics to deliver focused life safety solutions for new and retrofit projects. the right Genesis appliance for every environment thanks the sleek, compact design that conceals mounting screws only protrudes about an inch from the mounting surface. higher performance for lower cost thanks to the current draw and high-efficiency LED optics, which require power supplies and can be mixed with legacy xenon strobes. install your Genesis appliances with a convenient universal wiring plate, slide switches for field configuration, in-out screw terminals for quick wiring. exceptional performance and flexibility with Genesis thanks to field-configurable sound output and selectable low-current optics. RIGHT PROTECTION YOUR FACILITY neighborhood markets to community classrooms, Kidde Engineered are there to protect what matters most people and property. Genesis LED family of horns, strobes and speakers provide a significant cost savings, reduced installation times, and a unobtrusive design that easy to incorporate into any facility. money on your every day with appliances. OUTPUTS light outputs have the same low current and are tested to exceed UL minimum standards. STI OUTPUTS between and low-decibel and temporal or signaling. PERFORMANCE have selectable settings allowing 25V 70V applications with four wattage settings in unit. All speaker models have an excellent STI of .81 and are low-frequency (520Hz) capable. mix Genesis appliances with legacy on the same circuit in the same line of sight. INTERCHANGEABLE sold separately so you can the color, language or marking needed or replace damaged covers replacing the entire appliance. INSTALLATION wiring makes quick and easy with to check circuit continuity. PROTECTION SAFER TOMORROWS proud to offer the Genesis LED family of horns, strobes and speakers a variety of designs to suit every application and need. LED EG1 wall-mounted strobes, horns horn-strobes Low-profile design, protrudes about from the mounting surface LED EG4 strobes, horns horn-strobes Field-selectable 15, 30, 75 110 cd light output Selectable high- and low-dB horn output Room-side wiring with Diagnostics Port Strobe current draw of 24mA across candela settings check Diagnostics Port LED EGC strobes, horns horn-strobes Field-selectable 15, 30, 75 115 cd light output Room-side wiring with check Diagnostics Port Strobe current draw of 28mA across all candela settings Strobe current draw of 35mA all candela settings Selectable 1/4, 1/2, 1, and watt taps for Speakers Speakers capable of both and 70V systems a single model High-fidelity performance excellent STI rating .81 Low frequency (520Hz) Room-Side Wiring Plate continuty check Diagnostics Port LED EG4S speakers speaker strobes LED EGCS speakers speaker strobes Field-selectable 15, 30, or 110 cd light output Field-selectable 15, 30, or 115 cd light output Strobe current draw Strobe current draw 28mA across all settings 35mA across all settings Strobe Expander Mass notification solution to work with LE

SPECIFICATIONS loops (support of any type) cation appliance supply Operating Loop operating power Power 1 Power 2 output panel current placement SERIES SMALL BUILDING FIRE ALARM SOLUTIONS loop Class B, Class A, up to 64 devices Class B, Class A optional, amps each loop, expandable to 4, Class A or B, loop supports up to 250 devices Class B or 2 Class A, amps each FWR total at 120VAC 60Hz circuit (Aux power 2): Nominal @ 500mA* FWR total at 230VAC 50Hz total, 2.5A max./ct @ 120VAC 60Hz circuit: 24VDC nominal 500mA* FWR total at 230VAC 50Hz VDC. NAC minimum voltage: 19.5 VDC @ 20.4 V battery voltage V peak-to-peak VAC, 60 Hz, 230 VAC 50-60 Hz circuit: 24 VDC nominal at 500 mA circuit: 24 VDC nominal at 500 mA to 25.7 VDC 155 mA Alarm: 204 mA 172 mA, Alarm: 267 mA to 11 AH (p/n 12V10AH) batteries. external cabinet for larger batteries. external cabinet for larger batteries. must be sealed lead acid type only. Maximum charging capacity = 26 Ah. to 18 A/H batteries. loop resistance: 66 loop resistance: 66 loop capacitance: 0.5 Style 4, 6, 7 wiring. 64 isolators max. per loop. loop capacitance: 0.5 Style 4, 6, 7 wiring. 64 isolators max. per loop. S10A, S11A the maximum quantity of detectors per circuit) mA for FX-2WIRE (see the UL compatibility list for your panel circuit max detector current ID Trouble contact contact rating communications annunciator Groups zones Listing Note: 1A possible if you reduce total available NAC power by 500mA. If > 1.0A is required, a Listed 24VDC auxilary/booster must be used. 2.55 V. Current: 30 mA max drops max, RS-485 Class B, Class A C 24 VDC @ 1 A (resistive load) A 24 VDC @ 1 A (resistive load) 0 to 49 (32 to 120 Humidity: 0 to 93% RH, noncondensing terminals rated for 12 to 18 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 sq mm) ULC, CSFM, FDNY max. max. one loop supports up to 64 devices of any type. One loop supports up to 250 intelligent devices. be expanded to four loops with the addition of an SLC module. loop supports 250 devices, 125 detectors and 125 modules. 2 Class B or 2 optional Class A NACs 4 Class B or 2 Class A NACs combination of up to eight LCD, LED, graphic serial annunciators (Remote Diagnostics, Station Communicator) (option modules SA-232 and SA-USB) Two Form C, one Form A Power, programmable Power, resettable or continuous Conventional IDCs, additional NACs with RZI16-2RS module REFERENCE relevant literature for full listing of available models and options. mounting holes with attached with door and ring attached INTELLIGENT PANELS Fire Alarm Control Panel, Points Fire Alarm Control Panel dialer, 64 Points Alarm Control Accessory, Semi- Mt., Trim Kit, FX-64 Fire Alarm Control Panel. loop (250 Devices) expand to loops (1,000 Devices) with SLC (see below) as FX-1000, with dialer Mt., Trim Kit, FX-250 OPTION module, 250-device loop. module, two 250-device 500 devices total. Zone Interface Module. Class B Initiating Device and two Class B Supervised Circuits. Line Dialer/Modem, supports ID, mounts in cabinet. Serial Port for printers & mounts in cabinet. Port, Slave, mounts in A adapter module. Provides A capacity on NACs. Mounts

FX SERIES SMALL BUILDING FIRE ALARM SOLUTIONS System Indicators Zone Indicators Remote Annunciator Common Controls Remote Relay Modules Form C Relays) Convertible Class B Device Circuits simplicity of wiring valuable features only among systems. Available in 5, and 10 zone models CleanMe feature provides remote if 521 Series detector out of UL limits Automatic drift compensation detector life Precision UL 1971 signal and optional audible over just two wires Up to 7.5 amps available NAC power equipment costs Fully integrated upload/download enables PC and off-premise Zone or NAC pairs convertible to Class A circuits Combination Waterflow and zones NACs programmable by zone and selectable for continuous, or coded outputs, or protocol Model illustrated. 5-Zone Models also table for specifications. Convertible Class B Notification Appliance Circuits (F-DACT1, use with FX Series firmware v4.x and later) Three Form C Device Circuits IDCs Combinations Appliance Circuits NACs Combinations Appliance Circuits NACs Supply NAC current Panel Current Draw Placement Current Output Alarm Current Trouble, Supervisory Contacts (wire gauge) Communication Bus Annunciators & Relay Modules B A B A amps total amps total amps each, 3.5 amps total 104 mA; Alarm: 224 mA amps each, 7.0 amps total 128 mA; Alarm: 242 mA Ah maximum, up to 10 Ah in cabinet Ah maximum, up to 10 Ah in cabinet amps max. May be programmed as resettable Contacts at 30 Vdc @ 1 A (resistive load) Vdc regulated mA – 12 AWG resistance: 13 Ohms; Maximum capacitance: 0.03 Up to 1,000 feet using 18 AWG, twisted required for Serial Communication. No T-tapping of data wire. REFERENCE relevant literature for full listing of available models and options. POWER SUPPLY relevant literature for application details. CLASS B WIRING – Upload/download DACT/modem 12V10A Fire Alarm Control with dialer, 5 Class B IDCs 2 Class B NACs, red Mt., Trim Kit, Fire Alarm Control with dialer, 10 Class B IDCs 4 Class B NACs, red Mt., Trim Kit, upload/download DACT modem, dual line, w/2X16 mounts to main assembly, (2) cords included. Cabinet, red Ah Batteries Ah Batteries Ah Batteries Tie Module (Requires 4″ sq. or 2-gang) Polarity Module, Requires or other listed FA enclosure Relay Module 5 Form C Config. IDCs 1-5, or 6-10, common system indicators, MFC-A or other listed enclosure System Indicator Power, Super, Trouble, and Grnd (Single Gang trim included) Zone Indicator 5 Red for 5 IDCs Gang trim included) Zone Indicator 5 Bi-Color (Red/Yellow) for 5 IDCs Gang trim included) Trim Plate, 2-Gang Trim Plate, 3-Gang Annunciator 10-Zone LEDs (Red/Yellow) System Indicators for FX-10 (4″ sq. box mnt.). Annunciator Bi-Color LEDs (Red/ w/ System Indicators & for FX-10 only sq. box mnt.). Drive/Interface providing Indicators and Controls – Red Battery Cabinet Amp Booster Power Supply Amp Booster Power Supply Ah Batteries Ah Batteries DETECTORS BASES Smoke Detector, Base

KIDDE Catalog u Conventional Initiating Fire Stations Series Kidde Cat. No. 276B/277B series noncoded fire alarm are contemporary styled Lexan stations and are flexibly to meet a wide variety of application requirements and sequences. Cat. No. 276B series are single action stations with terminals field wiring connections. Cat. No. 277B series are also single action stations but use 6 wire leads for field wiring connections. types are available with single or double pole alarm contacts can be normally open, normally closed or a combination both. Either a key or tool (depending on station selected) is to reset mechanism. See specification chart for specific numbers and features. semi flush mounting use a standard North-American 4 inch box with single gang plaster cover having an overall depth of 2-1/4 inches (57mm). For surface mounting use surface back box. Features Single action models Single or double pole contacts Terminals or wire leads for field connections Pre-signal or general alarm operation Key lock or tool reset Break glass operation Surface or semi flush mounting Red finish Contemporary styling Rugged LEXAN construction Latch action until reset 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0183 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Specifications Ratings Alarm Switch/Keyswitch Pole Pole Amps, 30 Vac, Resistive Load Amps, 28 Vdc, Resistive Load Amps, 30 Vac, Resistive Load Amps, 28 Vdc, Resistive Load Kit for use in stations connected to smoke detector Housing Lexan 940 With White Letters lb (0.4 kg) of Glass Rods Reset Key, Supplied with all Key Reset Stations Alarm key, Must be ordered separately. Back Box, Red. These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss further safeguards your local fire protection specialist. initiate an alarm and break the glass rod, pull down on the marked for Fire alarm handle latches in the pulled position until the station is reset. To reset, the station is opened using a Cat. No. key supplied with the station, or a tool; the toggle switch restored to it normal position, the break glass rod is replaced the station is reclosed. For presignal type stations, the general can be initiated by authorized personnel from any operated by inserting Cat. No. 276-K2 key into the keyswitch behind alarm handle and turning it clockwise. Specifications and install where indicated on plans, Cat. No. (Select one the following:) (276B series single action manual stations with screw terminals) (277B series single action manual stations with 6 inch (150mm) leads) connection of installation wiring. All stations shall be of the break glass type. stations shall be constructed of red lexan with white raised The alarm handle shall be marked FOR FIRE to simple, concise instructions for activation of station by the public. the alarm handle shall break a glass rod and activate a switch which shall cause the handle to latch in the alarm Momentary push button type switches shall not be To reset the station it shall be necessary to open the using (select one) (a key) (a special tool), restore the toggle to its normal position and replace the glass rod. shall be UL listed. 2 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0183 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 for optional resistor kit (276-R) No. 276B With Information Connections Contacts Reset Alarm Ac- Pull

Double-Action Alarm Stations Series Non-Coded Catalog u Conventional Initiating Kidde Cat. No. 278B/279B series noncoded fire alarm sta- are contemporary styled Lexan stations and are flexibly to meet a wide variety of application requirements and sequences. Cat. No. 278B series are double action stations with terminals field wiring connections. Cat. No. 279B series are double action stations with six inch wire leads for field wiring connections. types can be either presignal or general alarm and are available single or double pole alarm contacts which can be normally normally closed or a combination of both. Either a key or (depending on station selected) is required to reset mecha- See specification chart for specific catalog numbers and semi flush mounting use a standard North-American four inch box with a single gang plaster cover having an overall depth of 2-1/4 inch (57mm). For surface mounting use a No. 276B-RSB surface back box. Features Double action models Single or double pole contacts Terminals or wire leads for field connections Presignal or general alarm operation Key lock or tool reset Break glass operation Surface or semi flush mounting Red finish Contemporary styling Rugged LEXAN construction Latch action until reset 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0227 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 initiate an alarm it is necessary to first lift the upper door marked THEN PULL HANDLE and then pull the alarm handle. alarm handle latches in the pulled position until the station is reset. To reset, the station is opened using a Cat. No. key supplied with the station, or a tool; the toggle switch restored to it normal position, the break glass rod is replaced the station is reclosed. For presignal type stations, the general can be initiated by authorized personnel from any oper- station by inserting a Cat. No. 276-K2 key into the keyswitch the alarm handle and turning it clockwise. Specifications and install where indicated on plans, Cat. No. (Select one the following:) series double action manual stations with screw terminals) series double action manual stations with six inch (150mm) wire connection of installation wiring. All stations shall be of the break glass type. stations shall be constructed of red lexan with white raised The alarm handle shall be marked FOR FIRE to simple, concise instructions for activation of station by general public. It shall be necessary to first lift an upper door THEN PULL HANDLE to gain access to the alarm the alarm handle shall break a glass rod and activate a switch which shall cause the handle to latch in the alarm Momentary push button type switches shall not be ac- To reset the station it shall be necessary to open the using (select one) (a key) (a special tool), restore the toggle to its normal position and replace the glass rod. Stations be UL listed. Specifications Ratings: General Alarm Switch/Keyswitch Pole Pole No. 276-R Series resistor kits stations connected to smoke circuits) Housing Listings W Amps, 30 Vac, Resistive Load Amps, 28 Vdc, Resistive Load Amps, 30 Vac, Resistive Load Amps, 28 Vdc, Resistive Load Ohms, Lexan 940 with White Letters lb (0.4 kg) (S218), FM Package of Glass Rods Reset Key, Supplied with all Key Reset Stations Alarm Key. Must be ordered separately. Back Box, Red. These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss further safeguards your local fire protection specialist. 2 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0227 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 No 278B 279B Series No 278B & Backbox No. 276B-RSB Backbox No. Series Optional No & 279B

Fire Alarm Stations Series Features Pull lever Simple positive operation Break glass Attractive, streamline design Less than 5 lb pull force complies with ADA Solid, die-cast metal construction K-270 Series Non-Coded Fire Alarm Stations are sturdy, and designed for economical installation. station is available in the following operational and functional The K-270 Series provides a single action, break glass initi- station. It is available with normally open (N.O.), normally (N.C.) or combination N.O./N.C. contacts. The basic Series have screw terminals for field connection. The Series Manual Stations have 6 inch (150mm) wire The K-270P Series is a break glass, normally open pre-signal The pull of the lever sounds an alarm on all pre-signal devices. Inserting a key and turning it will initiate a evacuation alarm. Screw terminals are provided for field non-coded stations are designed for either flush or surface For flush mounting a 4 inch standard North American box with single gang plaster cover should be used. For mounting the K-270 Series or K-270P Series, use a cast steel box, or housing for weatherproof enclosure. 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0303 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 2021 Carrier rights reserved. These devices will not without electrical power. fires frequently cause pow- interruptions, we suggest you further safeguards with your fire protection specialist. Information models are fire alarm red with Aluminum Strips. They are marked in Case of Fire on the pull handle. of No. Contacts Connections Alarm Alarm Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Fire Alarm Fire Alarm 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0303 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1

Harsh Environment -7A, -8A -8A Series strobes are specially designed for use with compatible safety communication and control equipment to alert the impaired of a life safety event. Strobes are available 15 cd, 15/75 cd and 110 cd effective flash intensity. They fully compatible with Genesis signals. Series strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements 10 milliseconds other over a two-hour period) when used a separately-installed EG1M Signal Master, or GSA-CC1S Module, or when powered by suitably enabled power supplies and control panels. flash from 4MS Series strobes can be noticed from almost position in the room, corridor, or large open space. 4MS strobes are UL 1971 listed with both wall and ceiling cd ratings (see Specifications). This is useful in areas the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) permits ceiling- strobes. Series strobes are designed for 16 to 33 Vdc operation must be connected to signal circuits that output a constant pulsed) voltage. A diode is used to allow full signal circuit and polarized connections are made to terminals that up to #12 AWG (2.5mm wire. strobe front plate is of steel construction finished with durable epoxy polyester powder-coat paint. Series Features UL 1971-listed synchronizing strobe strobes synchronize to the latest UL 1971 when used with a synchronization source. Genesis-compatible Genesis and Integrity strobes on the same circuit meet 1971 synchronization requirements when used with an control module. Approved for public and private mode applications 1971-listed as signaling devices for the hearing impaired UL 1638-listed as protective visual signaling appliances. Rugged red or white steel front plate for outdoor or harsh environments. Rated for wall or ceiling installation Field changeable field markings language or standard marking is easily changed optional LKW and LKC series lens kits. Fits 4-inch square flush box for retrofit and renovation projects. UL/ULC rated outdoor option 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0305 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 The installation of visible signals are subject to national and local standards, codes, and ordinances. your Authority Having Jurisdiction for device installation requirements, application standards, and minimum performance specifications. The flash intensity of some visible signals may not be adequate alert or waken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates the intensity of strobe needed to awaken 90% of sleeping persons is 100 cd. Kidde recommends that strobes in sleeping rooms rated at least 110 cd. These devices will not operate without electrical power. As frequently cause power interruptions, further safeguards such as power supplies may be required. strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mounted notification appliances for the hearing impaired. codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise exceed specified levels, where occupants use hearing and in areas of public accommodation. Consult with Authority Having Jurisdiction for details. part of the Enhanced Integrity line of products, 4MS Series exceed UL synchronization requirements (within 10 other over a two-hour period) when used with a source. Synchronization is important because a portion of the population have a condition which may cause to become disoriented from multiple random flashes of light. strobes minimize this risk. strobes are fully compatible with Kidde Genesis signals. Current (RMS) Vdc Vfwr cd Vdc Vfwr cd Volts direct current, regulated and filtered Volts full wave rectified cd cd cd cd Draw Notes and Comments Current values are shown in mA. UL Nameplate Rating can vary from Typical Current due to measurement and instruments used. Kidde recommends using the Typical Current for system design including NAC Power Supply loading and voltage drop calculations.

Speaker and Series Speakers and Speaker-Strobes are designed for broad- high quality, integrated, emergency voice communications, well as alert and alarm tone signals. Use them in life safety especially to notify the hearing impaired and where people are expected such as in hotels, malls, airports, and other public buildings. speakers are shipped complete with a Blocking to permit electrical supervision of the audio distribu- circuit. Models for 25 Vrms and 70 Vrms circuits are available. mylar speaker with sealed back construction provides extra and improved audibility. Wattage taps from 1/4W to 2W maximum on-site flexibility. rugged plastic housing is available with a red or white finish. With its ingenious mounting sub-plate, Integrity is held in place with a single screw ensuring a quick, attractive A separate trim plate is not required for flush mount- flash from Kidde strobes will be noticed from almost any posi- in the room, corridor, or large open space. Kidde strobes are listed with both wall and ceiling cd intensity ratings (see This is useful in areas where the Authority Having (AHJ) permits ceiling mount strobes. Features UL 1971-listed synchronizing strobe strobes synchronize to the latest UL 1971 require- when used with a synchronization source. Genesis-compatible Genesis and Integrity strobes on the same circuit meet UL synchronization requirements when used with an external module. Approved for public and private mode applications 1971-listed as signaling devices for the hearing impaired UL 1638-listed as protective visual signaling appliances. High dBA Output efficency, sealed mylar speaker cone produces a loud 90 at 2 watts. Multiple Output Taps, 25 or 70 Volt Models to select for 1, or 2 watt operation. Integrity speak- are supplied with a DC Blocking Capacitor for audio circuit Field changeable field markings language or standard marking is easily changed optional LKW and LKC series lens kits. Easy Installation mount to standard North American 4 square box with extension ring (USA only). Integrity universal mounting allows it to be wired and then left hanging free for easy and testing before it is fastened to the electrical box. 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0315 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 The installation of visible and audible signals are subject to national and local standards, codes, and ordinances. your Authority Having Jurisdiction for device installation requirements, application standards, and minimum performance specifications. strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mounted or public-mode notification appliances for the hearing Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambi- noise conditions exceed specified levels, where occupants hearing protection, and in areas of public accommodation. with your Authority Having Jurisdiction for details. part of the Enhanced Integrity line of products, INT Series exceed UL synchronization requirements (within 10 mil- other over a two-hour period) when used with a syn- source. Synchronization is important in order to avoid sensitivity. strobes are fully compatible with Kidde Genesis signals. The flash intensity of some visible signals may not be adequate alert or waken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates the intensity of strobe needed to awaken 90% of sleeping persons is 100 cd. Kidde recommends that strobes in sleeping rooms rated at at least 110 cd. These devices will not operate without electrical power. As frequently cause power interruptions, further safeguards such as power supplies may be required. Integrity speakers include DC blocking capacitor to electrical supervision of audio distribution circuit. for 25 VRMS and 70 circuits are available. The speaker with its sealed construction provides durability and improved Wattage taps from W to 15 W provide on-

Re-entrant and Series Integrity Series life safety and mass notification/emergency (ECS/MNS) re-entrant speakers and speaker- are high quality appliances for emergency voice communi- as well as alert and alarm tone signals. rugged plastic housing is made from durable and fire re- high impact plastic with a slightly textured surface. Hous- are rated for outdoor use and are available in red or white. ingenious mounting plate firmly holds the device in place a single screw. This ensures quick and attractive installation. separate trim plate is not required. Speaker terminals accept up #12 AWG (2.5mm wire for polarized connections. Strobe con- are made to color-coded wire leads. safety strobes are shipped with standard wall mount style FIRE markings. Where ceiling orientation, other languages, or dif- lens markings are required, Kidde offers optional LKW and series Lens Marking Kits. These optional lens markings simply on to the strobe. Consult Kidde for availability of special lens strobes are designed for 16 to 33 Vdc operation and be connected to signal circuits that output a constant (not voltage. A diode is used to allow full signal circuit supervi- Features UL 1971-listed synchronizing strobe strobes synchronize to the latest UL 1971 require- when used with a synchronization source. Genesis-compatible Genesis and Integrity strobes on the same circuit meet UL synchronization requirements when used with an external module. Listed for public and private mode applications 1971-listed as signaling devices for the hearing impaired UL 1638-listed as protective visual signaling appliances. 98 dBA Output efficency driver produces a loud 98 dBA at 15 watts. Multiple Output Taps, 25 or 70 Volt Models to select for 2, 4, 8, and 15 watt operation. Integrity are supplied with a DC Blocking Capacitor for audio supervision. Outdoor rated red or white Noryl front plate is ideal for outdoor, indus- or harsh environments. Field changeable field markings language or standard marking is easily changed optional LKW (wall orientation) and LKC (ceiling orienta- lens kits. 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0317 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 The installation of visible and audible signals are subject to national and local standards, codes, and ordinances. your Authority Having Jurisdiction for device installation requirements, application standards, and minimum performance specifications. Integrity speakers include a DC blocking capacitor to allow supervision of the audio distribution circuit. Models for VRMS and 70 VRMS circuits are available. Wattage taps from 2 to 15 W provide on-site suggested sound pres- level for each signal- zone used with alert or signals is a minimum 15 dB above the average sound level or 5 dB the maximum sound having a duration of at 60 seconds, whichever greater. This is measured 5 (1.5 m) above the floor. (1.5m) Radius (3.05m) Radius Sound Output Distribution the distance from signal to the ear will theo- cause a 6dB reduc- in the received sound level. The actual ef- depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the space. the power output of a device (e.g.: a speaker from 1W to will increase the sound pressure level by 3dBA. measured in anechoic clear strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall- or mounted public-mode notification appliances for the hearing Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambi- noise conditions exceed specified levels, where occupants hearing protection, and in areas of public accommodation. with your Authority Having Jurisdiction for details. part of the Enhanced Integrity line of products, INT Series exceed UL synchronization requirements (within10 over a two-hour period) when used with a source. Synchronization is im

Fire Alarm Bells Features Vibrating and single stroke 6 inch (150mm), 8 inch (200mm), 10 inch (250mm) sizes Red or gray finish Rugged compact mechanism Heavy duty cast housing Low power drain Wide voltage selection Indoor or weatherproof Fire Alarm Bells are specially designed for fire alarm applica- The gongs are made of selected alloy steel to give the loud, tones necessary in fire alarm systems. gong sizes are available to overcome different ambient noise Fire Alarm Bells are of the underdome type with heavy duty Each bell is supplied with a mounting plate that fits standard single-gang opening (see Installation Data). For application Kidde offers an optional surface weath- back box. Refer to the Specification chart for applicability cata-log number of the weatherproof back box for the respec- bell. Standard gong and housing furnished gray with red Optional red finish available. Add Suffix to Catalog 438 and 439 Series Bells shown below are FM approved. 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0333 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 Nos. 438D and 439D 6 and 10 Bells that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 Carrier rights reserved. These devices will not op- without electrical power. As fires cause power interruptions, we you discuss further safeguards your local fire protection specialist. recommends that these Fire Alarm always be installed in accordance the latest recognized editions of and local codes. & Ordering Information @ ft Vdc Vac Vac Vdc Vdc Vac Vdc No. (250mm) Stroke, Diode (150mm) Diode (250mm) Diode (150mm) Diode (250mm) Diode (200mm) Diode (200mm) Diode (150mm) (250mm) 439D-6AWC Diode, Red, ULC Vdc Diode, Red, ULC Vdc Accessories surface mount box, grey. C/w gasket. 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0333 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2

Temporal Horns Horn-strobes Series temporal horns and temporal horn-strobes are specially for use with compatible life safety communication and equipment to alert occupants of a life safety event. The emits a piercing low frequency sound that is easily heard moderate ambient noise levels. The flash from its strobe be noticed from almost any position in the room, corridor, or open space. rugged plastic housing is made from durable and fire high impact plastic with a slightly textured surface. Its mounting plate firmly holds the device in place with a screw. A separate trim plate is not required. Terminals ac- up to #12 AWG (2.5mm wire for polarized connections. are shipped with standard wall mount style lens Where ceiling orientation, other languages, or different markings are required, LKW and LKC series Lens Marking are also available. These optional lens markings simply snap to the strobe. horns and horn-strobes are designed for 16 to 33 Vdc and must be connected to signal circuits that output a (not pulsed) voltage. A diode is used to allow full signal supervision. Features UL 1971-listed synchronizing strobe strobes synchronize to the latest UL 1971 require- when used with a synchronization source. Adjustable Audible Output temporal or continuous tones, and High setting for 98 output or Low setting for 94 dBA sound output. Genesis-compatible Genesis and Integrity strobes on the same circuit meet UL synchronization requirements when used with an external module. Approved for public and private mode applications 1971-listed as signaling devices for the hearing impaired UL 1638-listed as protective visual signaling appliances. Durable red or white Noryl front plate for outdoor, industrial or harsh environments. Field changeable field markings language or standard marking is easily changed optional LKW and LKC series lens kits. Easy Installation mount to standard North American 4 square or two- box. Integrity universal mounting plate allows it to be and then left hanging free for easy inspection and testing it is fastened to the electrical box. 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0341 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 The installation of visible and audible signals are subject to national and local standards, codes, and ordinances. your Authority Having Jurisdiction for device installation requirements, application standards, and minimum performance specifications. installation, the horn is configured for steady or temporal signal and either low (94 dBA) or high (98 dBA) output. When output is selected all horns on a common two-wire are self-synchronized (see specifications). External control are not required for audible synchronization. sound pressure level for each signaling zone used with or alarm signals is at least 15dB above the average ambi- sound level, or 5dB above the maximum sound level having a of at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater, measured (1.5m) above the floor. The average ambient sound level is the A-weighted sound pressure measured over a 24-hour period. the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically result a 6 dB reduction of the received sound pressure level. The actual depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the space. A 3 difference represents a barely noticeable change in volume. are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mounted public- notification appliances for the hearing impaired. Prevailing require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions specified levels, where occupants use hearing protection, in areas of public accommodation. Consult with your Authority Jurisdiction for details. part of the Enhanced Integrity line of products, INT Series exceed UL synchronization requirements (within 10 mil- other over a two-hour period) when used with a syn- source. Synchronization is important in order to avoid sensitivity. strobes are fully compatible with Genesis Series signals. The flash intensity of some visible signals may not be adequa

Synchronized MS-8A Series strobes are specially designed for use with compatible safety communication and control equipment to alert the hear- impaired of a life safety event. Strobes are available with 15/75 and 110 cd effective flash intensity. They are fully compatible Genesis signals. are shipped with standard wall mount style lens Where ceiling mount, other languages, or different lens are required, Kidde offers optional LKW and LKC series Marking Kits. These optional lens markings simply snap on the strobe. Series strobes are designed for 16 to 33 Vdc operation and be connected to signal circuits that output a constant (not voltage. A diode is used to allow full signal circuit supervi- and polarized connections are made to terminals that accept to #12 AWG (2.5mm wire. strobe housing/front plate is finished in red or white and is from durable and fire retardant, high impact plastic with a textured surface. Features UL 1971-listed synchronizing strobe strobes synchronize to the latest UL 1971 require- when used with a synchronization source. Genesis-compatible Genesis and Integrity strobes on the same circuit meet UL synchronization requirements when used with an external module. Approved for public and private mode applications 1971-listed as signaling devices for the hearing impaired UL 1638-listed as protective visual signaling appliances. Rated for wall or ceiling installation Field changeable field markings language or standard marking is easily changed optional LKW and LKC series lens kits. Screw terminal wire connection terminals speed installation and accept up to #12 AWG wire. Fits one-gang flush box for retrofit and renovation projects. Optional color- surface boxes available. 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0369 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 The installation of visible and audible signals are subject to national and local standards, codes, and ordinances. your Authority Having Jurisdiction for device installation requirements, application standards, and minimum performance specifications. are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mounted public- notification appliances for the hearing impaired. Prevailing require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions specified levels, where occupants use hearing protection, in areas of public accommodation. Consult with your Authority Jurisdiction for details. part of the Enhanced Integrity line of products, MS Series exceed UL synchronization requirements (within 10 mil- other over a two-hour period) when used with a syn- source. Synchronization is important in order to avoid sensitivity. strobes are fully compatible with Genesis Series signals. The flash intensity of some visible signals may not be adequate alert or waken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates the intensity of strobe needed to awaken 90% of sleeping persons is 100 cd. Kidde recommends that strobes in sleeping rooms rated at at least 110 cd. These devices will not operate without electrical power. As frequently cause power interruptions, further safeguards such as power supplies may be required. cd (-5A) Series Strobes Output and Mounting models fit to a standard flush mounted, North American one- electrical box, two inch (51mm) deep minimum. Optional indoor surface-mount boxes are available. Strobes cd (-5A) Series Strobes cd (-3A) Series Strobes be connected to signal circuits which output a constant (not voltage. Kidde recommends that these strobes always installed in accordance with the latest recognized edition of and local fire alarm codes. cd (-7A) Series Strobes Output Output Output e grees e grees e grees Distribution Patterns 1971 WALL MOUNTED STROBE LIGHT OUTPUT cd (-7A) Series Strobes cd (-4A) Series Strobes cd (-3A) Series Strobes cd (-8A) Series Strobes cd (-4A) Series Strobes Output Output e grees e gre

Hazardous location alarm station XAL53 is an extremely rugged double-action fire alarm station for hazardous locations. The device is activated by lifting front cover and pulling down the ring. This two-step process unintentional operation. station is reset by depressing the exposed shaft and returning cover plate to its original position. Features Copper-free aluminum alloy construction NPT feed-through conduit openings Red textured powder epoxy paint finish provides high visibility Normally open and normally closed contacts 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0371 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 fire alarm stations are suitable for areas that are hazardous due to the presence of gases or vapors, combustible dusts, or easily-ignitable fibers or flyings. Install petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, storage areas, and other pro- facilities where hazardous substances are handled or stored and in areas where control of an alarm or signal circuit is required. that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 2020 Carrier rights reserved. classifications Class I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups C and D Class II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups E, F and G Class III NEMA Type 7, Groups C and D NEMA Type 9, Groups E, F and G Information Number Location Fire Alarm Station Wt., lb. (kg.) (4.5) 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0371 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1

Horn/Siren Series series Duotronic signals are 24 Vdc diode-polarized, duty, high-decibel signaling appliances for use in fire alarm where a supervised signal is required. Colored sage 5520D Series signals will finction as either a horn or siren by an internal tamper-proof switch. 5520D Horn/Siren has no moving parts or contacts to wear It requires no maintenance or lubrication. The horn/siren oper- with very low current consumption and does not require extra on start-up. The horn predominant frequency is 1.1 KHz. horn output is selected, the frequency rises and falls from to 3000 Hz every 3 seconds. mounted, the horn/siren switch is tamperproof. The horn is for coded applications, while the siren is not. The 5520D can be made suitable for outdoor weatherproof applications adding the catalog number 349 Backbox. Features No moving parts High dB output Suitable for coded signals (horn mode only) Swivel/adjustable mounting Outdoor/weatherproof option Diode polarized Low current draw, no inrush current Mounts to one-gang opening signals signals are ideal for indoor or outdoor applications schools, factories, commercial occupancies, and lumber They can be used where standard bells or horns are not particularly in areas of high noise level. The unit will as a Horn or Siren with just the flick of a switch. 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0391 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Series signals include a universal mounting plate that permits mounting to a single gang, 3 3 or 4-inch octagon outlet box, or a 4-inch square box. It also be installed without a box directly to the wall or ceiling. The megaphone may be through 180 horizontally and 90 vertically. All wiring is made to colour-coded leads attached to a quick-disconnect plug. When complete, the device just plugs-in is locked to the mounting plate with a set screw. For weatherproof installations, use a No. 349 back box, ordered separately. that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 2020 Carrier rights reserved. Install this device in accordance the supplied installation instructions, applicable editions of the NFPA codes standards, and the Canadian Electrical (Part 1, Section 32), CAN/ULC- Standard for the Installation of Fire Systems, and in accordance with local authorities having jurisdiction. These devices will not operate electrical power. As fires frequently power interruptions, we suggest discuss further safeguards with your protection specialists. Operating Voltage Draw Pressure Output Characteristic Characteristic Connections – 24 Vdc mA 114 dBA at 10 ft (3m); Siren 112 dBA at 10 ft (3m) 1.1 KHz (Suitable for coded signals) and falls 600 to 1300 Hz every three seconds suitable for coded signals) wire leads with quick-disconnect plug gray enamel ULC, FM Information No. Combination – 24 Vdc Backbox Wt. lb (11.5kg) (0.2kg) 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0391 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1

Hazardous Horns & 74339U and 889D hazardous location horns are diode-polarized, duty, high decibel vibrating horns intended for use in life systems in hazardous (classified) locations. These horns be mounted to any solid surface using two bolts (by others). Features Diode polarized Corrosion resistant heat flowed epoxy finish red Low current draw unit is supplied with a sealing fitting for -14 National Taper (NPT) nipple, and wire leads for the electrical connec- to the life safety system notification appliance circuit. and 889D hazardous location horns are UL-listed for instal- in the following classified locations: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, and D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups E, F, and G Class III hazardous locations, for Div. 1 and 2 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0397 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 2020 Carrier rights reserved. Number Voltage Current output Vac dBA measured in an anechoic chamber an weighted decibel scale at 10 ft (3m) Vdc Information location horn 120 Vac location 24 Vdc Wt. lb. (4.1 kg.) 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0397 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1

Hazardous Horns & 74339U and 889D hazardous location horns are diode-polarized, duty, high decibel vibrating horns intended for use in life systems in hazardous (classified) locations. These horns be mounted to any solid surface using two bolts (by others). Features Diode polarized Corrosion resistant heat flowed epoxy finish red Low current draw unit is supplied with a sealing fitting for -14 National Taper (NPT) nipple, and wire leads for the electrical connec- to the life safety system notification appliance circuit. and 889D hazardous location horns are UL-listed for instal- in the following classified locations: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, and D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups E, F, and G Class III hazardous locations, for Div. 1 and 2 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0397 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 2020 Carrier rights reserved. Number Voltage Current output Vac dBA measured in an anechoic chamber an weighted decibel scale at 10 ft (3m) Vdc Information location horn 120 Vac location 24 Vdc Wt. lb. (4.1 kg.) 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0397 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1

Hazardous Bells & 439DEX-AW series of hazardous location bells are diode-polarized, heavy fire bells for use in life safety applications where a diode signal is required. location bells are available with 6-inch (152 mm), (203 mm) or 10 inch (254mm) gongs, for either 120 Vac or Vdc operation. They can be mounted to any solid surface using 3/8 inch (10 mm) bolts and the supplied mounting brackets or a rigid conduit. The integral explosion-proof housing is mechan- terminated to accept a standard -14 National Pipe (NPT) nipple. Features Diode polarized 6″, 8″, and 10″ gong sizes Low power drain for efficient operation over long wire runs Completely assembled series of hazardous location bells are UL-listed for installa- in the following classified locations: Class I groups B, C and D Class II groups E, F and G Class III hazardous locations, for Div. 1 and 2 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0399 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 .1 that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 2020 Carrier rights reserved. Dimensions 1/16 1/16 1/16 13/16 1/4 3/8 5/8 5/8 Voltage Current output Vac (RMS) dBA measured in an anechoic chamber an weighted decibel scale at 10 ft (3m) Vdc Information Number Description (152 mm) Hazardous Location Bell 24 Vdc, Gray (152 mm) Hazardous Location Bell 24 Vdc, Red (203 mm) Hazardous Location Bell 24 Vdc, Gray (203 mm) Hazardous Location Bell 24 Vdc, Red (254 mm) Hazardous Location Bell 24 Vdc, Gray (254 mm) Hazardous Location Bell 24 Vdc, Red Wt. (kg.) (3.6) (3.6) (4.5) (4.5) (5.4) (5.4) 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0399 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1

Electromagnetic Holders Door Holders are ruggedly constructed and designed. The housing is finished with an aluminum durable baked polyester powder paint. The floor or wall sec- houses the electromagnet while the contact plate attaches to door. The contact plate has a shock absorbing nylon (swivel) which allows the plate to adjust to any door angle. Floor units available in single-door or double-door (back to back) versions. units are available in flush or surface mounted versions. releases should be installed wherever doors may be effec- used to confine smoke and fire, or where the release of a self- door from a remote location is desirable for other reasons. operation is an inherent feature of Kidde door holder-re- If power fails, doors are released automatically but may be or closed manually at any time. All units are free of moving are self-contained and require no maintenance. door holder-releases have a holding force of approximately to 25 Lbf (66 to 111N). The device holds a door open while en- When de-energized by a relay controlled by the fire alarm or other switch, the door is released to a closed position, the spread of smoke and flames. Electromagnetic door should be used and installed in accordance with local Codes and Standards. Features Floor and wall mounted styles Low power consumption AC/DC models Completely silent operation 25 Lbf (111N) nominal holding force Adjustable, swivel contact plate Models Mounted: electromagnet portion consists of a floor plate and a floor which when installed with gaskets provided, form a electrical junction box. Incoming conduit connects into floor plate. mounted units are available with one (Cat. No. 1501) or two No. 1502) magnet faces for holding a single door or two back to back. Mounted: mounted models are available in flush, semi-flush and surface configurations. Flush and semi-flush models are de- for concealed wiring applications and mount on standard gang (2 x 4 inch) outlet boxes. Surface mounted models on a surface adaptor housing (junction box), which is 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0421 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Flush Wall Mounted (Long Catch Plate) Flush Wall Mounted (Short Catch Plate) Floor Mounted (Single Door) Surface Wall Mounted max. /6.37″ min. mm max. /161.8 mm min.) Floor Mounted (Double Door) Completely Flush Wall Mounted max. /8.37″ min. mm max. /212.6 mm min.) Plate Extensions the extension rods are included. The end pieces are included the doorholders or can be ordered separately. max. /6.37″ min. mm max. /161.8 mm min.) mm) mm) mm) mm) max. /8.37″ min. mm max. /212.6 mm min.) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) 2 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0421 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Vac 60 Hz Vdc 120 Vac 60 Hz No. is a double unit which draws .015 per side Mounted (Single Door) Mounted (Double Door) Wall Mounted (Long Catch Plate) Wall Mounted (Short Catch Plate) Wall Mounted Flush Wall Mounted Information No. Mounted (Single Door) Mounted (Double Door) Wall Mounted (Long Catch Plate) Wall Mounted (Short Catch Plate) Wall Mounted Flush Wall Mounted plate extension assembly, 1.5 plate extension assembly, 2.5 plate extension assembly (5.25 to 7.5 inches) plate extension assembly (7.5 to 12 inches) armature – short (for use with 1501, 1502, 1505, 1508 and 1509 door holders)

Bell-Strobe Plate Series Series c/w 439 – 6 inch Bell ordered separately) Series Bell-Strobe Plates are specially designed for use with life safety communication and control equipment alert the hearing impaired of a life safety event. Strobes are with 15 cd, 15/75 cd, 30 cd, and 110 cd effective flash They are fully compatible with Genesis signals. part of the Enhanced Integrity line of products, 403 series exceed UL synchronization requirements (within 10 other over a two-hour period) when used with a EG1M Signal Master or GSA-CC1S Synchro- Module. flash from 403 series strobes can be noticed from almost any in the room, corridor, or large open space. Light disper- is controlled with a specially shaped reflector that directs a of 12 per cent of rated light output above and below the and a minimum of 25 per cent of rated light straight out sides. Series strobes are designed for 16 to 33 Vdc operation and be connected to signal circuits that output a constant (not voltage. A diode is used to allow full signal circuit supervi- and polarized connections are made to 7 (175 mm) wire rugged steel plate with smooth bevelled edges is finished in a high quality, baked red epoxy polyester powder-coat. Features Converts 439 model bells for renovation work; easily adapts to existing or new bells conversion into Bell/Strobes. Mounts to North American two-gang, octagon, and 4-inch square boxes. UL 1971-listed synchronizing strobe Series strobes synchronize to the latest UL 1971 require- when used with an external control source. Genesis-compatible Genesis and Integrity strobes on the same circuit meet UL synchronization requirements when used with an external module. Approved for public and private mode applications 1971-listed as signaling devices for the hearing impaired UL 1638-listed as protective visual signaling appliances. Rugged steel plate CRS plate with durable baked red epoxy polyester finish. Field changeable field markings language or standard marking is easily changed optional LKW series lens kits. 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0441 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 The installation of visible and audible signals are subject to national and local standards, codes, and ordinances. your Authority Having Jurisdiction for device installation requirements, application standards, and minimum performance specifications. sound pressure levels in each signaling zone for alarm alert signals are at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound or 5 dB above the maximum sound level having a duration at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater, measured 1500mm the floor. The average ambient sound level is the RMS, sound pressure measured over a 24-hour period. strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mounted notification appliances for the hearing impaired. Prevail- codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions specified levels, where occupants use hearing protection, in areas of public accommodation. Consult with your Authority Jurisdiction for details. part of the Enhanced Integrity line of products, 403 Series exceed UL synchronization requirements (within 10 mil- other over a two-hour period) when used with a syn- source. Synchronization is important in order to avoid sensitivity. strobes are fully compatible with Kidde Genesis Series The flash intensity of some visible signals may not be adequate alert or waken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates the intensity of strobe needed to awaken 90% of sleeping persons is 100 cd. Kidde recommends that strobes in sleeping rooms rated at at least 110 cd. These devices will not operate without electrical power. As frequently cause power interruptions, further safeguards such as power supplies may be required. Wiring SIGNAL CIRCUIT bell and strobe can be connected to the same signal circuit (as shown) if the is configured for continuous signal operation. Electrical supervision requires wire run to be broken at each device. not loop signal circuit field wir

S5389 or more pending. Features Compatible with Genesis and Enhanced Integrity products Provides UL 1971 compliant synchronization for all strobes on same circuit Delivers independent horn control for horn-strobes over two- Genesis circuits. Two methods of horn control available: NAC signal silence or normally-closed contact. Convenient snap-on or single-gang remote models Only one module required per circuit 3 amp rating (EG1M-RM only) Master Series Signal Master is a simple-to-use accessory that adds en- features to Genesis strobes and horn-strobes as well Enhanced Integrity strobes. It is a dual-purpose module that precision synchronization for connected strobes, and control for connected Genesis horns over a single of wires. Genesis and Enhanced Integrity strobes are self-synchronizing. installed with the Signal Master, strobe flashes from devices the same circuit are synchronized to within 10 milliseconds of other indefinitely. This exceeds the latest UL 1971 require- in effect as of November 2000, which specify this level of over only two hours. installed with Genesis horn-strobes, the Signal Master independent horn control (on, off, and coded signals) over single pair of wires. Two methods of horn control are available: NAC signal silence; or, normally-closed contact. Both may be used to silence horns without turning off strobes the same circuit. Note: independent horn control is available for only. EG1-P Series steady horns are not compatible this feature. mounting options ensure trouble-free installation of the Signal Module. The piggyback model doesn require separate electrical box. It simply snaps to the back of the first on the circuit. The remote mount model mounts in a North 2 inch (64 mm) deep one-gang box. It may also be to any GSA-MP mounting plate, or directly to the rails inside MIRBPS Remote Booster Power Supply cabinets. 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0545 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 B Wiring Strobes… Strobes or Enhanced Integrity Strobes Master silence and synchronization with two NACs… Horn-Strobes Horn-Strobes Signal Master next device end of line 1 Input only) 2 Input coded) Master mount Master mount Master Only one Signal is required for horn, strobe, or circuit. The strobe circuit of Signal Master a dedicated Strobe NAC must be con- in alarm mode. The Horn circuit of the Master can be with other Signal Master on one NAC. When determin- allowable wire refer to rating of Genesis Signal the signaling and the control specifications. synchronization, allowable between two devices in the viewing area is Ohms. Silence and synchronization with one NAC and one dry contact… Horn-Strobes Horn-Strobes Signal Master next device end of line CR must be installed within three feet of the G1M. 1 Input only) Loop 1 Input Master 3 2 1 next device or resistor 3 2 1 mount Master in (+) in (-) out (+) out (-) CR, and wire nut be located in the same or Booster Power Supply cabinet. Horn-Strobes with one NAC… Horn-Strobes Master mount Master Integrity Horn-strobes and Speaker-strobes… mount Master 2 of 4 Integrity Speaker-Strobes I

Field Configurable Strobes Series life safety and mass notification/emergency communica- (ECS/MNS) ceiling strobes are small, compact, and attractive emergency signaling devices. Protruding no more than 1.6 mm) from the ceiling, Genesis strobes blend with any decor. Features Field configurable no need to remove the device! 15/30/75/95 cd and 95/115/150/177 cd clear strobe lens models available Switch settings remain visible even after the unit is installed to patented breakthrough technology, Kidde Genesis do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. an exclusive cavity design conditions light to produce highly controlled distribution pattern. Significant development employing this new technology have given rise to a new in strobe performance FullLight technology. strobe technology produces a smooth light distribution without the spikes and voids characteristic of specular This ensures the entire coverage area receives consis- illumination from the strobe flash. As a result, Genesis strobes FullLight technology go well beyond the minimum UL-required pattern, significantly exceeding UL-1971 and ULC-S526 distribution requirements. on the model, clear lens Genesis ceiling strobes fea- 15 to 95, or 95 to 177 candela output (see ordering informa- which is selectable with a conveniently-located switch. The output setting remains clearly visible even after final instal- yet it is locked in place to prevent unauthorized movement installation. ECS/MNS appliances offer emergency signaling with amber or blue lenses. They are ideal for applications that re- differentiation between life safety and mass notification alerts. ECS/MNS models available Amber and blue lens models available. See Ordering Information for details. Unique low-profile design 30 per cent slimmer profile than comparable signals Attractive appearance No visible mounting screws Available with white or red housings Easy to install Fits all standard 4 square electrical boxes with plenty of #18 to #12 AWG terminals ideal for long runs or existing wiring behind the signal for extra wire no extension ring or plate needed Unparalleled performance Exclusive FullLight strobe technology produces the industry most even light distribution Precision timing electronics meet tough synchronizing standards for strobes Low current draw minimizes system overhead Approved for public and private mode applications UL 1971-listed as signaling devices for the hearing impaired UL 1638-listed as protective visual signaling appliances UL/ULC listed for ceiling or wall use 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0557 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 2.1 strobes are UL 1971 or 1638 listed for indoor use. Prevailing require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions specified levels, where occupants use hearing protection, in areas of public accommodation. Consult with your Authority Jurisdiction for details. Genesis strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period) when used with a source. Synchronization for multiple strobe lights a single field of view is required. Applications ECS/MNS appliances bring the same high-performance life features and unobtrusive design to mass notification applica- Available as standard units with clear, amber or blue lenses optional ALERT markings, they are ideal for applications that differentiation between life safety and ECS/MNS signals. are also available (special order) with red or green lenses. models are intended for indoor applications only. Strobes to any flush North-American 4 square electrical box, 21/8 mm) deep. ceiling strobes simply unlatch and twist to open. This access to mounting screws and the selectable candela The shallow depth of Genesis devices leaves ample room the signal for extra wiring. Once installed with the cover in

Field Configurable Horn Series or more patents pending. ceiling horn-strobes are small, compact, and attractive emergency signaling devices. Protruding no more 1.6 (41 mm), Genesis horn-strobes blend with any decor. to patented breakthrough technology, Kidde Genesis do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. an exclusive cavity design conditions light to produce highly controlled distribution pattern. Significant development employing this new technology have given rise to a new in strobe performance FullLight technology. strobe technology produces a smooth light distribution without the spikes and voids characteristic of specular This ensures the entire coverage area receives consis- illumination from the strobe flash. As a result, Genesis strobes FullLight technology go well beyond the minimum UL-required pattern. on the model, Genesis horn-strobes feature 15 to 95, 95 to 177 candela output (see ordering information), which is with a conveniently-located switch on the front of the The candela output setting is clearly visible even after final yet it remains locked in place to prevent unauthorized after installation. horn-strobes feature textured housings in architecturally neu- white or eye-catching fire alarm red. An ingenious iconographic indicates the purpose of the device. This universal symbol code-compliant and is easily recognized by all building occu- regardless of what language they speak. Models with are also available. Features Field configurable no need to remove the device 15/30/75/95 cd and 95/115/150/177 cd models available Switch settings remain visible even after the unit is installed Low/high dB settings Unique low-profile design 30 per cent slimmer profile than comparable signals No visible mounting screws Available with white or red housings Easy to install behind the signal for extra wire no extension ring or Fits all standard 4 square electrical boxes with plenty of trim plate needed Pre-assembled with captive hardware no loose pieces #18 to #12 AWG terminals ideal for long runs or existing wiring Unparalleled performance Exclusive FullLight strobe technology produces the industry most even light distribution Single high-efficiency microprocessor controls both horn and strobe Low current draw minimizes system overhead Independent horn control provided over a single pair of wires Highly regulated in-rush current allows the maximum number of strobes on a circuit 100 dB peak multiple frequency tone improves wall penetration 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0559 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 and Mounting models are intended for indoor wall or ceiling applications Horn-strobes mount to any flush North-American 4 square box. ceiling horn-strobes simply unlatch and twist to open. gains access to mounting screws and the selectable candela The shallow depth of Genesis devices leaves ample room the signal for extra wiring. Once installed with the cover in no mounting screws are visible. recommends that these fire alarm horn-strobes always installed in accordance with the latest recognized edition of and local fire alarm codes. Configuration on the model, Genesis horn-strobes may be set for 15 95, or 95 to 177 candela output (see ordering information). The setting is changed by simply opening the device and sliding switch to the desired setting. The horn-strobe does not have be removed to change the output setting. The setting remains through a small window on the front of the device after the is closed. horn-strobe comes factory set for high dB output. Low dB may be selected by cutting a jumper on the circuit board. reduces the output by about 5 dB. wiring terminals accommodate #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm 2.5 mm wiring. Horn/strobes are interconnected with a single

Reflective Beam Detector Smoke EC-50R/-100R comprises a transmitter and receiver in a enclosure and is usually installed between 19 inches and inches below the ceiling. The transmitter emits an invisible light beam that is reflected via a prism mounted directly and with a clear line of sight. The reflected infrared light detected by the receiver and analyzed. Smoke in the beam path reduce the received infrared light proportionally to the density the smoke. The detector analyzes this attenuation or obscura- of light and acts accordingly. Detectors are typically mounted feet (9.14 m) of a potential fire source. Consult your Having Jurisdiction for spacing requirements specific to locality. Features Coverage: 50R range 15 -160 ft (4.6 – 48.8 m); range 160- 330 ft (48.8 – 100 m) Microprocessor controlled Automatic drift compensation Simple alignment Selectable alarm thresholds 24 Vdc operating voltage Latching or non-latching operation Low current consumption Optional Ground Level Test Station Station Threshold: Alarm thresholds of 25%, 35% and 50% can be selected to suit the environment, with 25% most sensitive setting. The factory default setting is 35 percent is used for most typical applications. If the received infrared reduces to below the selected threshold for approximately seconds, the fire relay is activated. Alarm: There are two modes to the operation of the fire Auto reset mode will reset the fire relay 5 seconds after the infrared signal has recovered to a level above the Alarm Latching mode holds the fire relay active indefinitely an Alarm condition has occurred. To clear the latched mode, must be removed from the Detector for a minimum of 5 Alarm: If the infrared beam is obscured rapidly to a level 90% or greater for approximately 10 seconds, the Trouble relay activated. Typical causes of trouble include an object being in the beam path, transmitter failure, loss of the prism, or misalignment of the detector. The Trouble relay will reset 2 seconds of the trouble being cleared. Gain Control (AGC): The Detector monitors long degradation of signal strength caused by component aging build up of dirt on optical surfaces. By comparing the received signal against a standard every 15 minutes, the detec- automatically compensates for signal differences of less than When the detector is showing AGC fault, detector is capable of generating an alarm, and will display both Alarm Trouble indications. 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0560 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Stations optional Ground Level Test Station facilitates testing of a connect- detector from safe and convenient location. The unit is key-oper- with a two-position Test/Run switch and includes two dedicated one for Alarm indication and one for Power indication. the test station key is inserted and turned to the Test the Power LED flashes to indicate that power is con- and that the 2-wire data link cable is correctly installed. several seconds in the test position, the test station initiates alarm at the detector head, which is indicated by the red on the detector and the Alarm LED on the test station. Test automatically times out after 20 seconds at which time the returns to standby mode, regardless of the test station position. between the test station and the detector is made means of a 2-wire data link cable. The test station requires a – 30 Vdc power connection. Filter: A test filter is supplied with the detector, which is used verify the alarm threshold. See the installation sheet for details testing and calibration. beam smoke detectors are ideal for large open areas as warehouses, hotel atriums, industrial plants and school infrared signal is projected out of the transmitter optics to the placed at the opposite end of the detection zone. The is reflected back to the receiver where it is analyzed for fire trouble. The EC-50R/-100R must be positioned correctly to the detection time. The maximum lateral distance either of the beam is found to be typically 30 feet (9.1 m) for satis- detection under flat ceiling

Field Configurable and Series appliances available clear or amber lenses. Genesis line of fire alarm and mass notification/emergency (ECS/MNS) signals are among the smallest, compact audible-visible life safety signaling devices in the About the size of a deck of playing cards, these devices are to blend with any decor. Features Unique low-profile design The most compact UL-1971/ULC-S526 listed strobe available Ultra-slim protrudes less than one inch Attractive appearance No visible mounting screws to patented breakthrough technology, Kidde Genesis do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. an exclusive cavity design conditions light to produce highly controlled distribution pattern. Significant development employing this new technology have given rise to a new in strobe performance FullLight technology. Four field-configurable options in one device Select 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd strobe output Select high (default) or low dB horn output Select temporal (default) or steady horn output Select public mode flash rate (default) or private mode temporal flash strobe technology produces a smooth light distribution without the spikes and voids characteristic of specular re- This ensures the entire coverage area receives consistent from the strobe flash. As a result, Genesis strobes with technology go well beyond the UL-1971 and ULC-S526 distribution requirements. strobes and horn-strobes offer selectable candela output means of a conveniently-located switch on the side of the Models are also available that offer fixed 15/75 cd output. candela output setting remains clearly visible even after final yet it stays locked in place to prevent unauthorized ECS/MNS appliances offer emergency signaling with or amber lenses and with optional ALERT housing labels. are ideal for applications that require differentiation between alarm and mass notification alerts. Fixed 15/75 cd model available ECS/MNS models available Easy to install Fits standard 1-gang electrical boxes no trim plate needed Optional trim plate accommodates oversized openings Pre-assembled with captive hardware #12 AWG terminals ideal for long runs or existing wiring Unparalleled performance Industry most even light distribution Meets tough synchronizing standards for strobes Single microprocessor controls both horn and strobe Independent horn control over a single pair of wires Highly regulated in-rush current Multiple frequency tone improves sound penetration Field-programmable temporal strobe output option 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0573 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mount- public-mode notification appliances for the hearing impaired. codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise exceed 105 dBA (87dBA in Canada), where occupants hearing protection, and in areas of public accommodation defined in the Americans with Disabilities Act (see application USA). horn-strobe signals must be installed in accordance guidelines established for strobe devices. Consult with your Having Jurisdiction for details. Genesis strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period) when used with a source. Synchronization is important in order to epileptic sensitivity. These devices will not operate without electrical power. As frequently cause power interruptions, further safeguards such as power supplies may be required. horn output reaches as high as 99 dB and features a multiple frequency tone that results in excellent sound and an unmistakable warning of danger. Horns may be for either coded or non-coded signal circuits. They can be set for low dB output with a jumper cut that reduces horn by about 5 dB. Horn-only models may be ceiling-mounted wa

Chimes & Series or more pending. Genesis line of signals are among the smallest, most compact emergency signaling devices in the world. About size of a deck of playing cards, these devices are designed to with any decor. to patented breakthrough technology, Kidde Genesis do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. an exclusive cavity design conditions light to produce highly controlled distribution pattern. Significant development employing this new technology have given rise to a new in strobe performance FullLight technology. strobe technology produces a smooth light distribution without the spikes and voids characteristic of specular This ensures the entire coverage area receives consistent from the strobe flash. As a result, Genesis strobes with technology go well beyond the minimum UL-required significantly exceeding UL-1971 light distribution require- strobes and chime-strobes offer 15 to 110 candela which is selectable with a conveniently-located switch on side of the device. The candela output setting remains clearly even after final installation, yet it stays locked in place to unauthorized tampering. signals feature textured housings in architecturally neutral white traditional fire red. An ingenious iconographic symbol indicates the of the device. This universal symbol is code-compliant and is recognized by all building occupants regardless of what language speak. Models with markings are also available. Features Unique low-profile design The most compact UL-1971 listed strobe available Ultra-slim protrudes less than one inch from the wall Attractive appearance No visible mounting screws Three field-configurable options in one device Select 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd strobe output Select non-coded (default), temporal, or coded (single- stroke) chime operation Select high (default) or low dB chime output Easy to install Fits standard 1-gang electrical boxes no trim plate needed Optional trim plate accommodates oversized openings Pre-assembled with captive hardware #12 AWG terminals ideal for long runs or existing wiring Unparalleled performance Single microprocessor controls both chime and strobe Chime produces a pleasing mellow tone Independent chime control over a single pair of wires Industry most even light distribution Meets tough synchronizing standards for strobes Low current draw minimizes system overhead Highly regulated in-rush current 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0574 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mounted notification appliances for the hearing impaired. Prevail- codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions specified levels, where occupants use hearing protection, in areas of public accommodation. Consult with your Authority Jurisdiction for details. Genesis strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements 10 milliseconds other over a two-hour period) when used a synchronization source. Synchronization is important in to avoid epileptic sensitivity. The flash intensity of some visible signals may not be adequate alert or waken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates the intensity of strobe needed to awaken 90% of sleeping persons is 100 cd. Kidde recommends that strobes in sleeping rooms rated at at least 110 cd. These devices will not operate without electrical power. As frequently cause power interruptions, further safeguards such as power supplies may be required. chimes produce a pleasing mellow tone. When steady voltage is applied, the chime automatically pulses 60 strokes per minute, or may be field-configured for temporal When installed with a GIM Signal Master Module, the chime also be field-configured for coded operation, which enables the output to match the rate that voltage is applied to the cir

Four-wire Duct Detector for tight spaces. than inches deep! SuperDuct smoke detectors are the most advanced and reliable devices in their class. Designed for easy installation superb reliability, SuperDuct represents the perfect balance of design and advanced technology. and stability are two features built into every Super- detector. SuperDuct features environmental compensation patented differential sensing. This achieves a level of stability reliability never before achieved for devices of this type. With sensing, SuperDuct sensors are immune from sensitiv- drift a common cause of false alarms. Every eight minutes SuperDuct sensor checks its environment for dirt, humidity conditions that normally interfere with sensor operation, and adjusts its sensitivity to compensate. The result is reliability and rock solid stability two features essen- to any duct smoke detection application. testing and diagnostics reveal some of the most ex- innovations built into SuperDuct. With the ingenious Super- remote test station, a sensitivity test can be performed at any from the safety and comfort of a maintenance office or utility Operated either by key or by magnet, the one-gang station performs alarm tests for detectors connected to a single Detectors may also be tested at the controller via a test or they can be tested individually in the field with a simple- magnetic test tool. Access to the magnetic reed switch not require the detector cover to be removed, so testing can performed quickly and easily. dedicated dirty/trouble LED on each unit offers immediate at-a- information even when the cover is closed. Features assembly Less than 2″ deep for easy installation PCB mounted photoelectric detector with on-board intelligence Environmental compensation with patented differential sensing -4 to 158 (-20 to 70 operating range 100 ft/min. to 4,000 ft/min air velocity rating Standard RJ45 modular interconnection Status LEDs remain visible through clear assembly cover Cover tamper reed switch for added security Standard sampling tube and mounting holes in tandem with the controller assembly, or remotely from it Sampling tubes install from front-side or back-side of housing Magnet-activated test/dirty/reset switch No need to open the detector for installation One controller for up to two detectors Standard connections for easy migration from other detectors 24 Vac, 24 Vdc, 120 Vac or 230 Vac operation Status LEDs remain visible through clear assembly cover Knockouts located on the bottom Alarm contact, trouble contact, and two 10 amp auxiliary contacts No special tools required for easy access to field connections Interconnect up to 15 controllers for multiple fan shut- down 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0583 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 smoke detection is ideally suited to HVAC applications early indication of combustion is required within the con- space of ventilation ductwork. detectors are usually installed on the supply duct after the air or in the return air stream prior to being diluted by outside air. detectors continually sample air flow in the HVAC duct initiate an alarm condition whenever smoke is detected. An is activated when the quantity (percent obscuration) of products in that air sample exceeds the detector setting. velocity in the duct as low as 100 ft/min. maintains adequate flow into the sensor smoke chamber through air-holes in the air tube and discharges through the exhaust tube. Su- air sampling tubes must be installed with the inlet holes the airstream. tubes may rotated in 45-de- increments so air-holes can be to allow the to be mounted in any angle rela- to the airflow. Overview detec- are engineered operate optimally the harsh en- condi- frequently found HVAC ductwork. before the detec- test the duct air temperature, hu

Two-wire Duct Detector Series is slim feature-rich alternative to bulky duct smoke Designed for easy installation and superb reliability, represents the perfect balance of practical design and technology. detectors feature a unique design that speeds instal- and simplifies maintenance. Removable dust filters, confor- coated circuit boards, and optional water-resistant gaskets contaminants away from components, ensuring years of service. When cleaning is required, the assemblies apart easily and snap back together in seconds. detectors use differential sensing to prevent gradual changes from triggering false alarms. A rapid in environmental conditions, such as smoke from a fire, the detector to automatically signal an alarm condition but and debris accumulated over time does not change alarm detector assembly cover provides easy access to the sensor, its wiring connections, sample and exhaust tube and the smoke chamber itself. Air enters the detector chamber through a sampling tube (ordered separately) extends into the duct and is directed back into the ventilation through an exhaust tube (included). The difference in air between the two tubes pulls the sampled air through the chamber. When a sufficient amount of smoke is detected the sensing chamber, the detector initiates an alarm. Features Sensor PCB mounted photoelectric detector with onboard intelligence Environmental compensation with differential sensing for reli- stable, and drift-free sensitivity Wide 0.79% to 2.46% obscuration/ft. smoke sensitivity assembly Less than 2″ deep for easy installation and applications where is tight -4 to 158 (-20 to 70 operating range with 100 ft/min. 4,000 ft/min air velocity rating assures reliability under harsh conditions Status LEDs remain visible through clear assembly cover Cover monitor switch for added security Standard sampling tube spacing for easy drop-in migration other detectors Sampling tube can be installed with or without the cover in and can be rotated in 45-degree increments to ensure alignment with duct airflow On-board Alarm, Trouble, and Dirty LEDs Magnet-activated test switch One Form C auxiliary alarm relay for controlling ancillary equip- (e.g., HVAC controls) Easy access to field connection terminals 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0585 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 .1 SuperDuct two-wire duct smoke detector is ideally suited to where early indication of combustion is required within confined space of ventilation ductwork. Its primary purpose to provide early warning of an impending fire and to prevent from circulating throughout the building. It is typically used detect smoke in the supply side of the HVAC system but can supervision of the return side as well. premises relay smoke smoke Test, Reset, and Alarm Stations Labor-saving Remote Test/Reset stations alarm testing and indication from the of a remote location. Tests can be quickly and safely without having climb to the roof. Magnetically-operated and one-gang models are available. SuperDuct detectors are also compat- with EC-LED remote alarm LEDs. Duct detectors have specific limitations. Duct detectors are not a for an open area smoke detector. Duct detectors are not a substitute early warning detection or a replacement for a building regular fire detec- system. Smoke detectors are not designed to detect toxic gases which can up to hazardous levels in some fires. These devices will not operate without power. As fires frequently cause power interruptions, Kidde suggests discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. relay in (22.1 cm) in (20.7 cm) in (19.7 cm) in cm) in (7.82 cm) detectors continually sample air flow in the HVAC duct initiate a

Fire Alarm Audio System Series 6235 ANS series of products is a collection of high-performance notification systems that provide voice evacuation capability meets the emergency voice alarm requirements of NFPA for UL listed fire alarm applications. ANS panels are available in 50, or 100 Watt models and include a microphone, amplifier, generator, digital message repeater (DMR), and supervisory self-contained systems offer robust field-configurable fea- and are supported by a wide range of accessory equipment provides application flexibility and reliable performance for and retrofit installations alike. panels and modules extend the range of the ANS sys- to meet the needs of demanding audio applications. Acces- equipment such as zone switchers and remote microphones the sophistication of high-end systems for a relatively low systems are ideal for use with Kidde fire alarm control panels emergency voice alarm service is required. Genesis speak- and speaker-strobes may be used with ANS audio systems to a clean and attractive appearance for voice audio applica- Features Meets NFPA 72 Emergency Voice Alarm requirements Easy to use custom configuration software Clean dead-front construction Integrated field recordable digital message player Twenty minute message capacity 25, 50, or 100 Watt models available Field selectable for either 25 or 70 Vrms speakers 120 VAC power supply and battery charger included Paging microphone overrides message and tone ANS25 and ANS100 systems are 520Hz compliant High reliability, low maintenance Fully supervised, UL listed Easy installation, operation, and configuration Built-in alarm and alert signals 24-hour backup capability 1 of 8 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0587 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 2.1 fire codes generally require voice evacuation systems in of assembly with over 300-person occupancy, in theatres more than one screen, and in buildings seven stories or ANS Series Audio Notification Systems represent an effec- and efficient solution for meeting these requirements. systems are ideal for new applications with fire control panels do not provide integrated audio functions. These audio also provide the opportunity to add voice evacuation ca- to existing fire alarm applications without replacing existing alarm control equipment. fire alarm control panel works in concert with the ANS audio providing all initiating circuitry and a signaling circuit that to the ANS. The ANS provides its own internal supervi- as well as supervision for its speaker lines. are reported back to the fire alarm control panel by means a supervisory circuit, which is connected to a matching EOLR the ANS. Internal failures and speaker line faults open a con- which the fire alarm control panel reports as an open fault on supervisory circuit. digital message repeater (DMR) is built into all ANS systems ordered without the DMR. Up to 20 minutes of custom can be uploaded in the field with the use of a laptop the ANSCONFSOFT1 configuration software. In addition, the from eight available alarm tones, automatic message AC fault report delay, and connected equipment settings all field-configurable. paging microphone is an integral component of the audio system. Removal of the microphone from the panel cause a Trouble condition. This is reported locally, as well as the fire alarm control panel. ANS panels include a 120 V, 60 Hz supply (standby batter- are required). Optionally, ANS panels can be powered with from the fire alarm control panel or a booster power supply. speaker-strobes are used, strobe power is provided by the alarm control panel or a booster power supply. Wiring 25, 50, 100 ALARM CONTROL PANEL POLARITY POWE R Circuit Must be steady to play Voice message – Power Limited – Power Limited B Wiring – Power Limited 25V 1 3

Explosionproof/ and Stations Series Series manual pull stations from Kidde are noncoded alarm stations solidly constructed of die-cast material. All are pre-painted or have plated surfaces to inhibit manual stations are rated for outdoor use. Single- double-action MPSR models are available with either single (normally open) or double pole (double throw) alarm contacts. on the model, access to the unit for resetting purposes gained with either a keylock or hex screw. manual stations are rated for Class Group B (hydrogen) C & D, Class II Groups E. F, G, Class III and are rated NEMA 4X for outdoor use. They available in single or double action activation with key or hex reset. models feature terminal block connections and 10 amp Features models Solid corrosion-resistant construction Rated NEMA 4X for outdoor use Surface mount weatherproof backbox and gasket included Positive activation Terminals for wire connections models Single and double action models Single or double pole contacts Key lock or hex screw reset models Class I Group B, C & D, Class II Groups E. F, G, Class III Single-action models convertible to double-action operation Key lock reset Double pole contacts 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0588 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Series manual stations have 10 amp contacts. They may used with or without a break glass rod. Rod replacement no special tools. Each manual station may be reset and using the standard key or hex key provided. (weatherproof models) holes and wiring plate contact terminal wiring contact terminal block wiring screws with handle box plugs box screws rod slot (explosionproof models) seal box wire screw plate x 1 in. pins in. NPT pipe plug single conduit use) rod installation slot 2 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0588 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 models 4X outdoor models Class I Group B, C & D, Class II Groups E. F, G, Class 4X outdoor size environment in (7.77 cm) in (12.07 cm) in (7.62 cm) in (8.13 cm) in (12.07 cm) in (9.40 cm) or six contact terminal block depending on model to 18 AWG amp @ 120 Vac contact terminal block to 18 AWG amp @ 120 Vac gang weatherproof backbox (included) key or hex key action or double action depending on model gang explosionproof backbox (included) key or hex screw (double-action with adapter cover) to 150 (-35 to 66 to 150 (-35 to 66 Information manual stations (weatherproof backbox included) French markings add -F to the suffix of the model number. bilinguial French/English markings add -B to the suffix of the model number. SPST, hex screw reset, terminal connections. SPST, Cat 45 Key reset, terminal connections. DPDT, hex screw reset, terminal connections. DPDT, Cat 45 Key reset, terminal connections. SPST, hex screw reset, terminal connections. DPDT, hex screw reset, terminal connections. SPST, Cat 45 Key reset, terminal connections. DPDT, Cat 45 Key reset, terminal connections. SPST, hex screw reset, terminal connections, NYC white stripe. SPST, Cat 45 Key

Rate Compensation Detectors Series mount Mount 302 heat detectors are designed for use in normal environ- as well as environments where the detectors are subject to moisture (internal condensation), and explosive atmo- They are normally-open devices designed to close an circuit upon activation. All models feature rate compen- and are available with either 135 (57.2 or 194 (90 ratings. They are self restoring, hermetically sealed, shock and resistant, and are tamperproof. Features Rate compensation offsets thermal lag Self-restoring no manual reset required Explosion proof and weatherproof models available Weatherproof models available that do not require a special Box mount and surface mount models available rated at 135 (57.2 will not respond to momentary fluctuations less than 30 between 60 and 100 (38 Sensors rated at 194 (90 will not to momentary temperature fluctuations less than 50 between 60 (16 and 150 (66 302 Series sen- should not be used in environments where conditions exceed parameters. Do not install them in hot air ducts, in front of in paint booths that use heat to cure paint, or any other subject to temperature fluctuation. Rated (57.2 (90 Ambient Temperature (-40 (-40 Ceiling (38 (66 sensor aluminum tube acts as a heat collector when sourc- of heat radiate directly on the tube. Install these sensors out of sunlight and away from radiating heat sources including the flow from heaters and heat ducts. 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0589 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 Compensation Series sensors feature rate compensation, which improves by offsetting thermal lag, an inherent property of fixed temperature heat sensors. slow rate of temperature rise allows the heat to penetrate the expansion struts. The tubular shell and the struts expand until the total device has been heated to its rated tempera- level of 135 (57.2 or 194 (90 At this point, the contact points close and an alarm is initiated. subjected to a rapid rate temperature rise, there is not as time for heat to penetrate the inner strut. However, the rapid of the shell allows the struts to come together at a level. the surrounding air temperature returns to below the rated the shell contracts, forcing the contacts to open, thus auto- resetting the sensor. Wiring control or device Rating VAC VDC VDC 302 Series Detectors of amps amp amp silver contact struts expansion sensing 0.040 anodized aluminum control sleeve screw hermetic seal Series heat sensors are low maintenance. Sensors automati- restore when temperatures drop below their rated tempera- The accumulation of dust and dirt does not normally affect sensors operation. for operation is simple and can be done before or after the has been installed. Heat the sensor with a hair dryer (do use any device with an open flame to test sensors). The sen- should operate shortly after the hot air is applied. to NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code and/or the local having jurisdiction to determine testing frequency, record and other testing considerations. Spacing Vertical Spacing models) Horizontal Spacing models) – Horizontal vertical spacing.* x 50 x 15.2 m) x 40 x 12.2 m) x 30 x 9.1m) x 50 x 15.2 m) x 40 x 12.2 m) x 30 x 9.1m) x 50 x 15.2 m) x 40 x 12.2 m) x 30 x 9.1m) x 40 x 12.2 m) x 30 x 9

Multi-purpose HPSA15 loudspeaker is a high-efficiency double re-entrant that delivers 15-watts of continuous power. Its unique provides exceptional intelligibility, making it ideal for fire and life safety applications. It is UL 1480 listed as a fire signalling speaker. HPSA15 operates within a nominal frequency response of 400-14,000 Hz, and provides audible output of 120 dB at one meter) at the rated power level. It includes a versa- three-way, 25/70.7 V line transformer that meets a variety of system needs. The transformer is adjustable by means a convenient seven-position, watts/impedance selection switch. labor-saving switch is screwdriver adjustable and includes a cover with built-in cable strain relief. HPSA15 features an innovative mounting bracket that, with a adjustment, provides precise positioning in both the vertical horizontal planes. It also allows the HPSA15 to be installed conventional surfaces or strap-mounted on I-beams or pillars. epoxy-coated metal and ABS plastic components are suitable for indoor or outdoor use. Features Superior intelligibility for voice and tone signaling High-efficiency driver with proven performance reliability Suitable for installation on supervised circuits Includes a versatile 25/70.7 transformer for line applications UL 1480 listed as fire protective signalling speakers Adjustable bracket for precise positioning Environment resistant for outdoor and indoor use Available in gray or red finish weather-resistant loudspeakers feature highly intelligible and signal transmission for medium-power indoor and door fire alarm, mass notification, and security applications. incorporate high-efficiency compression drivers that project over long distances or wide areas with fewer loudspeak- HPSA15 loudspeakers are ideal for installation in commercial distribution centers, factories, schools, public access civic centers and recreational facilities. They are suitable for on supervised circuits. 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0591 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 2020 Carrier rights reserved. 1 2 Next Speaker or Resistor at Ft. at 10 W W W W W W W W W W Not Use 70 V K K K UL 3 dB Increment Rating mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) mm) 7/8″ mm) Dia. (13 mm) Slot (7 mm) Dia 3 Holes apart on 2.3″ mm) Dia. B/C Rating Frequency Rating Taps Level Environment Watts – 14,000 Hz at 15 watts (peak) / 1 Meter at 15 watts / 1 Meter (avg) 500-6,000 Hz 1 Watt / 1 Meter (avg) 500-6,000 Hz mfd 2, 3.8, 7.5, 15 @ 70.7V connection dB (UL 10 Rating) models meet or exceed the UL Listed standards for audible signal and are capable of operating within an ambient temperature of 66 (150 to -35 (-30 1480 Information Number loudspeaker, red loudspeaker, gray Wt., lb (kg) (2.27) (2.27) 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0591 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1

Intelligent Bases V-PS, V-PHS, V-HFD, V-HRD B4U, RB4U, IB4U, SB4U, SB4U-LF Features Optical, heat, and multisensor models available Compatible standard, relay, isolator, and audible bases Field replaceable optical chamber Electronic Addressing including mapping location Bases mount to standard North American two-gang or 4″ electrical boxes Dual color LED provides at-a-glance alarm indication Tamper-resistant feature Self diagnostic capability with on-board storage of results Optical detectors feature automatic rate compensated sensitiv- adjustment, as well as dirty sensor warnings Manufactured to strict international ISO 9001 standards Assembled using surface mount technology for RF resistance Conformally coated components resist dust and humidity Automatic detector test Low Profile Design brand intelligent analog detectors are meticulously engi- to deliver high-perfor mance features, superb reliability, and quality. With their highly stable design, these detec- resist air movement caused by heating and air conditioning, them reliable performers ideally suited to modern building installation and maintenance advantages of Kidde brand intel- detectors add value throughout their service life. The twist- design makes short work of installation and maintenance tions. A plastic breakout on the detector housing optionally vents removal from the base except with a special tool. bright, easy-to-see LED flashes red when the detector is in thus eliminating much of the guesswork when responding front-panel indications. The V-HFD is fixed-temperature heat detector with an alarm The V-HRD is a 135 (57 fixed temp with a 15 (8 per of 135 F (57 C). rate-of-rise function. The V-PHS houses an optical sensing chamber that detects as well as a fixed-temperature sensor that detects The detector analyzes data from both sensors to deter- when an alarm is initiated. The V-PS houses an optical sensing chamber that detects detectors feature comprehensive self-diagnostic capability. and V-PHS optical detectors continuously adjust their sen- to compensate for changes in the environment such as the of dirt, smoke, temperature, and humidity. These detec- issue a dirty sensor warning when they reach their preset limit. 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0592 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 Bases in. square electrical box Detectors V-Series heat detectors are capable of performing compre- self-diagnostics and storing the results. to advanced thermistor technology, V-Series heat detectors ideal for sensing fast, flaming fires and for applications where detection is inappropriate. They are particularly well-suited areas such as kitchens and shower rooms, where the ambient is relatively constant, but where steam and smoke are Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector provides both a 135 (57 temp and a 15 (8 per minute rate-of-rise function for the of heat due to fire. Fixed Temperature Heat Detector provides a 135 (57 heat sensor for the detection of heat due to fire. heat sensor monitors the temperature of the air and deter- whether an alarm should be initiated. and combination detectors optical detectors continuously adjust their sensitivity on fluctuating environmental conditions such as the pres- of dirt, smoke, humidity, or changes in temperature, and the panel of any changes in sensor sensitivity. When the has adjusted its sensitivity to its maximum limit, it issues a sensor warning, allowing enough of a margin for maintenance to clean the detector before it goes into trouble condi- Optical/Fixed Temperature Detector houses an optical chamber that detects smoke, as well as a fixed-temper- sensor that detects heat. The detector analyzes data from sensors to determine when an alarm is initiated. This com- the suitability of optical sensing for slow burning fires with sensitivity of fixed-temperature detection for fast flaming fires arrive at a solution that responds rel

Two- and Four-Wire & Terminal Smoke Series brand conventional photoelectric smoke detectors include interchangeable head and base, with a light-scattering optical They provide outstanding stability and excellent response a wide range of fires. pulsed infrared LED light source and a high-speed photodiode element are housed in an omnidirectional sensing cham- protected by an insect screen. For easy cleaning, the detector a field-replaceable optical chamber. 721UT photoelectric detectors include integral fixed and rate-of-rise heat detectors. The 721UT provides alarm and trouble LED driver outputs. Also available is 713-5U electronic heat detector head for areas too dusty for detection. Series smoke detectors were the industry first conventional detectors specifically designed for the demands of and industrial environments. If the detector drifts out its UL Listed sensitivity range or fails internal diagnostics, the LED flashes once a second to indicate a trouble condition. meets NFPA 72 field sensitivity testing requirements without need for external meters. diagnostic information is activated by applying a magnet the detector integral reed switch. This initiates a self-diag nostic and provides visual indication of sensitivity level, or if service required. The magnet test causes the LED to blink. The number of counts corresponds to a smoke detector sensitivity range. if they become dirty over time, the 700 Series detectors adjust the alarm threshold through built-in drift com- If the detector ever does need to be cleaned, the pat- field replaceable optical chamber makes cleaning a snap. 1 of 2 Features Self-diagnostic capabililty continually monitors operation Meets NFPA 72 sensitivity test requirements Head and terminal base design (base sold separately) Automatic drift compensation Field-replaceable optical chamber Low-profile design blends into the ceiling Advanced alarm verification nuisance alarm immunity Continuity switch in base to ease installation Extensive two-wire compatibility listings Specifications 700 Series photoelectric smoke detector, is a low-profile, self- two-wire detector that monitors its own sensitivity and status. The detector meets NFPA 72 field sensitivity requirements without the need for external meters. Built-in compensation automatically adjust the sensitivity if the detec- gets dirty. The 700 Series features an alarm verification feature further reduce the chance of a nuisance alarm. Normal sensing every 9 seconds. This rate doubles when a signal exceed- the alarm threshold value is sensed. Two additional successive above the threshold level initiate an alarm. The patented sensing chamber is field replaceable, allowing quick and cleaning and maintenance. manually operated switch between terminals 1 and 2 establishes across the alarm initiating circuit at initial installation of base simplifying testing without the smoke head in place. The automatically opens when a detector head is plugged in. D A T A S H E E T K85001-0598 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 2020 Carrier rights reserved. Specifications ripple (peak to peak) standby current (24V) alarm current (24V) Sensitivity temperature humidity range immunity LED output current compensation adjustment Sensor Ratings 741UT, 713-5U) wind velocity wiring size test input (721UT) voltage time two-wire compatibility identifier 33VDC, non polarity sensitive (Vp – p) to 60 mA max, if not limited by control panel + 0.37, 1.00% to 120 (0 to 49 to 95% Non-condensing V/m min; 0-1000 MHz mA min, 8.5 mA max max 711U; Bases 701U, 702U 135 Rate of rise 15 >105 (8.3 ft/min or

Smoke Detectors Auxiliary Series Series two-wire conventional photoelectric smoke detectors together trusted technology and a full line of features that the demands of every type of application. The 500 offers in two-wire applications, specifically to meet residential requirements. is also proud to offer proven technology like CleanMe compensation, field replaceable optical chambers, and self- CleanMe is only available on the 500 2-wire models will communicate with compatible FACPs when servicing is Series detectors work on a light-scattering principle. A pulsed light-emitting diode serves as the light source, and a high- photo diode as the sensing element. This design has supe- protection against nuisance alarms caused by dust, insects, interference, and ambient light. proprietary optical chamber is field replaceable. In the event of confirmed alarm the LED will light continuously. The unit indi- trouble by flashing the LED every second. This meets the 72 field sensitivity testing requirements. diagnostic information is activated by applying a magnet the detector integral reed switch. This initiates a self-diagnostic and provides visual indication of sensitivity level, or if service required. The magnet test causes the LED to blink. The number of counts corresponds to a smoke detector sensitivity range. with a built-in 85dB sounders emit the temporal 3 pat- and can be easily tandemly interconnected using the 405-05 reversal relay. This enables all detectors to sound when initiating detector sounds and meets the requirement of the Residential Building Code (IRC). Features Remote maintenance (CleanMe reporting and built- drift compensation reduces false alarms Self-diagnostics meets NFPA 72 sensitivity testing re- without the need for external meters Field-replaceable optical chamber makes service fast and Large SEMS screw terminals accept 12-18 AWG wire Small, low profile design blends with any environment Optional auxiliary functions include: Integral sounder with optional tandem interconnection Auxiliary relay Listed for applications such as elevator recall Fire system isolated heat integrated with non- single station smoke alarm Integral fixed/ROR heat detectors Adaptor plate enables replacing 500 Series legacy 400 Series smoke detectors 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0606 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Series detectors are ideal for both retrofit applications and installations alike. They are particularly well-suited for installa- where detector reliability is essential, but where typical ana- devices may not be appropriate or feasible. With replaceable optical chambers, these detectors are equally to dusty environments where detectors require frequent fixed temperature sensor LED rate-of-rise sensor sensor optical chamber bug screen cap and Installation Series detector bases mount directly to standard single-gang boxes, three-inch round, or four-inch octagonal boxes. heads simply twist onto the base. Heads are equipped a break-away locking tab, which prevents unauthorized re- SEMS terminals accept 24 to 12 AWG field wiring. (5cm) (12cm) Wiring Supply ripple pk-pk (6/12/24V) average standby current alarm current (6/12/24V) relay contacts only) sensitivity temperature humidity range immunity (12/24 V operation) sensitive (Vpk-pk) to 60 mA max if not limited by panel A @ 30 VDC; Form C + 0.5 – 1.0% to 100 F (0 to 37 C) to 95% non-condensing V/m min; 0-1000 MHz wiring size detector specifications 2-wire compatibility identifiers output (521NCSXT only) compensation adjustment head dimensions dimensions AWG (16-22 recommended) F/min and >105 F C/min and >40.6 C) Threshold: 135

Genesis Expander Series Pending Genesis G4E Strobe Expander offers both Mass Communication (MNEC) and Life Safety notification capabilities without all the wall clutter of or larger appliances. The ingenious patent-pending Strobe Expander accomplishes this by providing a separate, strobe that fits readily behind a Genesis Series speaker or speaker-strobe. attractive low-profile design allows a single, compact to house three vital notification elements: a clear multi- strobe that serves life safety requirements; a colored strobe that serves MNEC needs; and, a highly multi-tap, multi-purpose loudspeaker. UL Listed G4E Strobe Expander offers all the advanced fea- found in the popular Genesis line of notification appliances, Fulllight strobe technology, as well as synchroniza- capabilities that exceed UL 1971 requirements. G4E Strobe are 100 per cent compatible with other Genesis and Integrity appliances on the same circuit. G4E Series packs two independent strobes and a loudspeak- into one sleek, low-profile design that is actually slimmer than other single-strobe units on the market today. Functionally aesthetically, the G4E Strobe Expander continues the Genesis of excellence, quality and value. G4E Expander with G4 Series (ordered separately) Features Sleek design pending design allows the installation of two indepen- strobes and a speaker in a single compact footprint Fewer parts to stock standard G4 Speaker-strobes Field configurable convenience settings remain visible even after the unit is installed Meets UL 1971 synchronization requirements Highly regulated in-rush current the maximum number of strobes on a circuit No extension ring or trim plate needed standard 4-inch square electrical boxes with plenty of room the signal for wiring Optional surface-mount back box high and low rear mounting hole patterns and knock- for easy retrofit applications 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0610 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 patent pending G4E is ideal for new and retrofit applications both fire alarm and mass notification signaling is required. allowing a speaker and two independent strobes to be installed a single compact footprint, the G4E cuts down on wall clutter reduces the number of boxes that have to be installed. This only speeds installation and reduces costs it also makes for neat installation that minimizes the impact on the interior design the protected space. surface-mount and/or retrofit applications, the optional (white) or G4ERB (red) backbox can be used. This box and knockouts, and a unique rear hole arrangement allows for mounting over a 4″ square box that is installed at or 84″ above finished floor (AFF), yet keeps the lower strobe at 80″ AFF. The backbox can also be mounted directly to a surface and accept wiring through the top or side knockouts. G4E Strobe Expander features field-selectable strobe outputs. selection remains visible even after installation, making it easy verify that the strobe output is suitable for the application and line with the output setting of its companion G4 Speaker-strobe. with red or white housings, as well as clear or amber and optional or markings, there is a G4E to suit any application. For added flexibility, a simple jumper changes the flash rate from the standard one flash per second public mode signaling, to a 3-3-3 temporal rate for private applications. codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise exceed specified levels, where occupants use hearing and in areas of public accommodation. Consult your Having Jurisdiction for details. Genesis strobes, including the G4E, exceed UL synchronization (within 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period) when with a compatible synchronization source. See the Specifica- section for details. The flash intensity of some visible signals may not be adequate to or waken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates that intensity of strobe needed to awaken 90 per cent of sleeping per

Intelligent FX-2WIRE, FX-IDC1A, FX-IDCWS, FX-ISO, FX-RLY, FX-IDC1B intelligent modules are engineered to deliver high-perfor- features, superb reliability, and unbeatable quality. From of ancillary equipment, to enhanced signaling functionality, products add flexibility and powerful options to Kidde intel- systems. expressly for small buildings, Kidde modules are ad- devices that are uniquely identified on the system by of familiar rotary switches. Once registered, they share data update status information that determines how the system and how connected devices interact with one another. to Kidde modules is ground fault detection so precise that actually pinpoints the specific module where the wiring problem occurred. This saves hours of troubleshooting and wire trac- And only Kidde provides this important feature! Kidde family of intelligent modules also offers contractors and simple setup and installation, while delivering options that full advantage of intelligent fire alarm processing. With a mi- in each device, intelligence is distributed throughout system so that command decisions are made instantly at the module, rather than bottlenecking at the control panel. not only speeds event processing, it also makes a more ro- and reliable system so robust, in fact, that when upgrading a conventional panel to a Kidde intelligent system, you can use existing wiring no twisted or shielded cable required! Features Class A-B Two-Wire Module as an interface between conventional two-wire smoke and the Kidde control panel. Analog Class A Single Input Module to connect a normally open, alarm, supervisory, or moni- type dry contact initiating device circuit to the Kidde control Analog Dual Input Module two normally open, alarm, supervisory, or monitor dry contact initiating device circuits to the Kidde control Analog Dual Input Waterflow, Supervisory Module to connect normally open waterflow alarm and superviso- initiating device circuits to the Kidde control panel. For Class circuit operation. Analog SLC Fault Isolator Module a Class A SLC from total collapse due to wire-to-wire circuits. Analog NAC Module a supervised output circuit to a signal riser. Analog Contact Relay Module one Form C dry relay contact and can be configured provide polarity reversal of its output. Analog Single Input Mini Module a normally open, alarm, supervisory, or monitor type contact initiating device circuit (IDC) to the Kidde control For Class B circuit operation. 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0611 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Addressing a screwdriver to adjust the two rotary switches on the front of module. Set the TENS rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s and the ONES rotary switch for the 0 through 9 digit. 5 9 address 21, set TENS rotary switch to 2 set the ONES rotary switch to 1. screwdriver here to the Specifications Table for available address numbers. operation provide a bicolor LED for status indication. Green LED Normal Red LED Active box plate in a North American 4 inch square x 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) 2 gang box or a standard 4 in. square box 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) A Single Input Module Class A Single Input Module is used to connect a normally alarm, supervisory, or monitor type dry contact initiating circuit (IDC) to the Kidde control panel. The module is for Class A circuit operation. module’s device address is set using the two rotary switches on the front of the module. One device address is re- device can be preset for alarm or supervisory operation using slide switch located on the front of the module. The module also be configured for other device types through front panel or the configuration utility. D Class A next out out ) in in ) ) ) )

Intelligent Manual Stations FX-278 intelligent manual pull stations are engineered to deliver mance features, superb reliability, and unbeatable From control of ancillary equipment, to enhanced signaling these products add flexibility and powerful options to FX-64 and FX-1000 intelligent systems. expressly for small buildings, Kidde pull stations are modules that are uniquely identified on the system by of familiar rotary switches. Once registered, they share data update status information that determines how the system and how connected devices interact with one another. intelligent manual pull stations also offer contractors and simple setup and installation, while delivering options take full advantage of intelligent fire alarm processing. With a in each device, intelligence is distributed through- the system so that command decisions are made instantly at individual pull station, rather than bottlenecking at the control not only speeds event processing, it also makes a more ro- and reliable system so robust, in fact, that when upgrading a conventional panel to a Kidde intelligent system, you can use existing wiring no twisted or shielded cable required! Features Traditional familiar appearance action models feature our familiar teardrop design with positive pull action and sturdy die-cast metal body. Single action (GA) and double action models action feature rugged Lexan housings with keyed reset. Break glass operation up-front visible glass rod on the FX-270 discourages tam- Intelligent device with integral microprocessor decisions are made at the station allowing lower com- speed while substantially improving control panel time. Less sensitive to line noise and loop wiring twisted or shielded wire is not required. ADA Compliant ADA requirements for manual pull stations. Rotary Addressing easy-to-set wheels. Diagnostic LEDs LEDs; flashing GREEN shows normal polling; flashing shows alarm state. Designed for high ambient temperature operation in ambient temperatures up to 120 (49 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0612 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 single input mini module mounted on the back of the unit (fac- installed) supervises the station and sends an alarm signal to control panel when the switch is closed (i.e. when the handle pulled). device address is set using the two rotary switches located on back of the unit. One device address is required. pull station is configured for alarm latching operation. When pull lever is activated, an alarm signal is sent to the control and the alarm condition is latched at the pull station. FX-270 pull station is a normally open dry contact initiating that requires one action by the user to initiate an alarm. FX-278 pull station is a normally open dry contact initiating that requires two actions by the user to initiate an alarm. the upper door marked LIFT THEN PULL HANDLE must be to access the alarm handle. Second, the alarm handle must pulled to initiate an alarm. Addressing a screwdriver to adjust the two rotary switches on the front of module. Set the TENS rotary switch (0 through 12) for the 10s and the ONES rotary switch for the 0 through 9 digit. 5 9 in a North American 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) deep 1 gang box, or 4 in. square box 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) deep box with 1 gang Single Action Pull Station box I F I F rod lever device address 21, set TENS rotary switch to 2 and set screwdriver here Double Action Pull Station ONES rotary switch to 1. to the Specifications Table for available address numbers. next 2 of 4 ) ) ) Refer to the control panel technical reference manual for wiring All wiring is power-limited and supervised rod

Intelligent Duct Detector Kidde FX-PDD Duct Smoke Detector is designed for easy and represents the perfect balance of practical design advanced technology. FX-PDD features a unique design that speeds installation and maintenance. Removable dust filters, conformally coated boards, and optional water-resistant gaskets keep con- away from components, ensuring years of trouble-free When cleaning is required, the assemblies come apart and snap back together in seconds. duct smoke detector primary purpose is to provide early of an impending fire and shut down the HVAC unit in to prevent smoke from circulating throughout the building. duct smoke detector is designed for use in duct applications temperatures can exceed standard detector capabilities. Duct detectors have specific limitations. Duct detec- are not a substitute for an open area smoke detector. Duct are not a substitute for early warning detection or a for a building regular fire detection system. Smoke are not designed to detect toxic gases which can up to hazardous levels in some fires. These devices will not without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power Kidde suggests you discuss further safeguards with local fire protection specialist. Features Less than 2″ deep for easy installation and applications where is tight 32 to 120 (0 to 50 operating range with 100 ft/min. to ft/min air velocity rating assures reliability under harsh conditions Status LEDs remain visible through clear assembly cover Cover monitor switch for added security Standard sampling tube spacing for easy drop-in migration other detectors Sampling tube can be installed with or without the cover in and can be rotated in 45-degree increments to ensure alignment with duct airflow 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc operation Magnet-activated test switch One Form C auxiliary alarm relay for controlling ancillary equip- (e.g., HVAC controls) No special tools required for easy access to field connections Environmental compensation with differential sensing for reli- stable, and drift-free sensitivity Wide 0.79% to 2.46% obscuration/ft. smoke sensitivity Identification of dirty or defective detectors 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0613 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 relay smoke premises FX-PDD duct detec- is ideally suited to duct detection applica- where early indication combustion is required the confined space ventilation ductwork. primary purpose is to early warning of an fire and to pre- smoke from circulating the building. is typically used to detect smoke in the supply side of the HVAC but can provide supervision of the return side as well. smoke relay detectors continually sample air flow in the HVAC duct and an alarm condition whenever smoke is detected. An alarm activated when the quantity (percent obscuration) of combustion in that air sample exceeds the detector sensitivity set- Intelligence all FX-Series intelligent devices, the FX-PDD detector fea- rotary addressing and issues a dirty sensor warning when reaches its preset limit. The dirty sensor warning indicates the is operating within its specified limits but is in need of ser- When the detector ability to compensate for environmen- changes has reached its limit, the duct smoke detector signals trouble condition. FX-PDD also uses differential sensing to prevent gradual changes from triggering unwanted alarms. A rapid in environmental conditions, such as smoke from a fire, the detector to signal an alarm state, but dust and debris over time does not change alarm sensitivity. FX-PDD detector contains a microprocessor that performs self-diagnostics and stores the results in nonvola- memory. Stored results include details such as hours of opera- last maintenance date, and number of alarms and troubles. information

Genesis LED Expander Series G4SE Strobe Expander Genesis LED EG4S Series Features Sleek design allows the installation of two independent strobes a speaker or horn in a single compact footprint Fewer parts to stock standard Genesis LED EG4S speaker-strobes EG4 horn-strobes Field configurable convenience settings remain visible even after the unit is installed Meets UL/C synchronization requirements with legacy Genesis appliance on the same circuit Ultra-low current the maximum number of strobes on a circuit No extension ring or trim plate needed standard 4-inch square electrical boxes with plenty room behind for wiring Available in 4 colors for flexible Mass Notification needs Red, Green and Blue lens options. Genesis LED G4SE Strobe Expander offers both Notification/Emergency Communication (MNEC) and Life System notification capabilities without all the wall clutter separate, or larger appliances. The G4SE offers ultra low consumption to reduce power requirements. The G4SE Expander accomplishes this by providing a separate, strobe that fits readily behind a Genesis EG4S Series speaker or speaker-strobe or Genesis LED EG4 horn, strobe, or horn-strobe. attractive low-profile design allows a single, compact to house three vital notification elements: a clear strobe that serves life safety requirements; a multi-candela strobe that serves MNEC needs; and, highly intelligible multi-tap, multi-purpose loudspeaker or 3 horn. UL/C Listed Genesis LED G4SE Strobe Expander offers all advanced features found in the popular Genesis LED line notification appliances, including ultra-low current draw and cover skins. G4SE Strobe Expanders are 100 percent with legacy Genesis appliances on the same circuit. G4SE packs two independent strobes and a loudspeaker into one sleek, low-profile design that is actually slimmer than other single-strobe units on the market today. Functionally aesthetically, the G4SE Strobe Expander continues the LED tradition of excellence, quality and value. 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0614 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Strobe Circuit Wiring Genesis LED G4SE is ideal for new and retrofit applications both fire alarm and mass notification signaling is required. allowing a speaker and two independent strobes to be installed a single compact footprint, the G4SE cuts down on wall clutter reduces the number of boxes that have to be installed. This only speeds installation and reduces costs it also makes for neat installation that minimizes the impact on the interior design the protected space. Genesis LED G4SE strobe expander has the color and visible from the bottom of the appliance without removing cover. The strobe expander comes with amber, red, blue and lens options. G4SE comes in both white and red housing options with or no marking available. Prevailing codes require strobes be used where ambient noise conditions exceed specified levels, occupants use hearing protection, and in areas of public Consult your Authority Having Jurisdiction details. Genesis LED strobes, including the G4SE, exceed UL/C requirements (within 10 milliseconds over a two- period) when used with a compatible synchronization source. Genesis LED G4SE also has a 20ms pulse width allowing it be used on the same loop and in the same line of sight as the Genesis strobes. Configuration G4E Strobe Expanders may be field configured the desired candela output. The output setting is visible a small window on the bottom of the device and is by simply sliding the switch until the desired setting in the window. Notification appliance strobe circuit in (signal shown in the active condition) Expander strobe circuit in (signal polarity shown the active condition) Expander strobe circuit out Notification appliance strobe circuit out Shorting clip Speaker Circuit Wiring Speaker circuit in (sh

Reflective Beam Detector EC5000R comprises a transmitter and receiver in a single en- The transmitter emits an invisible infrared light beam that reflected via a reflector mounted directly opposite and within a line of sight. The reflected infrared light is detected by the and analyzed. Smoke in the beam path will reduce the re- infrared light proportionally to the density of the smoke. The analyzes this attenuation and initiates an alarm condition a predetermined level of obscuration is reached. EC5000R System features advanced innovations such as which indicates the optimal location of the reflec- by means of an integrated laser. Once installed, the system steers and maintains the beam to the optimum posi- for reliable performance. Features Range of 26.25 to 330 ft. (8 m to 100 m) Ground level controller with LCD display for easy system and testing Up to two detector heads reporting to one controller Laser-assisted prism mounting speeds installation Automatic beam alignment increases reliability Contamination compensation reduces nuisance alarms Building shift compensation maintains system integrity Separate alarm and trouble contacts for easy configuration Built-in electronic UL/ULC obscuration accepted fire test Password protected settings for added security Programmable fire thresholds for application flexibility 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0616 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 beam smoke detectors are ideal for large open areas as warehouses, hotel atrium, industrial plants and school infrared signal is projected out of the transmitter optics to the placed at the opposite end of the detection zone. The is reflected back to the receiver where it is analyzed for fire trouble. The maximum lateral distance either side of the beam found to be typically 30 feet (9.1 m) for satisfactory detec- under flat ceilings, providing a total area coverage of 19,800 feet (60 feet x 330 feet), or 1844 square metres (18.3 x m). stratification may be overcome by mounting multiple beam at different heights, one of which will project an infrared below the heat layer and into the smoke layer. time will be longer in a building with a peaked roof if a occurs at the fringes of the protected area. If in doubt conduct smoke tests. ideal location and spacing of the detector is critical in a prop- installed and operating fire alarm system. It is recommended the detectors be located and spaced in accordance with 72. recommended installation height is approximately 19 to 24 (483 to 610 mm) below the ceiling. However, in all instal- the National Fire Standards for that country/state must be of the reflecting properties of the beam, all objects must kept a minimum of 19 inches (483 mm) away from the centre the beam path down the entire beam length. If highly reflective are close to the beam, then greater clearances should be Spacing Detector to 24 inches to 610 mm) Positioning the reflector(s) on a secure surface directly opposite the Ensure that there is a clear line of sight between the and the reflector(s), and that no moving objects such as or mechanical equipment interfere with the beam path. All should be kept away from the center of the detector beam the entire length of the beam path. Reflectors should not be on glass or reflective surfaces. detectors come standard with a single which should be mounted between 27 160 feet (8 and 50 m) from the detector. detector/reflector distances of to 330 ft (8 to 100 m), order Long-Range Reflector Kit. This three additional reflectors for as shown at right. the Ordering Table for available brackets and options. (102 mm) reflec- (204 mm) of four reflectors Detectors ft. (18.3 m) max. positioning shown here is recommended for protected with flat ceilings. Spacing may vary for areas with high or ceilings. In such case

Hazardous Strobes Features UL 1971 listed and ADA compliant for the hearing impaired Negligible in-rush current Approved for fire alarm applications Wall, ceiling or pendant mount Diode-polarized for use in electronically supervised circuits High-impact glass dome 1 Hertz flash rate (65 flashes per minute) Synchronized with external module 60 cd wall or 125 cd ceiling, per UL 1971 Factory sealed – no external seals required Quick connect – threads onto mounting module for easy instal- Epoxy powder coat for corrosion resistance cUL listed to CAN/ULC-S526-07 and UL 1638 for indoor and applications hazardous location strobes are life safety signaling designed for installation in hazardous environments. specifications and state-of-the-art technology provide for visual output and low maintenance. The 116DEGEX-FJ has in-rush current. pendant, wall or ceiling mounted, the 116DEGEX-FJ meets exceeds the requirements of UL 1971 Signaling Appliance for Hearing Impaired. 116DEGEX-FJ is intended for indoor use in UL 1971 (signal for the hearing impaired) listed compatible fire alarm The strobe flashes a 360-degree beam of light ap- at 1 Hertz (65 times per minute) with a UL 1971 125 ceiling and 60 cd wall light output. With the guard installed, strobe flashes a beam with an output of 86 cd ceiling and cd wall. The strobe is also UL 1638 (visual signal appliance, mode) listed with dome guard installed for both indoor and use, and other applications requiring electrical supervision the signaling circuit field wiring. The 116 Class strobes are cUL to Canandian Standard ULC-S526-07 (Visual Signal Device Fire Alarm Systems), suitable for indoor and outdoor applica- The strobe features an enhanced synchronization circuit to with the latest requirements of UL 1971 and CAN/ULC- Synchronized operation requires a separately installed control module. See Ordering Information for assembled with one of the three available mounting op- the 116DEGEX-FJ is UL Listed for use in Class I, Division 1, C and D, Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D, Class Division 1, Group E, F and G, Class II, Division 2, Group F and and Class III Division 1 and 2 hazardous locations. The strobe also cUL Listed as a Type 3R and 4X enclosure. 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0624 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 hazardous location strobes are designed for use in Kidde fire alarm systems and other applications requir- electrical supervision of signaling circuit field wiring. strobes are suitable for many locations including mines, flour mills, tankers, refineries, laboratories and other ap- where environmental hazards may be present. 116DE- strobes are particularly well-suited in areas of high noise where standard bells or horns are not satisfactory. pendant, wall or ceiling mounted, 116DEGEX-FJ strobes cUL listed to CAN/ULC-S526-07 for indoor and outdoor ap- and UL 1971 Listed (ADA compliant) for indoor visual applications in non-sleeping areas. Power Previous to activate signal. DC Polarity of circuit shown in supervisory state (signal inactive). Reverse circuit Electrical supervision requires wire run to be broken at each device. Device for constant input voltage. Do not connect to or pulsating voltage. re- with to its modular design, the 116DEGEX-FJ for pendant, ceiling, or wall mounting. the ordering information table for available modules. 116EX-P conduit 116EX-C conduit (wall mounted) conduit 116EX-B hub 9/16″ mm) 7/16″ mm) mm) 3/4″ mm) (102 mm) (79 mm) screws

Outdoor Rated and WG4 Series WG4 Series speakers and speaker-strobe appliances among the most versatile emergency appliances of their kind. for indoor or outdoor use, they are suitable for a wide range wet and harsh environments with a listed operating temperature of as low as -31 to as high as 151 (-35 to 66 light and sound output settings add to their on- flexibility, while optional FIRE or ALERT markings and colored make them ideal for either emergency communications/ notification (ECS/MNS) or fire alarm applications. appliances are suitable for indoor and outdoor applications, are ideal for challenging conditions such as parking garages process areas. They are listed for mounting on the ceiling or wall, and thanks to an ingenious full backplane sealing gasket, be installed to recessed (in-the-pour/block) electrical boxes. signals also mount to suitable surface boxes served by race- Optional color-matched trim skirts provide a clean, finished All appliance wiring is accomplished room-side for installation. Series appliances feature highly intelligible and efficient loudspeakers. These are dual-voltage (25.2V or and have field-selectable output taps ranging from 80.8 to 90.0 dBA. The multi-candela strobes are available with or amber lenses and in two output categories standard and They are precision-timed to meet UL 1971 synchro- standards, and field-configurable for one of four candela Wattage and candela settings are viewable even after through an innovative sealed viewport display. pending Features Outdoor and indoor rated Low-profile design Wall or ceiling mount Room-side wiring accepts 18 to 12 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm2) Wide operating temperature range Field-selectable speaker wattage, voltage, and strobe candela Field-configurable temporal strobe output option Clear and amber lenses available Fully-compatible with Genesis synchronization protocols Standard and high-output strobe intensities Speaker only and Speaker/Strobe appliance options 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0626 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Application suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used alert or alarm signals is a minimum of 15 dB above the aver- ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level a duration of at least seconds, whichever is This is measured 5 (1.5 m) above the floor. in anechoic chamber Sound Output dBA two watts the distance from signal to the ear will cause a 6dB in the received pressure level. The effect depends on acoustic properties of in the space. Dou- the power output of a (e.g.: a speaker from to 2W) will increase the pressure level by (1.5m) (3.05m) Series Cone Speaker/strobe and Mounting b t le tric s t e tio e r t c r o ) (x e r r e signals are rated for use and are for indoor or applications on or ceilings. For in or wet applica- appliances must be to an Kidde electrical box. In conditions, they are with standard by 1 deep boxes. When the optional or WG4RTS trim skirt, a 74347U or 2-1/8″ deep box be used. Genesis WG4 Speaker-Strobe may be wall- or ceiling-mount- and may be placed in one of four positions: strobe above, below, and strobe to either side. The shallow depth of devices leaves room behind the appliance for extra wiring. Application clear-lensed strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors wall- or ceiling-mounted public-mode notification appliances for hearing impaired, and UL 1638-listed for outdoor applications. codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise exceed specified levels, where occupants use hearing an

Outdoor Rated and WG4 Series WG4 Series horns and horn-strobe appliances are among most versatile emergency appliances of their kind. Rated for or outdoor use, they are suitable for a wide range of wet harsh environments with a listed operating temperature range as low as -40 to as high as 151 (-40 to 66 light and sound output settings add to their on- flexibility, while optional FIRE markings make them ideal for fire applications. appliances are suitable for indoor and outdoor applications, are ideal for challenging conditions such as parking garages process areas. They are available for mounting on the ceiling the wall, and thanks to an ingenious optional full backplane gasket, can be installed to recessed (in-the-pour/block) boxes. WG4 notification appliances also mount to suit- surface boxes. Optional color-matched trim skirts provide a finished appearance. All appliance wiring is accomplished for easy installation. Series appliances feature an efficient and powerful piezo The multi-candela strobes are available with clear lenses two output categories standard and high-output. They are to meet UL 1971 synchronization standards, field-configurable for one of four candela intensities. Candela are viewable even after installation through an innovative viewport display. Features Outdoor and indoor rated Low-profile design Wall or ceiling mount Room-side wiring accepts 18 to 12 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm2) Wide operating temperature range Field-selectable settings Fully-compatible with Genesis synchronization protocols Standard and high-output strobe intensities Horn only and horn-strobe options 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0628 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 horn output reaches as high as 97 dBA in accordance with 464 (104 dBA in accordance with ULC-S525) and features a frequency tone that results in excellent sound penetration an unmistakable warning of danger. Horns may be configured either coded or non-coded notification circuits. They can also be for low dB output with a jumper cut that reduces horn output by 5 dB. suggested sound pressure level for each notification zone used alarm notification appliances is at least 15 dB above the average sound level, or 5 dB above the maximum sound level having a of at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater, measured 5 feet m) above the floor. The average ambient sound level is A-weighted response) sound pressure measured over a 24-hour period. the distance from the notification appliance to the ear will result in a 6 dB reduction of the received sound pressure The actual effect depends on the acoustic properties of materi- in the space. A 3 dBA difference represents a barely noticeable in volume. Application clear-lensed strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors wall- or ceiling-mounted public-mode notification appliances for hearing impaired, and UL 1638-listed for outdoor applications. codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise exceed specified levels, where occupants use hearing and in areas of public accommodation. appliance synchronization is required to avoid causing with people who have Photosensitive Epilepsy (PSE). Noti- appliance synchronization is also generally required when than two strobe appliances are in the same field of view from one location. All Genesis strobes meet UL synchronization (within 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period) when with a synchronization source. These devices will not operate without electrical power. fires frequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. recommends that these devices always be installed in accordance the latest recognized edition of national and local codes. Refer to appropriate codes and standards for mounting height information. and Mounting Gasket trim skirt cover notification appliances are rated for outdoor use and are for indoor or outdoor applications on walls or ceilings. For in outdoor or

12/24VDC Monoxide with SafeTest 260-CO carbon monoxide (CO) detector is an accurate reliable means of alerting building occupants of potentially levels of CO in the protected area. The internal electro- sensor communicates with a sophisticated on-board that accurately tracks CO levels over time. commercial-grade detection technology results in quick reliable sensing, fast reset time, and superior false immunity. Its small size allows the 260-CO to blend with any decor, and its smooth contoured design compatible with both residential and commercial environments. by normal indoor temperature variations, the 260-CO adjusts for environmental changes and operates under a wide variety of conditions. It also monitors its own and compensates for sensitivity drift throughout the of its service life. 260-CO features the SafeTest functional test feature, which testing with real CO gas. SafeTest meets the functional requirement in NFPA 720, 2009/2012 editions. all CO detectors, the 260-CO has a limited service life. But most, which last only six years, the 260-CO advanced features a service life rated at 10 years. When it this point, the 260-CO end-of-life timer automatically a warning that indicates the device must be serviced. warning annunciates at the detector, as well as at the control and optionally at a remote monitoring station. integrated temporal-4 sounder provides local signaling capability the 260-CO, and it easily interfaces with any intrusion or fire alarm by means of its output relay. Its low current draw results in additional demand on the system power supply. Features 10-year end-of-life signal SafeTest feature functional test with spray of real CO gas Advanced electro-chemical sensing technology Wiring option activates sounders of all connected detectors any one of them goes into alarm Deep housing with plenty of room for wiring UL 2075 compliant Transmits sensor end-of-life to the supervising panel and cen- station if the system is monitored CO sensitivity conforms to UL 2034 requirements Built-in trouble/power supervision relay Self-diagnostics keep the device operating optimally through- its service life 12 or 24VDC operation and 150mA Form C relay Large SEMS terminals ease wiring installation 14 to 22 AWG One-touch TEST/HUSH button simplifies local operation Integrated 85 dBa temporal-4 sounder for local notification On-board LED provides local alarm and trouble indication Inconspicuous footprint and attractively contoured design Adapter plate simplifies replacing 240-COe detectors 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0632 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 260-CO Carbon Monoxide Detector is intended for ordinary unit applications in both residential and commercial including single/multiple family residential occupan- hotel rooms, dorm rooms, and other areas approved by the having jurisdiction (AHJ). The 260-CO detector can con- to either UL 985 (Household Fire Warning) or UL 864 (Com- Fire) control panels. It is not intended for use in industrial such as gasoline refineries or parking garages, which different listings. 260-CO is a four-wire device that uses a Class 2 output from control panel. Nonetheless, the primary alarm notification de- remains the 260-CO internal sounder with the control panel to these purposes. The 260-CO is not a substitute for life devices, and should be only considered as an integral part of comprehensive safety program. a suitable location is critical to the correct operation of detectors. Install the 260-CO in accordance with NFPA 720 for the Installation of Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detection Warning Equipment. Place wall-mounted detectors at least ft. (1.5 m) up from the floor. For ceiling mounted applications, the detector at least 1 ft. (0.3 m) from any wall. hotel rooms and dorm rooms. CO detector locations: 9 Within 10 ft. (3 m) of all sleeping areas, including areas such 9 In a suitable environment: areas with a temperature range 40 to 100 (4.4 to 37.8

Low Frequency Signals G4LF Series Series notification appliances provide the benefits of Gen- life safety signals with output suitable for applications requiring frequency audible tones. These high-performance appliances a crisp 520 Hz tone in the standard 3-3 temporal pat- An optional setting configures the appliance for continuous output a critical feature for notification appliance circuits are coded with a CDR-3 coder module. G4LF appliances also field-configurable high and low dB output settings. connected to compatible control equipment, G4LF Series output remains synchronized with all Genesis audible sig- on the same Notification Appliance Circuit, including standard kHz Genesis audible signals. G4LF models include audible-only appliances, as well combination audible-visible signals. Combination appliances Genesis FullLight strobe technology, which produces smooth light distribution pattern without the spikes and voids characterize bulky specular reflectors. This ensures the entire area receives consistent illumination exceeding UL-1971 distribution requirements. It also results in a slim, low profile that blends with any decor. Candela output is field configu- connected to a compatible synchronization source, Genesis synchronize (strobes to UL 1971) to within 10 millisec- indefinitely without the need for external modules or other See the Specifications section for a list of synchroniza- sources. Features Unique low-profile design… Compact UL listed audible and audible-visible appliances Ultra-slim: protrudes an inch from the mounting surface Attractive appearance: no visible mounting screws Choice of colors and markings… White or red housings With or without FIRE markings Easy to install… Room side wiring accepts #18 – #12 AWG (0.75 to 2.5 mm2) Fits standard 4-inch square electrical boxes or standard Gensis EG4B or EG4RB surface-mount boxes Easy to configure without removing the device… High or low dB output Temporal or continuous audible tone Temporal or continuous visible output 15, 30, 75, or 110 candela intensity High performance output… Exclusive FullLight strobe output distribution pattern Meets tough synchronization standards for strobes and audible signals 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0639 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 G4LF Series appliances are UL 464-listed for low-fre- audible requirements. Models are also available in combi- with a UL 1971-listed strobe light for indoor wall-mounted notification applications. Many codes and regulations call for low-frequency audible appliances (520 Hz) in newly sleeping rooms and also require strobe lights under of these circumstances. Consult with your Authority Having for details. audible-visible appliances are installed in accordance guidelines established for visible (strobe) devices. used with a compatible synchronization source, all Genesis strobes audible units, and combination appli- maintain fully synchronization indefinitely. This exceeds UL synchronization requirements of 10 milliseconds over a period. These devices will not operate without electrical power. As frequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss further with your local fire protection specialist. recommends that these devices always be installed in ac- with the latest recognized edition of national and local Refer to the appropriate codes and standards for mounting information. Signal Application low-frequency audible output features a code-compliant Hz signal. Audible signals may be configured for either coded non-coded signal circuits. They can also be set for low dB out- with a jumper cut that reduces audible output by about 5 dB. models may be ceiling-mounted or wall-mounted. sleeping rooms, most codes and standards require 75 dBA- at the pillow. non-sleeping rooms, the suggested sound pressure level each signaling zone used with alarm signals is at least 15 dB the average ambient sound level, or 5 dB above the maxi- soun

Ceiling Speakers, GC Series Genesis line of ceiling life safety and emergency communica- speakers and speaker-strobes combine high performance with a low profile design to deliver a life safety signal solu- that as versatile as it is effective. While they are designed to inconspicuously overhead, these devices are also rated for applications. speaker-strobes are available in high and low candela which feature 15 to 95, or 95 to 177 cd output (see order- information). Ceiling speakers feature W to 2 W operation, allows devices to be easily fine-tuned to achieve maximum in exchange for the lowest possible system overhead. output and wattage tap settings are selectable with conven- switches. Settings remain clearly visible even after installation, yet they are locked in place to prevent unauthorized after installation. fidelity models meet the NPFA 520 Hz requirements for newly commercial sleeping areas. They also produce crisp, voice audio output that is highly intelligible over large areas. low-profile appliances feature textured housings in architec- neutral white or eye-catching life safety red. Optional ALERT FIRE markings make them ideal for applications that require between life safety and mass notification alerts. Specifications Section for listings details. Features High Fidelity 520 Hz speaker models available frequency output meets NFPA standards for newly con- commercial sleeping areas; increases sound fidelity audio intelligibility. Field configurable no need to remove the device Select 1, or 2 watt operation 15/30/75/95 cd and 95/115/150/177 cd models available Switch settings remain visible even after the unit is installed Ideal for Mass Notification applications blue and amber lens models available Unique low-profile design 30 per cent slimmer profile than comparable signals Available with white or red housings Unparalleled performance loud 90 dBA output ensures clear, crisp audio Precision strobe timing meets UL synchronization standards 25 VRMS and 70 VRMS models available Easy to install Fits all standard 4-inch square electrical boxes with plenty of for extra wire no extension ring or trim plate needed #18 – #12 AWG terminals ideal for long runs, existing wiring Approved for public and private mode applications UL 1971-listed as signaling devices for the hearing impaired UL 1638-listed as protective visual signaling appliances UL 1480-listed as life safety speaker UL/ULC listed for ceiling or wall use 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0641 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.3 Application strobes are UL 1971 or 1638 listed for indoor use. Prevailing require strobes to be used where ambient noise conditions specified levels, where occupants use hearing protection, in areas of public accommodation. Consult with your Authority Jurisdiction for details. Genesis strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period) when used with a source. Synchronization for multiple strobe lights a single field of view is required. See the Specifications table for synchronization sources. Notes – Canada in part on 1995 Canada National Building Code) signal sound pressure level shall not exceed 110 dBA in any occupied area. The sound pressure level from an audible in a floor area used for occupancies other than residential shall not be less than 10 dBA above ambient levels, never less than 65 dBA. In sleeping rooms the sound pres- level from an audible signal shall not be less than 75 dBA any intervening doors between the device and the sleeping are closed. Application suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used alert or alarm signals is a minimum of 15 dB above the aver- ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level a duration of at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater. This measured 5 feet (1.5 m) above the floor. and Mounting models are intended for in

Wall Speakers, G4 Series Genesis line of life safety and emergency communications and speaker-strobes combine high performance output a low profile design to deliver a life safety audio solution that versatile as it is effective. Protruding no more than one inch the wall, these appliances blend inconspicuously with any amber or blue lenses, ALERT or FIRE markings, and red white housing colors ensure there is a device for every applica- including mass notification and emergency communications. feature selectable wattage taps, while speaker-strobes for both wattage and light output levels to be configured in the Both settings remain clearly visible even after final installa- which allows devices to be easily fine-tuned to achieve maxi- benefit in exchange for the lowest possible system overhead. fidelity models meet the NPFA 520 Hz requirements for newly commercial sleeping areas. They also produce crisp, voice audio output that is highly intelligible over large areas. Genesis speakers include a DC blocking capacitor to allow supervision of the audio distribution circuit. Models for VRMS and 70 VRMS audio circuits are available. With their sealed construction, these speakers are extra durable and provide audibility. Specifications Section for listings details. Features High Fidelity 520 Hz speaker models available frequency output meets NFPA standards for newly con- commercial sleeping areas; increases sound fidelity audio intelligibility. Unique low-profile design The most compact UL/ULC listed speaker-strobe available Ultra-slim, protrudes a mere one inch from the wall Attractive appearance, no visible mounting screws Field configurable no need to remove the device 1, or 2 watt operation and selectable candela output with convenient switches that remain visible even after the unit is installed Mass Notification models available with and blue lenses Unparalleled performance loud 90 dBA output ensures clear, crisp audio Exclusive FullLight strobe technology produces even light distribution Precision timing electronics meet tough synchronizing standards for strobes when used with compatible modules Optional field-configurable temporal strobe output 25 Vrms and 70 Vrms models available, all supplied with a DC blocking capacitor for audio circuit supervision Easy to install behind the signal for extra wire no extension ring Fits all standard 4-inch square electrical boxes with plenty of or trim plate needed #18 – #12 AWG terminals ideal for long runs or using existing wiring 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0642 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 2.2 Application suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone with alert or alarm signals is a minimum of 15 dB above the ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound having a duration at least 60 seconds, is greater. This measured 5 feet (1.5 m) the floor. in anechoic chamber Sound Output dBA two watts the distance from signal to the ear will cause a 6 dB in the received pressure level. The effect depends on acoustic properties materials in the space. the power output a device (e.g.: a speaker 1W to 2W) will in- the sound pressure by 3dBA. (1.5m) (3.05m) Series Cone Speaker/strobe speakers are available in combination with a UL 1971-listed light for indoor wall-mounted public-mode notification ap- These audible-visible appliances should be installed in with guidelines established for visible (strobe) devices. Fidelity Models G4HF Series High Fidelity appliances provide highly intel- voice audio output. They are also effective in areas subject high levels of ambient noise. These appliances are approved for in sleeping areas under conditions described below. Room Appli

End-to-End Smoke KC3000 is an end-to-end infrared optical beam smoke detec- that comprises an infrared transmitter, receiver, and controller. transmitter and receiver are installed near the ceiling of the area up to 393 feet (120 m) apart, while the controller is at ground level where it remains accessible for mainte- and setup functions. Each controller will handle up to two pairs, each with separate fire and fault relays. KC3000 is typically used in situations where it is impractical, or not cost-effective to use point-type detectors. It enables coverage of a large protected area at minimal cost, is ideally suited for situations that might include high ceilings, and dirty environments, or environments that are prone to extremes. KC3000 features integrated laser alignment, which simplifies and configurable detector sensitivity and drift com- which reduces nuisance alarms. These features and make the KC3000 a practical and effective wide area solution. Features Separate Transmitter and Receiver Heads Range 16.5 to 393 feet (5 m to 120 m), configurable per of Detectors Lateral Spacing per NFPA 72 is 60 feet Integral Laser Alignment in Receiver 2-wire Interface between Controller and Receiver Single and Twin Channel capability Separate Fire and Fault Relays per Detector Low Level Controller with LCD display Programmable Sensitivity and Fire Threshold Automatic Gain Control (AGC) for drift compensation Built-in electronic UL/ULC obscuration-acceptance fire test Knockouts for ease of installation and wiring Built-in 1/2-inch/M-20 conduit knockouts on detectors and controller 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0643 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 smoke detectors are ideal for large open areas such as hotel atrium, industrial plants and school gymnasi- End-to-end beam smoke detectors are particularly useful line of sight for the infrared detection path is narrow and the building structure employs reflective surfaces. MC300 is designed to be aesthetically pleasing making it suitable for modern architectural buildings, as well as his- sites particularly where ornate ceilings exist. stratification may be overcome by mounting pairs of and transmitters at different heights, one of which will an infrared beam below the heat layer and into the smoke time will be longer in a building with a peaked roof if a occurs at the fringes of the protected area. If in doubt conduct smoke tests. ideal location and spacing of the detector is critical in a prop- installed and operating fire alarm system. It is recommended the detectors be located and spaced in accordance with 72, which allows for lateral spacing of up to 60 ft (18.3 m). in mm) in (203 mm) in mm) in (161 mm) Wiring Receivers, two zones… 1 – 2 – – – 11.8 in cm) – 393.7 ft – 120 m) 1 COM N/C 1 COM N/C 2 COM N/C 2 COM N/C V to 36 Vdc 1 – 1 + 2 – 2 + – + 1 – 1 + Receivers, one zone… 1 1 COM N/C COM N/C 2 COM N/C 2 COM N/C distance between the ceiling and transmitter/receiver must be more than 10 percent of the distance between floor and ceiling. at least 11.8 inches (30 cm) space around receiver and transmitter. 11.8 in cm) 2 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0643 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Information

Explosionproof Detector 30-3013 30-3013 detectors are high performance smoke detectors for use in hazardous locations. They are corrosion-resistant feature a non-conducting aluminum alloy retaining ring that the detector sensor against the effects of explosions and catastrophic events. retaining ring mounts securely to a companion junction box, offers several common port configurations for conduit con- Together, the ring and box provide a sturdy protective for the detector head. 30-3013 advanced optical detector performs effectively with smoldering fires, as well as quickly rising flames. sensor module is hot-swappable and intrinsically safe while This allows maintenance work to be performed without to declassify the protected area as a hazardous location. integrated Trouble relay ensures that the 30-3013 detector performs as expected. On-board Alarm and Auxiliary relays easily with Kidde fire systems, as well as auxiliary equip- such as dampers and door closers. Features High performance optical smoke detection Built-in 0-20 mA output for easy Distributed Control System integration Self diagnostics for reliable operation Alarm, Auxiliary, and Trouble relays for annunciator and control connection On-board LED provides local annunciation Non-latching operation Convenient magnetic switch for manual testing FM Approved for smoke detection in Class I, Division hazardous locations IECEx Zone approved IP44 ingress protection level suitable for onshore or offshore 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0645 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 30-3013 Explosionproof Smoke Detector features a rugged built to withstand environmental extremes. Its integrated outputs make it ideal for a wide range of industrial appli- while its agency approval ratings make it suitable for both and off-shore facilities. applications for the 30-3013 Explosionproof Smoke Detec- include: Indication LED located on the 30-3013 annunciates detector status. operating normally, the LED flashes every four seconds. the device is in alarm, it is steady on. operation detector will check the alarm status once every 10 seconds. smoke falls below the alarm threshold, the alarm condition clear within 10 seconds. Combustible storage facilities Munitions manufacturing Volatile chemical storage Chemical processing plants Petroleum refineries Turbine enclosures Battery rooms HVAC applications external wiring to the device is connected inside the integrated box. The 30-3013 has ports for up to four conduit entries. port accepts conduit with 3/4 inch NPT. in mm) in mm) and Maintenance Diagnostics normal operation, the detector performs a self-test function in the background once per second. Detection is interrupted during the test, and no indication is given if the test If the test fails, a Critical Fault condition will occur. If sen- drift is found to be approaching critical levels, an Advisory condition will occur. Testing on-board magnetic switch is used to initiate the Manual Self- The LED will light when a magnet is detected at the switch. test will immediately check the smoke chamber optics for degradation. there is a failure, the LED will shut off immediately after the one test, and a Trouble condition will occur. If the test passes, Alarm will be annunciated while the LED remains active. The will clear after 10 seconds. 2 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0645 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 proper temperature rated cabling type and diameter for input as well as output signal wiring. Terminals accept 14 to 18 shielded stranded copper wire. field wiring terminal connections are certified for a single wire size from 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (or two conductors with the same section 0.2 to 0.75 mm2). The screws must be tightened with a torque 0.4 to 0.5 N The metal housing must be

Intelligent/Addressable & Bases FX-PD, FX-PHD, FX-HD B4U, RB4U, IB4U, SB4U intelligent addressable detectors are meticulously engi- to deliver high-perfor mance features, superb reliability, and quality. With their highly stable design, these detec- resist air movement caused by heating and air conditioning, them reliable performers ideally suited to modern building installation and maintenance advantages of Kidde intelligent add value throughout their service life. Replacable chambers make maintenance a snap, while the head and base design makes short work of installation and main- operations. A plastic breakout on the detector housing pre vents removal from the base except with a special bright, easy-to-see single tri-color LED flashes green for normal, for trouble, and red for alarm, thus eliminating much of the when responding to detector status. The FX-PD houses a replaceable optical sensing chamber that particles produced by smoke. The FX-PHD houses a replaceable optical sensing chamber detects smoke, as well as a fixed-temperature sensor that heat. The detector analyzes data from both sensors to when an alarm is initiated. The FX-PDD duct detector prevents smoke from circulating the building see data sheet K85001-0613. The FX-HD is a selectable rate of rise or fixed-temperature detector with a fixed alarm threshold of 135 F (57 C). and FX-PHD optical detectors have drift compensation continuous adjustment of their sensitivity to compensate changes in the environment such as the presence of dust, tem- and humidity. These detectors issue a CleanMe signal they have reached their preset limit, reducing the chance of nuisance alarm. Features Optical smoke, heat, and multisensor models available World’s only field replaceable optical chamber makes cleaning snap Fast alarm reporting with microprocessor in each head also use with any approved existing wiring Field-proven highly stable design Compatible standard, relay, isolator, and audible bases Head and terminal base-tamper resistent design for fast instal- & security Self diagnostic capability with on-board storage of data Optical detectors feature automatic sensitivity drift compensa- as well as CleanMe sensor maintenance alerts Listed to UL 268, CSFM, ULC-S529-02, UL 521, ULC-S530- CAN/ULC S524-01,& ISO 9001 Standards Low profile, aesthetically-pleasing design Auto programming feature saves installation labor time Available alarm verification programming reduces chance of alarm 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0652 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 details & Application Optical/Fixed Temperature Detector intelligent digital device houses an optical chamber that detects smoke, as well as a sensor that detects heat. The analyzes data from both sensors to deter- when an alarm is initiated. The FX-PHD is capable of comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the data. detector continuously adjusts its sensitivity based on fluc- environmental conditions such as the presence of dirt, or changes in temperature, and notifies the panel of any in sensor sensitivity. When the detector has adjusted its to its maximum limit, it issues a dirty sensor warning, al- enough of a margin for maintenance personnel to clean the before it goes into trouble condition. Cleaning is accom- simply by replacing the detector’s optical chamber. FX-PHD combines the suitability of optical sensing for slow fires with the sensitivity of fixed-temperature detection for flaming fires to arrive at a solution that responds reliably to the range of fire types. A sophisticated algorithm processes from both sensors over time so that an alarm is only reported conditions precisely match the signature of a fire. This elimi- the shortcomings of single-sensor optical and heat detec- and significantly reduces the risk of nuisance alarms. Fixed Temperature Heat Detector intelligent digital device provides a 135 (57 heat sensor for the detection of due to fire.

Intelligent Detector Tool KI-HDT is a compact and easy-to-use diagnostic tool that installation and troubleshooting Kidde device loops and devices. The KI-HDT is a hand-held unit, and features touch screen that makes it possible for the operator to manipu- test, and monitor the device loop in the field using live data in time. KI-HDT comes with PC-compatible software that generates reports for archiving or further diagnostic analysis. Data and stored on the KI-HDT may be downloaded from the directly to a laptop or desktop computer by means of a USB or it may also be saved to a USB Flash drive for later use blocks on top of the unit provide easy connection of field while USB 2.0 and Micro-B ports provide an interface for exchange, and power. The KI-HDT is powered by a recharge- lithium-ion battery. Features Manipulates, tests, and monitors device loop and connected and modules Ideal for system verification and troubleshooting Compact, easy-to-use for factor Bright touch-screen graphical user interface Easy-access terminal blocks for field wiring Rechargeable lithium-ion battery Includes PC software for report generation and data manage- V1.8 brings increased diagnostics for locating wiring faults 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0655 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 KI-HDT is ideal for verifying new projects, troubleshooting installations, or testing retrofits. It can be used to initialize device loop before connecting to a control panel, or it can be for diagnosis and troubleshooting after loop connections are to the controller. operation, the KI-HDT performs the following functions: Initializes the loop (i.e. identifies all devices connected to the Restores the loop Performs Map Analysis on detectors and modules (contact and map consistency) and identifies failed units Performs Dirty Level analysis on photo detectors and identifies that require cleaning Allows the user to program new device address to a detector module Perform maintenance on a single detector or module Reinitialize the device address of detectors or modules on a to zeros Single device diagnostics Loop history, etc. details concerning the capabilities and operation of the KI- consult KI-HDT Operations user guide, P/N 3102424-EN. Position Block Position Block B T terminal block for A only KI-HDT Main Menu displays high level testing and diagnostics initialize loop function enables the device to perform some ini- actions such as resetting all devices and opening all isolators. function uses the device serial number to assign new short read device address, version numbers, device types, on the SLC, and checks for ground fault on the SLC loop. initialized data is stored in the Database Info page the display and can be accessed by pressing the Loop History Restore loop function closes all isolators and checks all device on the loop. Analysis KI-HDT provides two methods of investigating a new or exist- loop installation. These methods help pinpoint specific devices are causing map faults or have the potential to cause a future fault. The map fault analysis function performs the following diagnostic tests: Consistency map consistency function maps each device on the loop three times and compares the responses of all readings to see if there is a mismatch. If a device is responding consistently, it is flagged as failed and an is required. Analysis contact analysis function tests the response mea- by listening device(s) when the annunciating device activated. The response is an indirect measurement of contact resistance and can be used to identify existing issues or devices that have the potential to cause issue in the future. 2 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0655 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Level function is only associated w

Intelligent Heat CO Detector KI-HCD detector brings advanced multisensing technology a practical design that increases efficiency, saves installation cuts costs, and extends life safety and property protection Continuous self-diagnostics ensures reliability over long-haul, while environmental compensation helps reduce costs. Features Some features described here may not be supported by control systems. Check your control panel Installation and Guide for details. Next Generation Detection Technology Integrates rate-of-rise heat sensing with carbon monoxide KI-HCD provides the best of both worlds with multisensor life monitoring. Rate-of-rise heat sensing technology provides identification of smoldering fires, as well as fast flaming With the added element of CO monitoring, this detector pulls duty: continually monitoring the environment for signs of as well as its invisible yet deadly companion, carbon mon- all KI Series detectors, the KI-HCD gathers analog information its sensing elements and converts this data into digital sig- To make an alarm decision, the detector on-board micro- measures and analyzes the heat sensor readings and this information to historical data. Digital filters remove patterns that are not typical of fires, thus virtually eliminating alarms. detector also analyzes heat sensor independently from the CO to determine whether to initiate a fire alarm, a life safety CO or both. Sensor Markings Provide Easy Testing Identification Uses existing wiring Automatic device mapping Up To 250 Total Addresses Per Loop Automatic environmental compensation Non-volatile memory Electronic addressing Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment Bicolor (green/red) status LED Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases 1 of 4 A T A S H E E T K85001-0657 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 detection KI-HCD detector provides a 15 (9 per minute rate-of- heat sensor for the detection of fast-developing fires, as well a 135 (57 fixed temperature sensor for slow building-fires. heat sensors monitor the temperature of the air and deter- whether a fire alarm should be initiated. Detection CO detection, such as that provided by the KI-HCD is mandated with increasing frequency in all types of com- applications, but particularly in occupancies such as hotels, houses, dormitories, day care facilities, schools, hospitals, living facilities, and nursing homes. Known as the CO is odorless, tasteless, and colorless. It claims nearly 500 and results in more than 15,000 hospital visits annually. KI-HCD CO sensor monitors the presence of CO particles the air and determines whether a life safety alarm should be Alarm levels are reached at 70 ppm when detected for 60 240 minutes; 150 ppm for 10 to 50 minutes; and, 400 ppm for to 15 minutes. Device Mapping – The loop controller learns where device serial number address is installed relative to other de- on the circuit. The mapping feature provides supervision of each installed location to prevent a detector from being reinstalled cleaning etc.) in a different location from where it was originally. Stable Communication – On-board intelligence means less needs to be sent between the detector and the loop Other than regular supervisory polling response, the only needs to communicate with the loop controller when has something new to report. mounting bases have wiring terminals that are acces- from the after mounting the base to the electrical The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes and to inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, 1 inches (38 mm) deep. They mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm centers. The KI-SB4, KI-RB4, and KI-IB4 mount to North 4 inch sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above They include the GSA-TS4 Trim Skirt, which is used to the ears on the base. The KI-ABST mounts to a inch square

Intelligent Smoke KIR-PD optical smoke detector brings advanced sensing to a practical design that increases efficiency, saves time, cuts costs, and extends life safety and property capabilities. Continuous self-diagnostics ensure reli- over the long-haul, while environmental compensation helps maintenance costs. all KIR Series detectors, the KIR-PD is an intelligent device gathers analog information from its optical sensor, converting data into digital signals. To make an alarm decision, the detec- on-board microprocessor measures and analyzes sensor and compares this information to historical data. Digital remove signal patterns that are not typical of fires, thus virtu- eliminating unwanted alarms. Standard Features Some features described here may not be supported by control systems. Check your control panel Installation and Guide for details. Next Generation Optical Smoke Sensing Technology Wide 0.53 to 3.94 %/ft. (1.7 to 12.35 %/m) smoke obscuration Uses Existing Wiring Up To 250 Total Addresses Per Loop Two Levels of Environmental Compensation Two Levels of Dirty Detector Warning Five Sensitivity Settings Non-Volatile Memory Rotary Addressing Identification of Dirty or Defective Detectors Automatic Day/Night Sensitivity Adjustment Bicolor (Green/Red) Status Led Standard, Relay, Fault Isolator, and Audible Mounting Bases Sensor Markings Provide Easy Testing Identification 1 of 4 A T A S H E E T K85001-0659 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 KIR-PD detects extremely small particles of combustion and an alarm at the first sign of smoke. Thanks to its high- forward-scattering reflective response technology, photoelectric smoke sensor responds quickly and reliably to wide range of fire types, espe cially slow burning fires fuelled by typically found in modern multi-use buildings. KIR-PD is compatible with FX Series intelligent panels. mounting bases have wiring terminals that are acces- from the after mounting the base to the electrical The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes and to inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, 1 inches (38 mm) deep. They mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm centers. The KI-SB4, KI-RB4, and KI-IB4 mount to North 4 inch sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above They include the GSA-TS4 Trim Skirt, which is used to the ears on the base. The KI-ABST mounts to a inch square box only. Series detector bases mount North American 1-gang boxes, inch or 4 inch octagon and to 4 inch square elec- boxes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) They mount to European and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 fixing centers. See mounting installation and wiring for information. tab Indicator and reporting technology microprocessor in each detector provides additional benefits Self-diagnostics and History Log, and Fast, Stable Communica- and History Log – Each KIR Series detector runs self-checks to provide important maintenance in- The results of the self-check are automatically updated permanently stored in the detector non-volatile memory Stable Communication – On-board intelligence means less needs to be sent between the detector and the loop Other than regular supervisory polling response, the only needs to communicate with the loop controller when has something new to report. & Maintenance detector automatically identifies when it is dirty or defective causes a detector message. The detector sensitiv- measurement can also be transmitted to the loop controller. A report may be printed to satisfy NFPA sensitivity mea- which must be conducted at the end of the first year every two years thereafter. user-friendly maintenance program shows the current state each detector and other pertinent messages. Single detectors be turned off temporarily from the control panel. Availability of features is dependent on the fire alarm system used. Base

Intelligent Smoke Heat Detector KIR-PHD detector brings advanced multisensor technology a practical design that increases efficiency, saves installation cuts costs, and extends life safety and property protection Continuous self-diagnostics ensure reliability over the while environmental compensation helps reduce main- costs. KIR-PHD provides an optical smoke sensor and a rate-of-rise sensor with a fixed temperature setting. Together these sen- efficiently detect smoldering fires, as well as fast flaming fires. all KIR Series detectors, the KIR-PHD gathers analog in- from its sensing elements and converts this data into signals. To make an alarm decision, the detector on-board measures and analyzes smoke and heat sensor and compares this information to historical data. Digital remove signal patterns that are not typical of fires, thus virtu- eliminating unwanted alarms. Features Some features described here may not be supported by control systems. Check your control panel Installation and Guide for details. Next generation detection technology Integrates optical smoke with rate-of-rise heat sensing Wide 0.53 to 3.94 %/ft. (1.7 to 12.35 %/m) smoke obscuration Uses existing wiring Sensor Markings Provide Easy Testing Identification Up To 250 Total Addresses Per Loop Two levels of environmental compensation Two levels of dirty detector warning Five sensitivity settings Non-volatile memory Convenient rotary addressing Environmental compensation Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment Bicolor (green/red) status LED Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases 1 of 4 A T A S H E E T K85001-0660 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 detection KIR-PHD detects extremely small particles of combustion and an alarm at the first sign of smoke. Thanks to its high- forward-scattering reflective response technology, photoelectric smoke sensor responds quickly and reliably to wide range of fire types, espe cially slow burning fires fuelled by typically found in modern multi-use buildings. Addressing is made easy through rotary dials located on the back of detector head. Use a screwdriver adjust the TENS rotary switch (0 12) to set the 10s digit and ONES rotary switch to set the 0 through 9. The control panel identify any duplicate addresses. 5 9 screwdriver here detection on-board rate-of-rise heat sensor provides a 15 per minute for the detection of fast-developing fires while providing a 135 (57.2 fixed detection threshold. The sensors monitor the temperature of the air and determines an alarm should be initiated. KIR-PHD is compatible with FX Series intelligent panels. Series detector bases mount North American 1-gang boxes, inch or 4 inch octagon and to 4 inch square elec- boxes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) They mount to European and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 fixing centers. See mounting installation and wiring for information. tab Indicator & Maintenance maintenance (regular or selected) for proper detector should be planned to meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72, NFPA and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. Sensor Sensitivity KIR-PHD determines when its optical sensor is dirty or and can transmit sensitivity data to the loop controller. sensitivity report can also be printed to satisfy NFPA sensitivity which must be conducted at the end of the first and every two years thereafter. The availability of maintenance depends on the fire alarm system used. for device address 21, set TENS rotary switch to 2 and the ONES rotary switch to 1. and reporting technology microprocessor in each detector provides additional benefits Self-diagnostics and History Log, and Fast, Stable Communica- and History Log – Each KIR Series detector runs self-checks to provide important mai

Intelligent Heat KIR Series smoke detectors bring advanced sensing technol- to a practical design that increases efficiency, saves installa- time, cuts costs, and extends property protection capabilities. self-diagnostics ensure reliability over the long-haul, the latest thermister technology makes these detectors ideal dependable heat detection is required. KIR-HD is an intelligent fixed temperature fire detector that also be programmed as a rate-of-rise detector. The KIR-HD the temperature of the surrounding air and analyzes the from the sensor to determine whether to initiate an alarm. fixed-temperature heat function detects fire when the air near the detector exceeds the alarm point. When as a rate-of-rise heat detector, the KIR-HD quickly a fast, flaming fire. Features Some features described here may not be supported by control systems. Check your control panel Installation and Guide for details. Next generation heat sensing technology 135 (57 fixed temperature alarm point Programmable 15 (8.3 per minute rate-of-rise alarm Uses existing wiring Up to 250 total devices per loop Non-volatile memory Convenient rotary addressing Bicolor (green/red) status LED Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases 50 foot (15.2 meter) spacing 1 of 4 A T A S H E E T K85001-0661 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 intelligent digital device provides a 135 (57 fixed- heat sensor for the detection of heat due to fire. The sensor monitors the temperature of the air and determines an alarm should be initiated. The FX-HD also can be as a rate-of-rise heat detector. to its advanced thermistor technology, the KIR-HD detec- is ideal for sensing fast, flaming fires and for applications where detection is inappropriate. The KIR-HD is capable of per- comprehensive self-diagnostics and storing the results. It particularly well-suited to areas such as laundries and industries fluctuations in ambient temperature is expected. KIR-HD is compatible with FX Series intelligent panels. Series detector bases mount North American 1-gang boxes, inch or 4 inch octagon and to 4 inch square elec- boxes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) They mount to European and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 fixing centers. See mounting installation and wiring for information. tab Indicator and reporting technology microprocessor in each detector provides additional benefits Self-diagnostics and History Log, and Fast, Stable Communica- and History Log – Each KIR Series detector runs self-checks to provide important maintenance in- The results of the self-check are automatically updated permanently stored in the detector non-volatile memory. Stable Communication – On-board intelligence means less needs to be sent between the detector and the loop Other than regular supervisory polling response, the only needs to communicate with the loop controller when has something new to report. mounting bases have wiring terminals that are acces- from the after mounting the base to the electrical The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes and to inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, 1 inches (38 mm) deep. They mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm centers. The KI-SB4, KI-RB4, and KI-IB4 mount to North 4 inch sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above They include the Trim Skirt, which is used to cover the ears on the base. The KI-ABST mounts to a 4 inch box only. Base Base Base Base LED LED – The remote LED connects to the KI-SB or KI-SB4 Base only. It features a North American size 1-gang faceplate with a white finish and red alarm LED. Skirt – Supplied with 4 inch bases, it can also be ordered to use with the other bases to help hide surface imper- not covered by the smaller bases. Bases – KIR Series sounder bases ar

Intelligent Smoke CO Detector KIR-PCD detector brings advanced multisensor technology a practical design that increases efficiency, saves installation cuts costs, and extends life safety and property protection Continuous self-diagnostics ensures reliability over long-haul, while environmental compensation helps reduce costs. KIR-PCD provides a combination of optical detection for early detection of smoke, with the added element of carbon sensing. The result is a detector that pulls double duty: monitoring the environment for signs of fire as well its invisible yet deadly companion: carbon monoxide. all KIR Series detectors, the KIR-PCD gathers analog informa- from its sensing elements and converts this data into digital To make an alarm decision, the detector on-board mi- measures and analyzes smoke sensor readings and this information to historical data. Digital filters remove patterns that are not typical of fires, thus virtually eliminating alarms. The detector also analyzes the smoke sensor from the CO sensor to determine whether to initiate fire alarm, a life safety CO alarm, or both. Features Some features described here may not be supported by control systems. Check your control panel Installation and Guide for details. optical smoke with carbon monoxide detection Next Generation Detection Technology Wide 0.53 to 3.94 %/ft. (1.7 to 12.35 %/m) smoke obscuration Sensor Markings Provide Easy Testing Identification Uses existing wiring Automatic device mapping Ground fault detection by module Up To 250 Total Addresses Per Loop Two levels of environmental compensation Two levels of dirty detector warning Twenty pre-alarm settings Five sensitivity settings Non-volatile memory Convenient rotary addressing Environmental compensation Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment Bicolor (green/red) status LED Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases 1 of 4 A T A S H E E T K85001-0662 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 detection KIR-PCD detects extremely small particles of combustion and an alarm at the first sign of smoke. Thanks to its high- forward-scattering reflective response technology, photoelectric smoke sensor responds quickly and reliably to wide range of fire types, espe cially slow burning fires fuelled by typically found in modern multi-use buildings. Detection CO detection, such as that provided by the KIR-PCD, is mandated with increasing frequency in all types of com- applications, but particularly in occupancies such as hotels, houses, dormitories, day care facilities, schools, hospitals, living facilities, and nursing homes. Known as the CO is odorless, tasteless, and colorless. It claims nearly 500 and results in more than 15,000 hospital visits annually. KIR-PCD detector is compatible only with the KIR Series Loop Series detectors mount to American 1-gang boxes, inch or 4 inch octagon and to 4 inch square elec- boxes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) They mount to European and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 fixing centers. See mounting installation and wiring for information. tab Indicator & Maintenance maintenance (regular or selected) for proper detector should be planned to meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72, NFPA and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. Sensor Sensitivity KIR-PCD determines when its optical sensor is dirty or and can transmit sensitivity data to the loop controller. sensitivity report can also be printed to satisfy NFPA sensitivity which must be conducted at the end of the first and every two years thereafter. The availability of maintenance depends on the fire alarm system used. Sensor Life CO sensor has a 10-year life from the date of manufacture or the control panel indicates a sensor end-of-life condition, comes first. When the sensor reaches its end of life, the signa

Intelligent CO KIR-COD carbon monixide detector brings advanced sensing to a practical design that increases efficiency, saves time, cuts costs, and extends life safety capabilities. self-diagnostics ensures reliability over the long-haul, advanced electrochemical CO sensing technology provides benefits that keep occupants safe from carbon mon- the killer all KIR Series detectors, the KIR-COD is an intelligent device gathers analog information from its CO sensor, converting this into digital signals. To make an alarm decision, the detector microprocessor measures and analyzes sensor readings time. Digital filters remove signal patterns that are not typical life safety events, thus virtually eliminating unwanted alarms. KIR-COD includes an advanced carbon monoxide sensor. the electrochemical cell reaches its end of life after approxi- ten years, the detector signals a trouble condition to the panel. Refer to the control panel documentation for specific of life timing. Standard Features Some features described here may not be supported by control systems. Check your control panel Installation and Guide for details. Next Generation CO Sensing Technology Advanced electrochemical carbon monoxide sensing Markings Provide Easy Testing Identification Uses existing wiring Automatic device mapping Up To 250 Total Addresses Per Loop Non-volatile memory Convenient rotary addressing Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment Bicolor (green/red) status LED relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases 1 of 4 A T A S H E E T K85001-0663 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Catalog Intelligent Initiating Devices that saves lives and reporting technology microprocessor in each detector provides additional benefits – and History Log, Automatic Device Mapping, and Stable Communication. and History Log – Each KIR Series detector runs self-checks to provide important maintenance infor- The results of the self-check are automatically updated and stored in the detector non-volatile memory. Device Mapping – The loop controller learns where device serial number address is installed relative to other de- on the circuit. The mapping feature provides supervision of each installed location to prevent a detector from being reinstalled cleaning etc.) in a different location from where it was originally. Stable Communication – On-board intelligence means less needs to be sent between the detector and the loop Other than regular supervisory polling response, the only needs to communicate with the loop controller when has something new to report. mounting bases have wiring terminals that are acces- from the after mounting the base to the electrical The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes and to inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, 1 inches (38 mm) deep. They mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm centers. The KI-SB4, KI-RB4, and KI-IB4 mount to North 4 inch sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above They include the GSA-TS4 Trim Skirt, which is used to the ears on the base. The KI-ABST mounts to a inch square box only. tab Indicator Base Base Base Base LED LED GSA-LED – The remote LED connects to the KI-SB KI-SB4 Standard Base only. It features a North American size plastic faceplate with a white finish and red alarm LED. Skirt – Supplied with 4 inch bases, it can also be ordered to use with the other bases to help hide surface not covered by the smaller bases. Bases – KIR Series sounder bases are designed for use localized or group alarm signaling is required. KI-ABDT bases provide sounder capability to the KIR-COD when with a FX-T3T4 Temporal Pattern Generator to produce the CO (TC4) tone pattern. KI-ABLT bases provide 520 Hz low frequency sounder capabi

Intelligent Heat CO Detector KIR-HCD detector brings advanced multisensing technology a practical design that increases efficiency, saves installation cuts costs, and extends life safety and property protection Continuous self-diagnostics ensures reliability over long-haul, while environmental compensation helps reduce costs. KIR-HCD provides the best of both worlds with multisen- life safety monitoring. Rate-of-rise heat sensing technology efficient identification of smoldering fires, as well as flaming fires. With the added element of CO monitoring, this pulls double duty: continually monitoring the environment signs of fire as well as its invisible yet deadly companion, monoxide. all KIR Series detectors, the KIR-HCD gathers analog infor- from its sensing elements and converts this data into digital To make an alarm decision, the detector on-board micro- measures and analyzes the heat sensor readings and this information to historical data. Digital filters remove patterns that are not typical of fires, thus virtually eliminating alarms. detector also analyzes heat sensor independently from the CO to determine whether to initiate a fire alarm, a life safety CO or both. Features Some features described here may not be supported by control systems. Check your control panel Installation and Guide for details. Next Generation Detection Technology rate-of-rise heat sensing with carbon monoxide Sensor Markings Provide Easy Testing Identification Uses existing wiring Automatic device mapping Up To 250 Total Addresses Per Loop Automatic environmental compensation Non-volatile memory Convenient rotary addressing Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment Bicolor (green/red) status LED Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases 1 of 4 A T A S H E E T K85001-0664 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 detection KIR-HCD detector provides a 15 (9 per minute rate-of- heat sensor for the detection of fast-developing fires, as well a 135 (57 fixed temperature sensor for slow building-fires. heat sensors monitor the temperature of the air and deter- whether a fire alarm should be initiated. Detection CO detection, such as that provided by the KIR-HCD is mandated with increasing frequency in all types of com- applications, but particularly in occupancies such as hotels, houses, dormitories, day care facilities, schools, hospitals, living facilities, and nursing homes. Known as the CO is odorless, tasteless, and colorless. It claims nearly 500 and results in more than 15,000 hospital visits annually. KIR-HCD CO sensor monitors the presence of CO particles the air and determines whether a life safety alarm should be Alarm levels are reached at 70 ppm when detected for 60 240 minutes; 150 ppm for 10 to 50 minutes; and, 400 ppm for to 15 minutes. Device Mapping – The loop controller learns where device serial number address is installed relative to other de- on the circuit. The mapping feature provides supervision of each installed location to prevent a detector from being reinstalled cleaning etc.) in a different location from where it was originally. Stable Communication – On-board intelligence means less needs to be sent between the detector and the loop Other than regular supervisory polling response, the only needs to communicate with the loop controller when has something new to report. mounting bases have wiring terminals that are acces- from the after mounting the base to the electrical The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes and to inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, 1 inches (38 mm) deep. They mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm centers. The KI-SB4, KI-RB4, and KI-IB4 mount to North 4 inch sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above They include the GSA-TS4 Trim Skirt, which is used to the ears on the base. The KI-ABST mounts to a

Intelligent Smoke, CO Detector KIR-PHCD detector brings advanced multisensing technology a practical design that increases efficiency, saves installation cuts costs, and extends life safety and property protection Continuous self-diagnostics ensures reliability over long-haul, while environmental compensation helps reduce costs. KIR-PHCD provides the best of all worlds with comprehensive safety monitoring. The combination of optical smoke detection rate-of-rise heat sensing technology provides efficient iden- of smoldering fires, as well as fast flaming fires. With the element of CO monitoring, this detector pulls double duty: monitoring the environment for signs of fire as well its invisible yet deadly companion, carbon monoxide. all KIR Series detectors, the KIR-PHCD gathers analog from their sensing elements and converts this data into signals. To make an alarm decision, the detector on-board measures and analyzes smoke and heat sensor and compares this information to historical data. Digi- filters remove signal patterns that are not typical of fires, thus eliminating unwanted alarms. The detector also analyzes smoke and heat sensors independently from the CO sensor to whether to initiate a fire alarm, a life safety CO alarm, or Features Some features described here may not be supported by control systems. Check your control panel Installation and Guide for details. Next Generation Detection Technology optical smoke with rate-of-rise heat sensing and monoxide detection Wide 0.53 to 3.94 %/ft. (1.7 to 12.35 %/m) smoke obscuration Sensor Markings Provide Easy Testing Identification Uses existing wiring Automatic device mapping Up To 250 Total Addresses Per Loop Two levels of environmental compensation Two levels of dirty detector warning Twenty pre-alarm settings Five sensitivity settings Non-volatile memory Convenient rotary addressing Environmental compensation Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment Bicolor (green/red) status LED Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases 1 of 4 A T A S H E E T K85001-0665 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 detection KIR-PHCD detects extremely small particles of combustion triggers an alarm at the first sign of smoke. Thanks to its high- forward-scattering reflective response technology, photoelectric smoke sensor responds quickly and reliably to wide range of fire types, espe cially slow burning fires fuelled by typically found in modern multi-use buildings. detection on-board rate-of-rise heat sensor provides a 15 per minute for the detection of fast-developing fires. The sensor monitors the temperature of the air and determines an alarm should be initiated. Detection CO detection, such as that provided by the KIR-PHCD is mandated with increasing frequency in all types of com- applications, but particularly in occupancies such as hotels, houses, dormitories, day care facilities, schools, hospitals, living facilities, and nursing homes. Known as the CO is odorless, tasteless, and colorless. It claims nearly 500 and results in more than 15,000 hospital visits annually. Series detectors mount to American 1-gang boxes, inch or 4 inch octagon and to 4 inch square elec- boxes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) They mount to European and 1-gang boxes with 60.3 fixing centers. See mounting installation and wiring for information. tab Indicator & Maintenance maintenance (regular or selected) for proper detector should be planned to meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to current NFPA 72, NFPA and ULC CAN/ULC 536 standards. Sensor Sensitivity KIR-PHCD determines when its optical sensor is dirty or and can transmit sensitivity data to the loop controller. sensitivity report can also be printed to satisfy NFPA sensitivity which must be conducted at the end of the first and

Genesis LED Series Notification Devices LED EG1 Series horns and LED strobes feature a sleek profile design and energy-efficient technology that makes less expensive to install and operate by reducing overhead. performance LEDs require fewer circuits and power supplies. new appliances are designed with energy-efficiency and life in mind. LED EG1 Series uses high efficiency optics, combined patented electronics, to deliver a highly controlled and focused light distribution pattern in exchange for lower requirements. Strobes feature field-selectable 15, 30, 75 cd light output. with Xenon-type strobes, Genesis LED EG1 Series need fewer power supplies and often smaller wire which lightens conduit requirements. They are also compatible with legacy strobes, so there no need replace all your existing devices to upgrade to new LED In fact, EG1 strobes can be mixed on the same circuit used in the same field of view as Xenon-based strobes. This Genesis LED EG1 Series ideal for new installations and alike. sound output levels provide the flexibility life safety projects demand, while the Genesis LED protocol keeps multiple strobes on compatible NAC synchronized to well within NFPA 72 requirements. is another area where EG1 Series appliances shine. innovative under-cover diagnostic test points provide easy to device circuit testing while mounted. Features High Performance LED Strobe Technology Ultra low device current consumption High efficiency optics Selectable 15, 30, or 75 cd light output LED devices may be mixed with legacy Xenon strobes Efficient Audible Output Selectable high or low dB horn output Selectable temporal or steady horn output Improved audio frequency range for better wall penetration Low-profile Design Compact design gang mounting Ultra-slim about 1″ from the mounting surface Attractive appearance visible mounting screws Multiple Cover Options Order with FIRE markings or no FIRE markings in both red and white Change markings at any time with quick-swap covers Easy to Install Diagnostic test points streamline device circuit testing Fits standard 1-gang electrical boxes, no trim ring needed Optional trim ring available for 4-inch square boxes Slide switches for field configuration 12 to 18 AWG in-out screw terminals for quick wiring 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-0667 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 LED EG1 Series strobes are UL 1971-listed for use as wall-mounted public-mode notification appliances the hearing impaired. Prevailing codes require strobes to be where ambient noise conditions exceed 105 dBA (87 dBA Canada), where occupants use hearing protection, and in of public accommodation as defined in the Americans Disabilities Act. is important in order to avoid epileptic sensitivity. Genesis LED strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements 10 milliseconds over a two-hour period) when used with synchronization source. See the specifications table for a list compatible sources. LED horn output reaches as high as 92 dBA and features improved audio frequency range compared with other Genesis horns. This results in excellent sound penetration through and a clear warning of danger. They can also be set for high low dBA output. This setting reduces horn output by about 6 Horn-only models may be ceiling-mounted or wall-mounted may be configured for either coded or non-coded notification circuits. suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used alarm signals is at least 15 dBA above the average ambient level, or 5 dBA above the maximum sound level having a of at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater. These values measured at five feet (1.5 m) above the floor. The average sound level is A-weighted, fast response sound pressure over a 24-hour period. the distance from the signal to the ear will theor

Wall Mount LED EG4 Series LED EG4 Series horns and LED strobes feature a sleek profile design and energy-efficient technology that makes less expensive to install and operate by reducing overhead. performance LEDs require fewer power supplies, backup and batteries. These new appliances are designed with, and life safety in mind. LED EG4 Series uses high efficiency optics, combined patented electronics, to deliver a highly controlled and focused light distribution pattern in exchange for current requirements. Strobes feature field-selectable 30, 75, or 110 cd light output. with Xenon-type strobes, Genesis LED EG4 Series need fewer power supplies and often smaller wire which lightens conduit requirements. They are also compatible with legacy strobes, so there no need to all your existing devices to upgrade to new LED technology. fact, EG4 strobes can be mixed on the same circuit and used in same field of view as Xenon-based strobes. This makes Genesis EG4 Series ideal for new installations and retrofits alike. sound output levels provide the flexibility life safety projects demand, while the Genesis LED protocol keeps multiple strobes on compatible NAC synchronized to well within NFPA 72 requirements. is another area where EG4 Series appliances shine. universal room side wiring plate allows for pre-installation electrical wiring as well as checking continuity with the diagnostics check bar. EG4 Series devices can then be snapped into place with the confidence of knowing the is correct. The innovative under-cover diagnostic test points easy access to device circuit testing while mounted. Features High Performance LED Strobe Technology More devices per circuit Ability to use lower gauge wire Longer wire runs Fewer booster power supplies Ultra low device current consumption allows: High efficiency optics Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd light output LED devices may be mixed with legacy Xenon strobes Efficient Audible Output Selectable high or low dB horn output Selectable temporal or steady horn output Improved audio frequency range for better wall penetration Low-profile Design Ultra-slim… protrudes about 1.5″ from the mounting surface Attractive appearance… no visible mounting screws Multiple Marking Options Order in red or white with or without FIRE markings Change markings at any time with replaceable covers Easy to Install diagnostics check bar Pre-install and pre-wire with convenient universal room side wiring plate Check electrical continuity on room side wiring plate with Diagnostics port streamlines device circuit testing Fits 1-gang, 2-gang, 3.5-inch octagon, and 4-inch square electrical boxes Optional red and white trim plates available Slide switches for field configuration 12 to 18 AWG in-out screw terminals for quick wiring D A T A S H E E T K85001-0668 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.5 1 of 6 EG4 Series strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as public-mode notification appliances for the hearing Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where noise conditions exceed 105 dBA (87 dBA in Canada), occupants use hearing protection, and in areas of public as defined in the Americans with Disabilities Act. is important in order to avoid triggering seizures people with photosensitive epilepsy. All Genesis strobes exceed synchronization requirements (within 10 milliseconds over a period) when used with a synchronization source. See specifications table for a list of compatible sources. horn output reaches as high as 92 dBA and features an audio frequency range compared with other Genesis This results in excellent sound penetration through walls and clear warning of danger. Horn only models may be configured for coded or non-coded notification appliance circuits.

Intelligent Smoke, CO Detector Kidde Intelligent Optica Series KIR-OSHCD smoke detector advanced optical (photoelectric) sensing technology to a design that increases efficiency, saves installation time, costs, and extends life safety and property protection Continuous self-diagnostics ensure reliability the long-haul, while environmental compensation helps maintenance costs. KIR-OSHCD provides the best of all worlds with life safety monitoring. The combination of smoke detection with rate-of-rise heat sensing technology efficient identification of smoldering fires, as well as flaming fires. With the added element of CO monitoring, this pulls double duty: continually monitoring the environment signs of fire, as well as its invisible yet deadly companion monoxide. all Kidde Intelligent Optica Series detectors, the KIR- is an intelligent device that gathers analog information multiple optical sensors, converting this data into digital Utilizing dual optical wavelengths combined with multiple angles, the KIR-OSHCD differentiates particles that not representative of actual smoke. Particle data is input into filters which feed a series of ratios removing signal patterns are typical of nuisance sources, thus reducing unwanted To make an alarm decision, the detector on-board measures and analyzes all optical sensor readings compares this information to preprogrammed settings. The also analyzes the smoke and heat sensors independently the CO sensor to determine whether to initiate a fire alarm, a safety CO alarm, or both. Reduce Cooking Alarms 268 7th Ed. Features Multi-criteria optical smoke sensing technology Integrates advanced smoke with rate-of-rise heat sensing life safety carbon monoxide detection Wide 0.5 to 4.36 %/ft. (1.6 to 13.6 %/m) smoke obscuration Integrated nuisance rejection reducing unwanted alarms from cooking particulates Listed to UL 268 7th edition Sensor Markings Provide Easy Testing Identification Up To 250 detector and module Addresses Per Loop Two levels of environmental compensation Two levels of dirty detector warning Twenty pre-alarm settings Five sensitivity settings Non-volatile memory Rotary addressing, 1-125 Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment Bicolor (green/red) status LED Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases Some features described here may not be supported all control systems. Check your control panel Installation Operation Guide for details. D A T A S H E E T K85001-1017 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 1 of 4 detection KIR-OSHCD detects particles from a wide range of sources and will trigger an alarm when smoke in the chamber reaches preprogrammed level. Thanks to high-performance reflective response technology, the smoke responds quickly and reliably to a wide range of fire types, both fast and slow burning fires fueled by combustibles found in modern multi-use buildings. detection on-board rate-of-rise heat sensor provides a (9 per minute function for the detection of fast-developing while also providing a 135 (57.2 fixed detection The heat sensor monitors the temperature of the and determines whether an alarm should be initiated. Detection CO detection, such as that provided by the KIR-OSHCD, becoming mandated with increasing frequency in all types of applications, but particularly in occupancies such as rooming houses, dormitories, day care facilities, schools, assisted living facilities, and nursing homes. Known as the Killer, CO is odorless, tasteless, and colorless. It claims nearly lives, and results in more than 15,000 hospital visits annually. Intelligent Series detector mount to North American boxes, 3-1/2 inch or inch octagon boxes, and to inch square electrical boxes inches (38 mm) deep. mount to European BESA 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm cen

Intelligent Smoke Heat Detector Kidde Intelligent Optica Series KIR-OSHD smoke detector advanced optical (photoelectric) sensing technology to a design that increases efficiency, saves installation time, costs, and extends life safety and property protection Continuous self-diagnostics ensure reliability the long-haul, while environmental compensation helps maintenance costs. KIR-OSHD provides an optical smoke sensor and a heat sensor with a fixed temperature setting. these sensors efficiently detect smoldering fires, well as fast flaming fires. all Kidde Intelligent Optica Series detectors, the KIR-OSHD is intelligent device that gathers analog information from multiple sensors, converting this data into digital signals. Utilizing optical wavelengths combined with multiple detection angles, KIR-OSHD differentiates particles that are not representative actual smoke. Particle data is input into digital filters which a series of ratios removing signal patterns that are typical of sources, thus reducing unwanted alarms. To make an decision, the detector on-board microprocessor measures analyzes all optical sensor readings and compares this to preprogrammed settings. Reduce Cooking Alarms 268 7th Ed. Features Multi-criteria optical smoke sensing technology Integrates optical smoke with rate-of-rise heat sensing Wide 0.5 to 4.36 %/ft. (1.6 to 13.6 %/m) smoke obscuration Integrated nuisance rejection reducing unwanted alarms from cooking particulates Uses existing wiring Listed to UL 268 7th edition Sensor Markings Provide Easy Testing Identification Up To 250 detector and module Addresses Per Loop Two levels of environmental compensation Two levels of dirty detector warning Twenty pre-alarm settings Five sensitivity settings Non-volatile memory Rotary addressing, 1-125 Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment Bicolor (green/red) status LED Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases Some features described here may not be supported by control systems. Check your control panel Installation and Guide for details. D A T A S H E E T K85001-1018 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 1 of 4 detection KIR-OSHD detects particles from a wide range of combustion and will trigger an alarm when smoke density in the reaches preprogrammed level. Thanks to its high- reflective response technology, the smoke sensor quickly and reliably to a wide range of fire types, both fast and slow burning fires fueled by combustibles found in modern multi-use buildings. detection on-board rate-of-rise heat sensor provides a 15 (9 per minute function for the detection of fast-developing while also providing a 135 (57.2 fixed detection The heat sensors monitor the temperature of the and determines whether an alarm should be initiated. KIR-OSHD detector is compatible only with control panels a Kidde Intelligent Loop controller. Criteria Detection – Each detector houses an advanced chamber providing optical recognition of particles the onboard microprocessor to distinguish between particles and nuisance sources like cooking and steam. Stable Communication – On-board intelligence means less needs to be sent between the detector and the loop Other than regular supervisory polling response, the only needs to communicate with the loop controller when has something new to report. Mounting Bases have wiring terminals that are from the after mounting the base to the box. The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes to 3 inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, 1 inches (38 mm) They also mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with mm fixing centers. The KI-SB4, KI-RB4, and KI-IB4 mount to American 4 inch sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above They include the KI-TS4 Trim Skirt, which is used to cover ear

Intelligent Smoke CO Detector Kidde Intelligent Optica Series KIR-OSCD smoke detector advanced optical (photoelectric) sensing technology to a design that increases efficiency, saves installation time, costs, and extends life safety and property protection Continuous self-diagnostics ensure reliability the long-haul, while environmental compensation helps maintenance costs. KIR-OSCD provides a combination of optical detection for early detection of smoke, with the added element of carbon sensing. The result is a detector that pulls double duty: monitoring the environment for signs of fire, as well as invisible yet deadly companion, carbon monoxide. all Kidde Intelligent Optica Series detectors, the KIR-OSCD is intelligent device that gathers analog information from multiple sensors, converting this data into digital signals. Utilizing optical wavelengths combined with multiple detection angles, KIR-OSCD differentiates particles that are not representative actual smoke. Particle data is input into digital filters which a series of ratios removing signal patterns that are typical nuisance sources, thus reducing unwanted alarms. To make alarm decision, the detector on-board microprocessor and analyzes all optical sensor readings and compares information to preprogrammed settings. The detector also the smoke sensor independently from the CO sensor to whether to initiate a fire alarm, a life safety CO alarm, both. Reduce Cooking Alarms 268 7th Ed. Features Multi-criteria optical smoke sensing technology Integrates advanced optical smoke with life safety carbon detection Wide 0.5 to 4.36 %/ft. (1.6 to 13.6 %/m) smoke obscuration Integrated nuisance rejection reducing unwanted alarms from cooking particulates Sensor Markings Provide Easy Testing Identification Listed to UL 268 7th edition Uses existing wiring Ground fault detection by module Up To 250 detector and module Addresses Per Loop Two levels of environmental compensation Two levels of dirty detector warning Twenty pre-alarm settings Five sensitivity settings Non-volatile memory Rotary addressing 1-125 Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment Bicolor (green/red) status LED Standard, relay, fault isolator, and audible mounting bases Some features described here may not be supported all control systems. Check your control panel Installation Operation Guide for details. D A T A S H E E T K85001-1019 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 1 of 4 detection KIR-OSCD detects particles from a wide range of combustion and will trigger an alarm when smoke in the chamber reaches a preprogrammed level. Thanks its high-performance reflective response technology, the smoke responds quickly and reliably to a wide range of fire types, both fast and slow burning fires fueled by combustibles found in modern multi-use buildings. Detection CO detection, such as that provided by the KIR-OSCD, becoming mandated with increasing frequency in all types of applications, but particularly in occupancies such as rooming houses, dormitories, day care facilities, schools, assisted living facilities, and nursing homes. Known as the Killer, CO is odorless, tasteless, and colorless. It claims nearly lives, and results in more than 15,000 hospital visits annually. KIR-OSCD detector is compatible only with control panels a Kidde Intelligent Loop controller. Intelligent Series detector mount to North American boxes, 3-1/2 inch or 4 octagon boxes, and to 4 square electrical boxes 1-1/2 (38 mm) deep. They mount European BESA and 1-gang with 60.3 mm fixing centers. mounting base installation and for more information. tab Indicator and reporting technology microprocessor in each detector provides additional Self-diagnostics and History Log, multi criteria and Fast, Stable Communication. and History Log – Eac

Intelligent Smoke Kidde Intelligent Optica Series KIR-OSD smoke detector advanced optical (photoelectric) sensing technology to a design that increases efficiency, saves installation time, costs, and extends life safety and property protection Continuous self-diagnostics ensure reliability over long-haul, while environmental compensation helps reduce costs. all Kidde Intelligent Optica Series detectors, the KIR-OSD is intelligent device that gathers analog information from multiple sensors, converting this data into digital signals. Utilizing optical wavelengths combined with multiple detection angles, KIR-OSD differentiates particles that are not representative actual smoke. Particle data is input into digital filters which a series of ratios removing signal patterns that are typical of sources, thus reducing unwanted alarms. To make an decision, the detector on-board microprocessor measures analyzes all optical sensor readings and compares this to preprogrammed settings. 1 of 4 Reduce Cooking Alarms 268 7th Ed. Features Patented multi-criteria optical smoke sensing technology Wide 0.5 to 4.36 %/ft. (1.6 to 13.6 %/m) smoke obscuration Uses Existing Wiring Integrated nuisance rejection reducing unwanted alarms general cooking particulates Listed to UL 268 7th edition Up To 250 detector and module Addresses Per Loop Two Levels of Environmental Compensation Two Levels of Dirty Detector Warning Twenty Pre-Alarm Settings Five Sensitivity Settings Non-Volatile Memory Rotary Addressing, 1 -125 Automatic Day/Night Sensitivity Adjustment Bicolor (Green/Red) Status LED Standard, Relay, Fault Isolator, and Audible Mounting Bases Sensor Markings Provide Easy Testing Identification Some features described here may not be supported by control systems. Check your control panel Installation and Guide for details. D A T A S H E E T K85001-1020 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 KIR-OSD detects particles from a wide range of combustion and will trigger an alarm when smoke density in the reaches preprogrammed level. Thanks to its high- patented reflective response technology, the smoke responds quickly and reliably to a wide range of fire types, both fast and slow burning fires fueled by combustibles found in modern multi-use buildings. KIR-OSD detector is compatible only with control panels a Kidde Intelligent Loop controller. mounting bases have wiring terminals that are from the after mounting the base to the box. The bases mount to North American 1-gang boxes to 3 inch or 4 inch octagon boxes, 1 inches (38 mm) They also mount to European BESA and 1-gang boxes with mm fixing centers. The KI-SB4, KI-RB4, and KI-IB4 mount to American 4 inch sq. electrical boxes in addition to the above They include the KI-TS4 Trim Skirt, which is used to cover ears on the base. The KI-ABST mounts to a 4 inch box only. Intelligent Series detector mount to North American boxes, 3-1/2 inch or inch octagon boxes, and to inch square electrical boxes inches (38 mm) deep. mount to European BESA 1-gang boxes with 60.3 mm centers. See mounting base and wiring for information. tab Indicator and reporting technology microprocessor in each detector provides additional Self-diagnostics and History Log, Multi-criteria and Fast, Stable Communication. and History Log – Each Kidde Intelligent detector constantly runs self-checks to provide important information. The results of the self-check are updated and permanently stored in the detector memory. Criteria Detection – Each detector houses an advanced chamber providing optical recognition of particles the onboard microprocessor to distinguish between particles and nuisance sources like cooking and steam. Stabl

Genesis LED Series Mount Devices LED EGC Series horns and LED strobes feature a sleek profile design and energy-efficient technology that makes less expensive to install and operate by reducing overhead. performance LEDs require fewer power supplies, backup and batteries. These new appliances are designed with, and life safety in mind. LED EGC Series uses high efficiency optics, combined patented electronics, to deliver a highly controlled and focused light distribution pattern in exchange for current requirements. Strobes feature field-selectable 30,75, or 115 cd light output. with Xenon-type strobes, Genesis LED EGC Series need fewer power supplies and often smaller wire which lightens conduit requirements. They are also compatible with legacy strobes, so there no need to all your existing devices to upgrade to new LED technology. fact, EGC strobes can be mixed on the same circuit and used in same field of view as Xenon-based strobes. This makes Genesis EGC Series ideal for new installations and retrofits alike. sound output levels provide the flexibility life safety projects demand, while the Genesis LED protocol keeps multiple strobes on compatible NAC synchronized to well within NFPA 72 requirements. is another area where EGC Series appliances shine. universal room side wiring plate allows for pre-installation electrical wiring as well as checking continuity with the diagnostics check bar. EGC Series devices can then be snapped into place with the confidence of knowing the is correct. The innovative under-cover diagnostic test points easy access to device circuit testing while mounted. Features High Performance LED Strobe Technology More devices per circuit Ability to use lower gauge wire Longer wire runs Fewer booster power supplies Ultra low device current consumption allows: High efficiency optics Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 115 cd light output LED devices may be mixed with legacy Xenon strobes Efficient Audible Output Selectable high or low dB horn output Selectable temporal or steady horn output Improved audio frequency range for better wall penetration Low-profile Design Ultra-slim… protrudes about 1.5″ from the mounting surface Attractive appearance… no visible mounting screws Multiple Marking Options Order Red or White with or without FIRE markings Change markings at any time with replaceable covers Easy to Install diagnostics check bar Pre-install and pre-wire with convenient universal room side wiring plate Check electrical continuity on room side wiring plate with Diagnostics port streamlines device circuit testing Fits 1-gang, 2-gang, 4-inch octagon, and 4-inch square electrical boxes Optional red and white trim plates available Slide switches for field configuration 12 to 18 AWG in-out screw terminals for quick wiring 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-1021 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 LED EGC Series horns, strobes, and horn-strobes mount any standard one-gang, two-gang, 4-inch octagon, and 4-inch electrical box. Matching optional EGCT trim rings are to cover oversized openings. Optional color matched surface boxes are also available. Genesis LED EGC are listed to be both wall mounted or ceiling mounted. EGC Series strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors ceiling-mounted public-mode notification appliances for the impaired. Prevailing codes require strobes to be used ambient noise conditions exceed 105 dBA (87 dBA in where occupants use hearing protection, and in of public accommodation as defined in the Americans Disabilities Act. is important in order to avoid triggering seizures people with photosensitive epilepsy. All Genesis strobes exceed synchronization requirements (within 10 milliseconds over a period) when used with a synchronization source. the specifications tabl

Ceiling Mount and LED EGCS Series LED EGCS Series speakers and speaker-strobes high performance output with a sleek low profile and energy-efficient technology that makes them less to install and operate. High performance LEDs require power supplies, backup power, and batteries. These appliances are designed with energy-efficiency, and life in mind. feature selectable wattage taps, while speaker- allow for both wattage and light output levels to be in the field. Both settings remain clearly visible even after final installation. Speakers are also capable of 25V and 70V and voltage in a single model with a field switch. All this flexibility allows devices to be easily to exactly how they needed to perform. All Genesis include a DC blocking capacitor to allow electrical of the audio distribution circuit. LED EGCS Series uses high efficiency optics, with patented electronics, to deliver a highly and efficiently focused light distribution pattern in for lower current requirements. Strobes feature field- 15, 30,75, or 115 cd light output. with Xenon-type strobes, Genesis LED EGCS Series offer greatly reduced current draw which provides in longer circuit lengths, more devices per circuit, smaller gauge and reduced power supply quantities for an installation. are also backwards compatible with legacy strobes, so no need to replace all your existing devices to upgrade to LED technology. In fact, EGCS strobes can be mixed on the circuit and used in the same field of view as Xenon-based This makes Genesis LED EGCS Series ideal for new and retrofits alike. sound output levels provide the flexibility life safety projects demand, while the Genesis LED protocol keeps multiple strobes on compatible NAC synchronized to well within NFPA 72 requirements. also meet NFPA and UL 520Hz requirements for sleeping making them ideal for new construction or retrofits. Series speakers produce crisp, clear voice audio output is highly intelligible over large areas. In an emergency, is critical to life safety. Understanding the content of message is as important as knowing there is an emergency. is measured in Speech Transmission Index and above .76 is considered excellent. EGCS Series deliver audio with an STI of .81 ensuring the message clear. is another area where EGCS Series appliances The universal room side wiring plate allows for pre- and electrical wiring as well as checking continuity with included diagnostics check bar. EGCS Series devices can then easily snapped into place with the confidence of knowing the is correct. The innovative under-cover diagnostic test points easy access to device circuit testing while mounted. 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-1025 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used alert or alarm signals is a minimum of 15 dB above the aver- ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level a duration of at least 60 seconds, whichever is greater. This measured 5 feet (1.5 m) above the floor. the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically a 6 dB reduction in the received sound pressure level. The effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the Doubling the power output of a device (e.g.: a speaker from to 2W) will increase the sound pressure level by 3dBA. Fidelity Sound LED EGCS Series High Fidelity appliances feature 87dB of output along with a highly intelligible Speech Transmission (STI) rating of .81. An STI rating above .76 is considered for speech intelligibility They are also effective in areas to high levels of ambient noise. appliances are ideal for hotels, dormitories and other occupancies that have sleeping areas that require 520Hz In sleeping areas, always ensure that the wattage tap of the is set sufficiently high so that the sound pressure reaches least 75 dBA at the pillow. appliances are part of an end-to-end audio system for use in sleeping areas when used in conjunction approved audio hardware and a factory-supplied 520 Hz Check the System Compatibility List

Wall Mount and LED EG4S Series LED EG4S Series speakers and speaker-strobes high performance output with a sleek low profile and energy-efficient technology that makes them less to install and operate. High performance LEDs require power supplies, backup power, and batteries. These appliances are designed with energy-efficiency, and life in mind. feature selectable wattage taps, while speaker- allow for both wattage and light output levels to be in the field. Both settings remain clearly visible even after final installation. Speakers are also capable of 25V and 70V and voltage in a single model with a field switch. All this flexibility allows devices to be easily to exactly how they needed to perform. All Genesis include a DC blocking capacitor to allow electrical of the audio distribution circuit. LED EG4S Series uses high efficiency optics, combined patented electronics, to deliver a highly controlled and focused light distribution pattern in exchange for lower requirements. Strobes feature field-selectable 15, 30,75, 110 cd light output. with Xenon-type strobes, Genesis LED EG4S Series offer greatly reduced current draw which provides in longer circuit lengths, more devices per circuit, smaller gauge and reduced power supply quantities for an installation. are also backwards compatible with legacy strobes, so no need to replace all your existing devices to upgrade to LED technology. In fact, EG4S strobes can be mixed on the circuit and used in the same field of view as Xenon-based This makes Genesis LED EG4S Series ideal for new and retrofits alike. sound output levels provide the flexibility life safety projects demand, while the Genesis LED protocol keeps multiple strobes on compatible NAC synchronized to well within NFPA 72 requirements. also meet NFPA and UL 520Hz requirements for sleeping making them ideal for new construction or retrofits. Series speakers produce crisp, clear voice audio output is highly intelligible over large areas. In an emergency, is critical to life safety. Understanding the content of message is as important as knowing there is an emergency. is measured in Speech Transmission Index and above .76 is considered excellent. EG4S Series deliver audio with an STI of .81 ensuring the message clear. is another area where EG4S Series appliances The universal room side wiring plate allows for pre- and electrical wiring as well as checking continuity with included diagnostics check bar. EG4S Series devices can then easily snapped into place with the confidence of knowing the is correct. The innovative under-cover diagnostic test points easy access to device circuit testing while mounted. 1 of 6 D A T A S H E E T K85001-1026 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.3 Features High Fidelity performance with excellent STI Increased sound fidelity and audio intelligibility with STI rating of .81 (More than .76 is excellent) Low Frequency (520Hz) capable Low frequency output meets NFPA standards for constructed commercial sleeping areas High Performance LED Strobe Technology More devices per circuit Ability to use lower gauge wire Longer wire runs Fewer booster power supplies Ultra low device current consumption allows: High efficiency optics Selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd light output LED devices may be mixed with legacy Xenon strobes the same circuit and in the same field of view Field flexibility Speakers are also capable of both 25V and 70V and voltage in a single model with a field selectable switch Speakers feature selectable wattage taps for 1W, and 2W to configure sound output levels in the field Low-profile Design Ultra-slim… protrudes about 1.5″ from the mounting surface Attractive appearance… no visible mounting screws Multiple Marking Options Order in red or white with or without FI

INTELLIGENT DETECTORS & LIFE SAFETY APPLIANCES GOT IT COVERED first system smoke detector that can differentiate between nuisance particles serious threats, Intelligent Optica detectors from Kidde reduce false and are already compliant with UL 268, 7th edition standards. Thanks to Optica detectors, you can start specifying a smarter solution today. YOU CAN COUNT ON proud to offer the Intelligent Optica detector in four comprehensive models, so you specify a smarter system for your facility. All the models offer the same groundbreaking technology, forward-migration (used as a modifier, like backwards-compatible) and state-of-the-art protection. A SMARTER SYSTEM the best Intelligent Optica detector model for your facility or and start enjoying the superior protection of optical sensing. and resorts experience startling number of nuisance every year, which cost and money, all while a negative impact on customer experience. & OFFICES clients profitable by their systems and retrofitting options that easy on the bottom line. nuisance alarms means interruptions in the while advanced provides for greater of mind for staff and staff, patients and visitors have to worry about detection. Let them focus what really matters and wellness detectors handle the rest. ASSISTED LIVING MULTIFAMILY HOUSING unnecessary visits the fire department and evacuations Optica detectors. patented optical sensor works by measuring the size, color, reflectivity and density particles reacting to those that pose a serious threat. June 2021, all new system-connected smoke detectors must pass updated UL 268, edition standards. Luckily, Intelligent Optica Detectors are already compliant ready for your next project. patented optical sensor can differentiate between nuisance particles like smoke, dust or steam, and serious hazards to drastically reduce alarms and business disruptions. Optica Detectors come in four models, including versions with heat Carbon Monoxide (CO) sensing, to cover a full range of applications, you can specify a smarter system today. features allow for forward migration with minimal system updates, you can retrofit an existing facility without reprogramming, rewiring changing an existing Intelligent detector base. DETECTORS SAFER FACILITIES Optica detectors have been engineered to make smoke detection cost effective and reliable. From the patented optical sensor that between nuisance particles and serious threats to the continuous the Optica detector has been fine-tuned to provide you with the efficient and effective fire and life safety protection on the market. COMPATIBLE with current or existing Kidde fire panels, no or reprogramming required first to become with UL 268, edition standards SOURCES more sophisticated system your experience on your needs LEVEL response & wiring compensates for its environment and notifies the when maintenance is due before potential arise RIGHT PARTNER IN PROTECTION is a world leader in the fire and life safety industry because we understand there more safety than equipment and technology. We take the time to collaborate with builders, owners, and designers to cultivate partnerships with community initiatives and non-profits to educate professionals and customers alike in fire safety. what possible for your business. YOUR KIDDE DEALER TODAY. THAT SAVES LIVES

Manual Override Series MR600 Series Relays provide SPDT, 10 Amp contacts with override capability by means of an ON-AUTO-OFF switch. relay requires a 24 Vac or 24 Vdc power source supplied by controlling system. With the switch in the ON position the relay is energized. With the switch in the AUTO position the is allowed to operate as signaled by the controlling system. the switch in the OFF position the relay cannot be energized. relay position contains a high intensity LED which, when indicated the relay coil is energized. relay circuits may be snapped apart from standard four eight-position modules, and are also available in the single configuration. Features Each relay position contains 10 Amp SPDT contacts Each relay position contains an on-auto-off switch for manual or external input control 24 Vac or 24 Vdc operation Each relay position contains a red led to indicate relay is energized Track mounting or metal swage spacers available Bussed power between individual relays which permits only power wires per module Snap-apart construction single relays may easily be re- from large module common power to each relay position is bussed on the wiring board which permits power to be connected only per multi-position module. devices are ideal for applications where local or remote are required for control of electrical loads. They are suit- for use with HVAC, Temperature Control, Fire Alarm, Security, management, and Lighting Control Systems. 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2761 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 2020 Carrier rights reserved. Requirement Contacts Data Temperature Vac or 24 Vdc @ 15 mA per position Amps @ 120 Vac; 10 Amps @ 24 Vdc Recognized, CSA Approved to 185 (-50 to 85 Information SPDT relay with LED , switch and mounting track SPDT relay with LEDs, switches and mounting track SPDT relay with LEDs, switches, and mounting track SPDT relay with LEDs, switches and mounting spacers 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2761 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1

Multi-Voltage Relays & MR200 Series ON MRSeries Multi-Voltage Control Relays offer SPDT or DPDT Amp contacts which may be operated by one of four input voltages. A single relay may be energized from a voltage of 24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 115 Vac or 230 Vac by wiring to ap- input terminals. relay position contains a red light emitting diode (LED) which the relay coil is energized. Relays may be from a standard four-module assembly and used independ- devices are ideal for applications where local contacts are for system status, remote contacts for control of electri- loads and general purpose switching. They are suitable for with HVAC Temperature Control, Fire Alarm, Security, Energy and Lighting Control Systems. MR204/T Features Each relay position may be energized from one of four input Each relay position contains a red LED which illuminates when coil is energized. This provides a timesaving convenience checking an installed system; no metering is required. Single, dual or triple relay modules may be apart a standard four-position master SPDT or DPDT relays available Available in dustproof metal enclosures with LED viewing port Track mounting hardware to facilitate installation in standard UL recognized relays rated at 10 million mechanical operations ULI listed as control unit accessory 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2762 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 Carrier rights reserved. Wiring CONTACT OUTPUTS UL LISTED FOR USE CONTACTS RESISTIVE: 7A @ 30VDC, @ 120VAC, 7A @ 230VAC .25HP 120/230VAC (N.C.), HP 120/230VAC (N.O.) RESISTIVE: 7A @ 30VDC, @ 120VAC, 7A @ 230VAC .25HP 120/230VAC (N.C.), HP 120/230VAC (N.O.) C NO C NO C NO DC COIL IS @ 15mA @ 48mA @ 21mA 230VAC @ 19mA 18/24 115 230 DC COIL IS @ 28mA @ 69mA @ 45mA 230VAC @ 36mA 18/24 115 Requirements Position Position Rating Temperature and MR201/T and MR201/C mA @ 24 Vac, 24 Vdc, 115 Vac, 230 Vac mA @ 24 Vac, 24 Vdc, 115 Vac, 230 Vac Recognized SPDT Recognized SPDT ga. CRS, plated with 1/2 in conduit knockouts (top and bottom) Amps @ 115 Vac to 185 (-50 to 85 Listed control unit accessory H x 2.125 W x 1.5 D in (76 H x 54 W x 38 D mm) H x 8.5 W x 1.5 D in (76 H x 216 W x 38 D mm) H x 3.25 W x 2.5 D in (156mm H x 83mm W x 64 D mm) Information SPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware SPDT relay with LED mounted in metal enclosure DPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware DPDT relay with LED mounted in metal enclosure DPDT realy with LEDs and track mounting hardware 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2762 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2

Multi-Voltage Relays & MR200 Series ON MRSeries Multi-Voltage Control Relays offer SPDT or DPDT Amp contacts which may be operated by one of four input voltages. A single relay may be energized from a voltage of 24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 115 Vac or 230 Vac by wiring to ap- input terminals. relay position contains a red light emitting diode (LED) which the relay coil is energized. Relays may be from a standard four-module assembly and used independ- devices are ideal for applications where local contacts are for system status, remote contacts for control of electri- loads and general purpose switching. They are suitable for with HVAC Temperature Control, Fire Alarm, Security, Energy and Lighting Control Systems. MR204/T Features Each relay position may be energized from one of four input Each relay position contains a red LED which illuminates when coil is energized. This provides a timesaving convenience checking an installed system; no metering is required. Single, dual or triple relay modules may be apart a standard four-position master SPDT or DPDT relays available Available in dustproof metal enclosures with LED viewing port Track mounting hardware to facilitate installation in standard UL recognized relays rated at 10 million mechanical operations ULI listed as control unit accessory 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2762 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 Carrier rights reserved. Wiring CONTACT OUTPUTS UL LISTED FOR USE CONTACTS RESISTIVE: 7A @ 30VDC, @ 120VAC, 7A @ 230VAC .25HP 120/230VAC (N.C.), HP 120/230VAC (N.O.) RESISTIVE: 7A @ 30VDC, @ 120VAC, 7A @ 230VAC .25HP 120/230VAC (N.C.), HP 120/230VAC (N.O.) C NO C NO C NO DC COIL IS @ 15mA @ 48mA @ 21mA 230VAC @ 19mA 18/24 115 230 DC COIL IS @ 28mA @ 69mA @ 45mA 230VAC @ 36mA 18/24 115 Requirements Position Position Rating Temperature and MR201/T and MR201/C mA @ 24 Vac, 24 Vdc, 115 Vac, 230 Vac mA @ 24 Vac, 24 Vdc, 115 Vac, 230 Vac Recognized SPDT Recognized SPDT ga. CRS, plated with 1/2 in conduit knockouts (top and bottom) Amps @ 115 Vac to 185 (-50 to 85 Listed control unit accessory H x 2.125 W x 1.5 D in (76 H x 54 W x 38 D mm) H x 8.5 W x 1.5 D in (76 H x 216 W x 38 D mm) H x 3.25 W x 2.5 D in (156mm H x 83mm W x 64 D mm) Information SPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware SPDT relay with LED mounted in metal enclosure DPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware DPDT relay with LED mounted in metal enclosure DPDT realy with LEDs and track mounting hardware 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2762 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2

Multi-Voltage Relays Series MR800 Series relays offer SPDT 10 Amp contacts which may operated by one of three input control voltages: 24 Vdc, 24 or 115 Vac. Each relay position contains a high intensity LED when illuminated, indicates the relay coil is energized. relays may be apart from a standard eight- module. are equipped with either mounting spacers or track mount- hardware. devices are ideal for applications where local contacts are for control of electrical loads or general purpose switch- They are suitable for use with HVAC, Temperature Control, Alarm, Security, Energy Management, and Lighting Control Features Each relay position may be energized from one of four input Each relay position contains a red LED which illuminates when coils are energized. This provides a time saving conve- when checking an installed system; no metering is From one to eight relay modules may be formed by apart desired positions Compact 10 AMP SPDT contacts Choice of metal spacers or plastic track for mounting UL recognized components 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2763 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 Carrier rights reserved. Requiremets Rating Temperature mA per position @ 24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 115 Vac Recognized SPDT Amps @ 115 Vac to 185 (-50 to 85 Recognized components H x 4.25 W x 1.0 D in (82.6 H x 108 W x 25.4 D mm) H x 8.5 W x 1.0 D in (82.6 H x 216 W x 25.4 D mm) Information SPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware SPDT relay with LED and mounting spacers SPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware SPDT relay with LED and mounting spacers SPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2763 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2

Multi-Voltage Relays Series MR700 Series relays offers SPDT 10 Amp contacts which be operated by one of four input control voltages: 12 Vdc, Vac, 24 Vdc, or 24 Vac. Each relay position contains a high LED which, when illuminated, indicates the relay coil relays may be apart from a standard eight- module. are equipped with either mounting spacers or track mount- hardware. devices are ideal for applications where contacts are for control of electrical loads or general purpose switch- They are suitable for use with HVAC, Temperature Control, Alarm, Security, Energy Management, and Lighting Control Features Each relay position may be energized from one of four input Each relay position contains a red LED which illuminates when coil is energized. a timesaving convenience when checking an installed no metering is required From one to eight relay modules may be formed by desired positions Compact 10 AMP SPDT contacts Choice of metal spacers or plastic track for mounting UL recognized components 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2764 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 Carrier rights reserved. Requiremets Rating Temperature mA per position @ 12 Vdc, 12 Vac, 24 Vdc, 24 Vac Recognized SPDT Amps @ 115 Vac to 185 (-50 to 85 Recognized componets H x 1.062 W x 1.0 D in (82.6 H x 27 W x 25.4 D mm) H x 4.25 W x 1.0 D in (82.6 H x 108 W x 25.4 D mm) H x 8.5 W x 1.0 D in (82.6 H x 216 W x 25.4 D mm) Information SPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware SPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware SPDT relay with LED and track mounting hardware 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2764 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2

Heavy Duty Relays 199 Series MR 199 Heavy Duty Power Relays are designed for control where 30 Amp DPDT contacts are required. The relay with 24Vdc, which may be mounted in a rugged steel Standard Features Heavy duty 30 Amp DPDT contacts 24 Vdc Sturdy metal enclosure 199 SERIES 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2765 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 Arrangement Rating Power Range 199X13 X13/C Standard Amps @ 300 Vac, 2 HP Motor Load Vdc @ 85 mA to 122 (-30 to 50 H x 2.5 W X 2.31 inches (79.4 H x 63.5 W x 58.7 D mm) H x 3.38 W x 3.13 D inches H x 85.9 W x 96.8 D mm) Information 199X13 199X13/C 24 Vdc, relay only 24 Vdc, mounted in enclosure that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 Carrier rights reserved. 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2765 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2

Multi-Voltage Relay PAM1 PAM1 Relay is encapsulated multi-voltage device providing Amp Form C contacts. The relay may be energized by one of input voltages: 24 Vac, 24 Vdc, or 115 Vac. Features Completely encapsulated 10 Amp relay Relay may be energized by one of three input voltages Contains a red LED which illuminates when relay coil is ener- red LED is provided which, when illuminated, indicates the relay is energized. PAM1 may be mounted by using the double-sided adhesive the self-drilling screw, or loosely placed in a back box. PAM1 is ideal for applications where remote relays are for control or status feedback. They are suitable for use HVAC, Temperature Control, Fire Alarm, Security, Energy and Lighting Control Systems. May be mounted by double-sided adhesive tape, self-drilling or placed in back box Convenient 6 in (150mm) wire leads for electrical connections 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2766 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Requirments Rating Temperature mA per position @ 24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 115 Vac Recognized SPDT Amps @ 115 Vac to 185 (-50 to 85 Recognized components H x 1 W .875 D inches (38.1 x 24.5 x 22.2 mm) 6 inch (150mm) wire leads 18 AWG (1.00mm Information Description SPDT relay with LED double-sided adhesive tape, screw and 6 in (150 mm) leads. that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 2020 Carrier rights reserved. 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85003-2766 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1

Remote Booster Supplies MIRBPS10A Booster Power Supply (MIRBPS) is a UL 864, 10th Edition power supply. It is a 24 Vdc filtered-regulated, and su- unit that can easily be configured to provide additional appliance circuits (NACs) or auxiliary power for Mass Communication (MNEC), as well as life applications. MIRBPS contains the circuitry to monitor and charge internal external batteries. Its steel enclosure has room for up to two ampere-hour batteries. The MIRBPS has four Class B (convert- to two Class A) NACs. These can be activated in one or two from the MIRBPS unique dual input circuits. MIRBPS is available in 6.5 or 10 ampere models. Each output has a capacity of three amperes; total current draw cannot the unit rating. MIRBPS meets current UL requirements and is listed under following standards: (CCN) 10th ed.ition (UOXX)Fire Alarm Systems (ANET, UEHX7) (AOTX, AOTX7) (APAW, APAW7) (APOU, APOU7) Proprietary Burglar Alarm System Units (AMCX) (UOXXC) (AOTX7) No. 205 Station Alarm Unit Units, Fire Alarm (Canada) Burglar Alarm Units and Systems (Canada) Equipment (Canada) Alarm Units and Systems Burglar Alarm Units and Systems Station Connected Burglar Alarm Units and Systems Features Allows for reliable filtered and regulated power to be installed needed Cost effective system expansion Provides for Genesis and Enhanced Integrity notification ap- synchronization Supports coded output operation Self-restoring overcurrent protection Multiple signal rates Can be cascaded or controlled independently On-board diagnostic LEDs identify wiring or internal faults Standard Kidde keyed lockable steel cabinet with removable field configuration and 230 Vac models available Accommodates 18 to 12 AWG wire sizes Optional tamper switch Dual battery charging rates Optional earthquake hardening: OSHPD seismic pre-approval component Importance Factor 1.5 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85005-0125 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 View View knockouts 3/4 in conduit cm) in cm) in cm) in cm) in cm) in cm) in cm) routing MIRBPS provides additional power and circuits for notification and other 24 Vdc loads. It is listed for indoor dry loca- and can easily be installed where needed. conditions are indicated on the on-board diagnostic LEDs, the MIRBPS input sense circuit and the trouble relay (if While this provides indication to the host system, MIRBPS can still be activated upon command. A separate AC contact is available on the MIRBPS circuit board, which can programmed for trouble or AC Fail. There are seven on-board LEDs: one for each NAC fault, one for battery fault, one ground fault, and one for AC power. unique dual-input activation circuits of the MIRBPS can be by any voltage from 6 to 45 VDC (filtered-regulated) or to 33 Vdc (full-wave rectified, unfiltered). The first input circuit be configured to activate 1-4 of the four possible outputs. The input circuit can be configured to control circuits 3 and 4. outputs are configured for auxiliary operation, these circuits be configured to stay on or automatically deactivate 30 sec- after AC power is lost. This feature makes these circuits ideal door holder applications. The MIRBPS also has a separate 200 24 Vdc output that can be used to power internal activation NACs can be configured for a 3-3-3 temporal or continu- output. This makes the MIRBPS ideal for applications requir- signaling rates that are not available from the main system. addition to the internally generated signal rates, the MIRBPS also be configured to follow the coded signal rate of the main NACs. This allows for the seamless expansion of existing MIRBPS enclosure has mounting brack

Conventional Fire Systems FX-10R, FX-5RD, FX-5R 6230 brand conventional fire alarm systems consist of 5 and zone fire alarm control panels (FACP), an optional integrated DACT (dialer), intelligent/analog type detector serial annunciator modules, and serial remote relay mod- All FACPs and components are Listed to the 10th edition of ANSI/UL 864 standard and CSFM/FDNY approved. systems incorporate features designed to simplify installation, and maintenance, including front panel programming, one walk testing, and selectable IDC and NAC types. In addition, used with CleanMe -compatible smoke detectors, these con- panels provide intelligent type features such as remote mainte- alert and automatic drift compensation that significantly reduce chance of a false alarm and simplify maintenance calls. systems are powerful enough to meet the demands of life safety installations while leaving plenty of room to grow the future. They support Class A operation by combining pairs of IDCs or NACs to provide the necessary Class A circuits. example, the FX-10RD comes factory set to support 10 Class B and 4 NACs. But it can be field-configured to provide 5 Class IDCs (no Class B IDC and 2 Class A NACs or any other com- of circuits that fall within the circuit-pairing parameters. B IDCs A IDCs B NACs A NACs Power power to 10 to 5 to 4 to 2 amps amps to 5 to 2 to 2 amps amps Class A operation will reduce the number of available Class B IDCs and/or NACs, on the panel configuration. See Specifications for details. Features Available in 5 and 10 zone (IDC) models CleanMe feature provides remote annunciation of a dirty Automatic drift compensation with select detectors reduces false and extends dust life Listed to ANSI/UL 864 10th Edition Models with fully integrated upload/download DACT enables programming Zone or NAC pairs convertible to single Class A circuits Combination Waterflow and Supervisory IDCs NACs programmable by zone and individually selectable for appliances, continuous, temporal outputs, or coded Front panel programmable simplifies installation and servicing Precision synchronization with compatible notification appli- and optional audible silence over two wires On-board relays for Alarm, Supervisory and Trouble Optional serial bus relay modules are programmable for Com- Zone, or Matrix activation Optional serial bus remote annunciator family One person walk-test (audible or silent) Optional City Tie and Reverse Polarity Modules Trim ring available for semi-flush mounting 1 of 8 D A T A S H E E T K85005-0126 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 2.3 conventional fire alarm systems provide smoke and fire de- occupant notification and off-premises signaling for small- medium-sized buildings. IDC can be configured for either Class B or Class A opera- and one of eight operating modes: Alarm or without smoke detector verification including of contact devices Waterflow Alarm; Waterflow Alarm/Supervisory (Combination IDC); Supervisory (Latching/non-latching); Monitor (non alarm or supervisory) Signal Silence Drill Cross zoning may also be configured for either Class B or Class A Additionally, NACs can be individually configured for of six outputs. These are Genesis, Genesis (A/V silenceable), Temporal, Coded, and City Tie. The Genesis selec- allows independent horn control over two wires and provides synchronization of notification appliances, all without the for a signal master accessory. configured for compatible notification appliances, the Alarm function will silence connected audible appliances but will remain active until the panel is reset. When Genesis is selected, both the horns and strobes on compatible notifi- appliances will be synchronized across all NACs. Zones may be selected for either latching or non-latching Always check with your AHJ regarding approval silencing a

Auxiliary Supplies APS10A 6020 Auxiliary Power Supply (APS) is a UL 864, 10th Edition listed supply. It is a 24 Vdc filtered-regulated, and supervised that can easily be configured to provide additional notification circuits (NACs) or auxiliary power for Mass Notification/ Communication (MNEC), as well as life safety applica- APS contains the circuitry to monitor and charge internal external batteries. Its steel enclosure has room for up to two ampere-hour batteries. The APS has four Class B (convert- to two Class A) NACs. These can be activated in one or two from the APS unique dual input circuits. The APS has a AC power indicator LED. APS also has room for and can power a number of different These can be Signature AA-30 or AA-50 dual-channel amplifiers, UIO modules and/or GSA-RELs. APS is available in 6.5 or 10 ampere models. Each output cir- is has a capacity of three amperes; total current draw cannot the unit rating. Allows for reliable filtered and regulated power to be installed needed Cost effective system expansion Provides for Genesis and Enhanced Integrity notification ap- synchronization Supports coded output operation Self-restoring overcurrent protection Multiple signal rates Can be cascaded or controlled independently On-board diagnostic LEDs identify wiring or internal faults Standard Kidde keyed lockable steel cabinet with removable field configuration and 230 Vac models available Accommodates 18 to 12 AWG wire sizes Optional tamper switch Dual battery charging rates APS meets current UL requirements and is listed as under the standards: (CCN) 10th ed.ition (UOXX) Fire Alarm Systems (ANET, UEHX7) (AOTX, AOTX7) (APAW, APAW7) (APOU, APOU7) (AMCX) (UOXXC) (AOTX7) No. 205 Alarm Units and Systems Burglar Alarm Units and Systems Station Connected Burglar Alarm Units and Systems Burglar Alarm System Units Station Alarm Unit Units, Fire Alarm (Canada) Burglar Alarm Units and Systems (Canada) Equipment (Canada) 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85005-0127 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 APS provides additional power and circuits for notification ap- and other 24 Vdc loads. It is listed for indoor dry locations can easily be installed where needed. conditions are indicated on the on-board diagnostic LEDs, the APS input sense circuit and the trouble relay (if While this provides indication to the host system, APS can still be activated upon command. A separate AC contact is available on the APS circuit board, which can be for trouble or AC Fail. There are seven on-board LEDs: one for each NAC fault, one for battery fault, one ground fault, and one for AC power. unique dual-input activation circuits of the APS can be acti- by any voltage from 6 to 45 VDC (filtered-regulated) or 11 to Vdc (full-wave rectified, unfiltered). The first input circuit can be to activate 1-4 of the four possible outputs. The second circuit can be configured to control circuits 3 and 4. When are configured for auxiliary operation, these circuits can be to stay on or automatically deactivate 30 seconds after power is lost. This feature makes these circuits ideal for door applications. The APS also has a separate 200 mA 24 Vdc that can be used to power internal activation modules. NACs can be configured for a 3-3-3 temporal or continuous This makes the APS ideal for applications requiring signal- rates that are not available from the main system. addition to the internally generated signal rates, the APS can also configured to follow the coded signal rate of the main system This allows for the seamless expansion of existing NACs. the top of the steel enclosure, the APS has space and mount- bosses for: Up to two SIGA-AA30 or SIGA-AA50 dual-channel audio am- One GSA-UIO6 or GSA-UIO6R module motherboard Up to two GSA-UIO2R module motherboards Up to two GSA-REL releasing modules Up to two GSA-MP2L mounting plates mo

R-Series Remote RLCD-C, RLED, RLED-C, GCI R-Series Annunciators are high-performance remote an- that provide status indication and common controls for fire alarm control panels. This family of annunciators LCD or LED annunciation. Models are available with and common controls. are three R-Series annunciator models, plus an LED-based Up to two expanders can be connected to any annun- The expander includes 24 pairs of LEDs that extend the of any of the annunciators. annunciator models include status LEDs and an internal buzzer. models have an LCD text display, and one has 16 pairs of for zone annunciation. LCD models feature a large back-lit, by twenty character per line, super-twist liquid crystal display. annunciators and expanders are mounted on a standard square electrical box, using the included mounting ring. can also be surface mounted in locking steel enclosures. different enclosures are available. keyswitch and graphic annunciator interface is available for annunciator applications. The keyswitch enables or dis- common controls. The graphic annunciator interface cards 32 LEDs and 16 switches on the graphic panel display. 6020 LCD models feature large 4 x 20 character backlit LCD display LED models provide 16 pairs of LEDs for zone annunciation Available expander extends capability with 24 pairs of LEDs Up to two expanders may be wired to each annunciator Status LEDs and internal buzzer standard on all models Common controls available for LED and LCD display models Available keyswitch for disabling common controls Standard 4-inch square electrical box mounting Class B or Class A RS485 wiring standard One-, two-, and three-position enclosures available Graphic Annunciator interface, includes common control, indi- and 32 LEDS from panel No programing required, set the address and unit receives all 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85005-0128 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.1 Alarm Fault Enabled Silence Test Alarm Fault Enabled Test annunciators communicate with the FACP on the RS-485 riser. This can be configured for Class A or Class B commu- Annunciators do not provide ground fault isolation. Alarm Fault Enabled Test annunciators are stand-alone units that can be powered by FACP or by an approved power supply. Wiring Class A Class B + + + + 24 VDC 24 VDC VDC + VDC VDC + VDC + + VDC + VDC Alarm Fault Enabled Test Silence 24 VDC + + 24 VDC 24 VDC VDC + VDC VDC + VDC + 24 VDC VDC + VDC (+) IN ( ) IN (+) IN (+) OUT ( ) IN ( ) OUT (+) OUT (+) IN ( ) OUT ( ) IN (+) IN (+) OUT ( ) IN ( OUT (+) OUT (+) IN ( OUT ( ) IN (+) IN (+) OUT ( ) IN ( ) OUT (+) OUT ( ) OUT (+) IN ( ) IN (+) IN (+) OUT ( ) IN ( ) OUT (+) OUT (+) IN ( ) OUT ( ) IN (+) IN (+) OUT ( ) IN ( OUT (+) OUT (+) IN ( OUT ( ) IN (+) IN (+) OUT (

Intelligent Fire Systems FX-1000 brand intelligent life safety systems offer the power of intelligent processing in configurations that deliver solutions for small to mid-sized applications. With detection, rotary addressing, automatic device mapping, Ethernet connectivity, and a full line of easily-configured cards and modules, these flexible systems offers offer ver- that benefits building owners and contractors alike. FX-64 provides one Class A or Class B intelligent device loop supports up to 64 device addresses, and two Class B Notifi- Ap pliance Circuits (NACs). Optional Class A device wiring is with the use of a module. FX-1000 provides one Class A or Class B intelligent device that supports up to 250 device addresses. Loop controller may be added in combination to expand total system in 250-point increments to up to 1,000 device addresses. FX-1000 panel includes four NACs that may be wired for Class A or Class B operation. RZI16-2RS module adds even more capacity to FX instal- by adding up to 16 conventional device circuits and two notification appliance circuits. This makes them an ideal solution that can accommodate new intelligent detectors, well as existing conventional devices. 1 of 8 6231 Auto-programming speeds installation time Supports intelligent addressable devices that includes next generation CO sensing technology Form C contacts for alarm and trouble, Form A for supervisory Easy-to-configure rotary addressing Optional Ethernet port (SA-ETH) for central station monitoring programming, diagnostics and a variety of system reports Two programmable switches with LEDs and custom labeling Supports horn silence over two wires, and UL 1971-compliant synchronization Class B or Class A wiring Ground fault detection by module Optional multi-protocol Field Server Bridge for interface 3rd party Building Management Systems Supports up to eight serial annunciators, (LCD, LED-only, graphic interface) Can use existing wiring for most retrofit applications Upload/download remotely or locally Optional USB module for local printing or programming using configuration utility on a technician laptop Two-level maintenance alert reporting Pre-alarm and alarm verification by point Adjustable detector sensitivity 4 x 20 character backlit LCD display Optional earthquake hardening: seismic Importance Factor 1.5 Standalone operation Transmission test frequency by hour Alarm ON command manually activates alarm condition D A T A S H E E T K85005-0137 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 3.0 FX Series life safety systems are powerful intelligent solu- for small to mid-sized buildings. Advanced analog technology the benefits of flexible system installation, while clean and user interfaces make panel operation and system quick and intuitive. you can count on inherent fault-tolerant characteristics of Analog/Address- Technology boosts the reliability of Kidde fire alarm systems. combined with FX Series smoke and heat detectors, these deliver a level of dependability not previously available small to mid-sized applications. All Kidde systems are built to reliability benchmarks and meet international standards quality, in addition to agency listings for dependability. built right in fully-programmable front panel switch/LED combinations pro- an added measure of flexibility. Their slide-in labels take the out of custom applications, and present a clean finished for retrofits FX Series control panels are particularly well-suited to retrofit All connections are made over standard wiring no cable required. This means that in most situations exist- wiring can be used to upgrade a legacy control panel to FX without the expense or disruption of rewiring the entire FX control panels also support the ingenious RZI16-2RS module, which adds up to 16 conventional circuits and two This combination easily accommodates new intelligent alongside existing conventional circuits,

Sealed Lead-Acid sealed lead-acid batteries are ideal for use as a (standby) power source as defined by NFPA 72. Their maintenance and high energy density make them ideal for fire signaling applications. multiple power supplies are provided, each power supply requirements should be calculated individually. Consult specific system manual to determine battery capacity require- Features Rechargeable Non-spillable Non-hazardous Low maintenance High energy density Information to a battery low internal resistance and high power density, high levels of short current can develop across battery terminals. Put on protective eye covering remove all jewelry before working on batteries. Do not rest tools or cables on the and only use insulated tools. Follow all manufacturers installation instructions diagrams when installing or maintaining batteries. 1 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85010-0127 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2 Material Information Environment Thermoplastic Class 60, Batteries, non-hazardous, non-spillable F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C) 0 to 93% RH, Non-condensing that saves lives us 888.244.9979 (Option 4) kidde-esfire.com [email protected] is a Carrier brand. Town Center Pkwy, FL 34202 2020 Carrier rights reserved. Information # Description Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery – 12 Vdc Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery – 12 Vdc Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery – 12 Vdc Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery – 12 Vdc Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery – 12 Vdc Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery – 12 Vdc Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery – 12 Vdc Ah Sealed Lead Acid Battery – 12 Vdc Weight, lb (kg) (2.27) (2.72) (4.45) (5.90) (9.07) (14.51) (18.14) (22.23) 2 of 2 D A T A S H E E T K85010-0127 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1.2

BMS Server Bridge Bridge BMS Communication Bridges are ancillary devices that protocol translation between VS1 or VS4 control panel data and the se rial or Ethernet input of an external device Signal flow is typically one way from the life safety to the network to the building automation system. communication bridge comes with the MODBUS protocol, protocols are available by a simple download, see the instruction on directions to obtain the othe available SA-FSB is a multi-protocol bridge that converts the panel output (printer port) to any one of the several supported including Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, BACnet MSTP, IP/Eth, and DNP Ethernet. The SA-FSB is shipped with Modbus TCP protocol. Follow the installation instructions to one of the other supported protocols. communications bridge operates over RS-232 serial from the fire alarm control panel and to the via RS-485 or Ethernet (10/100 Base-T). communicates with the panel through an RS-232 connection the optional SA-232 card. It communicates with the BMS an RS-485 or Ethernet connection. Standard Features Links VS1 or VS4 with building management system events to a BMS system via serial or Ethernet helping to reduce interface hardware costs Supplied with field protocols, Modbus, BACnet DNP Ethernet module provides selection of any single protocol no to purchase separate software or hardware modules Serial and Ethernet ports connection type for the BMS system: RS-232 or 10/100 Base-T Software configuration installation and setup Selectable connection to BMS via RS-485 or Ethernet communicates with the panel through an RS-232 connection the optional SA-232 card. It communicates with the BMS an RS-485 or Ethernet connection. RoHS compliant readiness for the Restriction of Certain Hazardous (RoHS) directives that are becoming prevalent in jurisdictions. 1 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85010-0157 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Wiring RTU MSTP IP Ethernet TCP/IP Vdc from Panel ground fire panel selected for bridging VS1 or VS4 panels to building systems depend on the requirements of the device controller. Before specifying an FSB bridge, the communications protocol and the communications required by third-party equipment. Keep in mind that SA-FSB supports either Ethernet or serial interfaces. bridges communicate with VS1 or VS4 systems via an RS-232 cable. This connects between the panel RS-232 port via the SA-232 option module to bridge 6-pin terminal block. Software is used to select the communications protocol where applicable, and whether serial or the Ethernet interface is to be used for output to equipment. order to complete the bridging process, individual points need be specified within the FSB software. This allows the bridge relay only required data to the external device controller. To do use the VS-CU to identify and export a list of relevant device Then simply import this list into the FSB software and a new configuration file for uploading to the bridge. Specification system shall proved an interface from the fire/life safety tem to the Building Management System. The interface shall via < Modbus RTU> protocol. The interface shall be configurable as to which points from the fire systems be provided to the BMS. The BMS interface shall be powered the main fire alarm panel, and mounted adjacent to it in a enclosure. or VS4 Panels supports SA-FSB to one Panel.) Panel (RS-232) GND Connection BMS Equipment Connection BMS Equipment in (73 mm) in mm) in (83 mm) in (92 mm) in (41 mm) 2 of 4 D A T A S H E E T k85010-0157 to be used for instal

BMS Server Bridge Bridge BMS Communication Bridges are ancillary devices that protocol translation between FX-64 or FX-1000 control serial data and the se rial or Ethernet input of an external controller. Signal flow is typically one way from the life panel to the network to the building automation system. communication bridge comes with the MODBUS protocol, protocols are available by a simple download, see the instruction on directions to obtain the othe available SA-FSB is a multi-protocol bridge that converts the panel output (printer port) to any one of the several supported including Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP, BACnet MSTP, IP/Eth, and DNP Ethernet. The SA-FSB is shipped with Modbus TCP protocol. Follow the installation instructions to one of the other supported protocols. communications bridge operates over RS-232 serial from the fire alarm control panel and to the BMS RS-485 or Ethernet (10/100 Base-T). communicates with the panel through an RS-232 connection the optional SA-232 card. It communicates with the BMS an RS-485 or Ethernet connection. Features Links FX-64 or FX-1000 with building management system events to a BMS system via serial or Ethernet helping to reduce interface hardware costs Supplied with field protocols, Modbus, BACnet DNP Ethernet module provides selection of any single protocol no to purchase separate software or hardware modules Serial and Ethernet ports connection type for the BMS system: RS-232 Ethernet 10/100 Base-T Software configuration installation and setup Selectable connection to BMS via RS-485 or Ethernet communicates with the panel through an RS-232 connection the optional SA-232 card. It communicates with the BMS an RS-485 or Ethernet connection. RoHS compliant readiness for the Restriction of Certain Hazardous (RoHS) directives that are becoming prevalent in jurisdictions. 1 of 4 A T A S H E E T K85010-0158 to be used for installation purposes. Issue 1 Wiring RTU MSTP IP Ethernet TCP/IP Vdc from Panel ground fire panel selected for bridging FX-64 or FX-1000 panels to building systems depend on the requirements of the external controller. Before specifying an FSB bridge, determine communications protocol and the communications interface by third-party equipment. Keep in mind that he SA-FSB either Ethernet or serial interfaces. bridges communicate with FX-64 or FX-1000 systems via installer-supplied RS-232 cable. This connects between the panel RS-232 port via the SA-232 option module to the 6-pin terminal block. Software is used to select the desired protocol where applicable, and whether the serial the Ethernet interface is to be used for output to field equipment. order to complete the bridging process, individual points need be specified within the FSB software. This allows the bridge relay only required data to the external device controller. To do use the iO-CU to identify and export a list of relevant device Then simply import this list into the FSB software and a new configuration file for uploading to the bridge. Specification system shall proved an interface from the fire/life safety tem to the Building Management System. The interface be via < Modbus RTU> Ethernet> protocol. The interface be software configurable as to which points from the fire shall be provided to the BMS. The BMS interface shall be from the main fire alarm panel, and mounted adjacent to in a MFC-A enclosure. or FX-1000 Panels supports SA-FSB to one Panel.) Panel (RS-232) GND Connection BMS Equipment Connection BMS Equipment in (73 mm) in mm) in (83 mm) in (92 mm) in (41 mm) 2 of 4 D A T A S H E E T K85010-0158 to be used for installation

FX SERIES SERIES & MONITORING SOLUTIONS GOT IT COVERED FX life safety systems provide control panels, devices and accessories all to work together seamlessly for reliable performance and worry-free operation. systems put you in charge, allowing you to tailor each system to your requirements and to your budget, with plenty of room to upgrade and expand in the future. quick setup to streamlined service and maintenance, your building protected and keeping it that way is easy. to be backwards compatible, the FX Series can use device wiring most legacy systems with no effect on performance. That means you don to bear the expense or endure the disruption of rewiring your building. FX Series is built upon Kidde legacy of innovation and expertise in life technologies. When you choose a FX Series life safety system, putting your con dence in a name you known and trusted for years. front panel operation and a user-friendly design your building personnel in full control of your FX Series system. the FX Series, you now have access to life safety technology a short time ago was beyond the reach of most small building budgets. ADDRESSABLE ADDRESSABLE & DESIGNED FOR SMALL BUILDINGS & DESIGNED FOR SMALL BUILDINGS SYSTEM a suite of intelligent addressable detectors. PORT/IP local or remote & programming IP Communications a central monitoring station. MODULE for local & printing. SECURITY system operations the face of outside threats. ground fault speci es a problem occurs. the use of existing wire in most retro ts. TECHNOLOGY WITH VALUABLE FEATURES TECHNOLOGY WITH VALUABLE FEATURES DRIFT for extended detector life. AMPS equipment across the board. signal & audible silence. for programming central monitoring connectivity. OR PAIRS convert to Class A circuits. A WATERFLOW SUPERVISORY ZONES wiring cost & increases availability for other applications WHAT POSSIBLE NOW FX systems support Kidde Genesis speakers, horns and LED strobes. These highly cient appliances feature ultra-low current draw and low-pro le design. Plus they require backup power and fewer power supplies and batteries. LED EG1 WALL-MOUNTED HORNS HORN-STROBES wall-mounted horns and horn- that feature a le design, selectable and low-dB horn output low current draw of 24mA all candela settings. LED EG4 STROBES, & HORN-STROBES strobes, horns horn-strobes that boast eld-selectable light outputs, wiring with continuity and strobe current draw 28mA across all candela LED EGC HORNS HORN-STROBES strobes, and horn-strobes with eld-selectable light outputs, wiring with continuity and check current draw 35mA across all candela MASTER or panel- modules bring 1971 compliance any listed re alarm panel, and independent control over two Series SUPPLIES Power Supplies that Kidde low pro le cation appliances and offer synchronization while independent horn over a single pair of Available in 6.5 and 10 models. & ANNUNCIATION LED EG4S & STROBES speakers and that feature eld-selectable light outputs strobe current draw of across all

This is an HTML message. For an Adobe Acrobat version, click here to login and download the complete .PDF. 15, 2017 Change Update note updated pricing for the Low Frequency Audible Horns effective September 15, 2017. Genesis G4LF Series part numbers included in this change are G4LFRN-H, G4LFRF-H, G4LFWF-H, AND frequency (520 Hz) horn, red housing, no marking frequency (520 Hz) horn, red housing, with marking frequency (520 Hz) horn, white housing, FIRE marking Low frequency (520 Hz) horn, white housing, no marking September 15, 2017 Date September 15, 2017 September 15, 2017 September 15, 2017 to access a printable copy of this release online in .PDF format. NOT REPLY to this message. You have received this e-mail message because you have been identified as a life safety or security professional. We will sell or distribute your e-mail address to any outside source. my-eddie.com today.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

December 2001 & Manual 06-235793-001 Listing File No. S2422 Systems SUMMARY Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to this fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or intercon- cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and under- – System Re-acceptance Test after Re-Programming: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested accordance with NFPA – 1996 Chapter 7 after any programming operation. Re-acceptance testing is required after any change, or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. components, circuits and system operations known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0 to 49 C and at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) @ 30 the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with nominal room temperature of 60-80 all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce suscep- The use of overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended due to the increased susceptibility to nearby strikes. Consult with the Applications Engineering Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cable from the sides. Before making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery and printed circuit board location. not over tighten screw terminals, over tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficult screw terminal removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that charges are removed from the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit. the Instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage the control panel and associated equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper installation. Alarm System Limitations While installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning devices, a fire alarm control with remote notification-capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such a system, however, not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second floor detector, for may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Furthermore, all types of smoke detectors – both ionization and photoelectric have sensing limitations. No type of smoke detector can sense every kind of fire caused by carelessness and safety hazards as smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, playing with matches, or arson. warning devices such as bells, may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open d

No text preview available.

FACTS BULLETIN E C H N I C A L S U P P O R T / N T F 0 0 0 0 7 K Series: Reset Switch Safety Issue SAFETY UPDATE bulletin informs you of a potential life safety issue associated with specific ANS Series audio notification The affected models are: ANS100MDG2, ANS100MDR2, ANS50MDG2, ANS50MDR2, ANS25MDG2, ANS25MDR2. bulletin supersedes Tech Facts Bulletin TF00007K dated 31AUG18. ANS Series audio notification systems referenced above have a switch (S1) that, when pressed, performs a reset on the ANS microprocessor. Pressing switch S1 while the ANS system is in a trouble state, either of a notification appliance circuit wiring fault or because of a fault condition on an external card (e.g., an ANSSW8, ANSDC8, or ANSXM8), may cause the fault to clear even though the actual fault is still Pressing the S1 switch may result in a loss of audio notification during an emergency event. Do not switch S1, except under the direction of a technical support representative. issue affects products built before 2019. If the Date Code on the product label ends in 18 or lower, you must the product firmware as described below. The product label is on the inside of the cabinet door. built in January 2019 (date code: 0119) and later use updated firmware that resolves this issue. To this issue in products built before January 2019, you must update the product firmware. Follow the below. 2019 United Technologies Corporation / 4 TF00007K REV 002 ISS 28AUG19 DMR Firmware Programmer 1.0 Go to https://myeddie.edwardsutcfs.com, log in, and then download TF00007 ANS Firmware Update.zip to a location on your hard drive. For example, D: Unzip TF00007 ANS Firmware Update.zip. Open the D: ANS Firmware Update folder, right-click setup.exe, and then click Run as Click Install. the product firmware the product is installed, remove all sources of power. Switch off the branch circuit that supplies AC power to product, and then disconnect the batteries. On the target ANS product, set SN1-4 to the ON position (down). Connect a micro USB-to-USB cable to P9. Press switch S1 to reset the product. Start DMR Programmer 1.0, and then click Browse. TF00007K REV 002 ISS 28AUG19 / 4 Go to the D: ANS Firmware Update Image folder, select 180518_DMR_3_15.hex, then click Open. Click Connect. TF00007K REV 002 ISS 28AUG19 / 4 Click Start. After the firmware has been successfully updated, click Done. Set SN1-4 to the OFF position (up), and then press S1. After the product resets, disconnect the micro cable. In a conspicuous place on the product label, record that the product firmware is Version DMR 3.15. If the product is already installed, power up the unit, and then perform a system test. NFPA 72 requires test inspection of voice evacuation equipment during initial commissioning, annual inspection, or of the fire alarm system. support +1 888 244 9979 +1 866 226 2126 TF00007K REV 002 ISS 28AUG19 / 4